| all | frequencies |
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| manual |
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 |
|
reference manual | Users Manual | 2.11 MiB | October 10 2001 | |||
| 1 | ID Label/Location Info | October 10 2001 | ||||||
| 1 | Operational Description | October 10 2001 | ||||||
| 1 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | October 10 2001 | ||||||
| 1 |
|
Photos of PCB | Internal Photos | 1.03 MiB | October 10 2001 | |||
| 1 | External Photos | October 10 2001 | ||||||
| 1 | Test Report | October 10 2001 |
| 1 | reference manual | Users Manual | 2.11 MiB | October 10 2001 |
A 1 5 5 7 0 0 P Ericsson GSM System, BSS R8 RBS 2206 Reference Manual EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A E RBS 2206 Reference Manual RBS 2206 Reference Manual Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 1 (421) RBS 2206 Reference Manual Due to continued progress in methodology, design and manufacturing, the contents of this document are subject to revision without notice. 2 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 RBS 2206 Reference Manual Contents 1 Preface ...........................................................................................................13 1.1 Objectives................................................................................................ 13 1.2 Target Groups..........................................................................................13 1.3 RBS 2000 Library Overview....................................................................13 1.4 How to Order CPI....................................................................................14 2 Product Safety Requirements RBS 2000....................................................17 2.1 References...............................................................................................17 2.2 Product Safety......................................................................................... 17 3 Environmental Capabilities..........................................................................19 3.1 Scope.......................................................................................................19 3.2 Terminology.............................................................................................19 3.3 References...............................................................................................20 3.4 Transport -40C - +70C..........................................................................20 3.5 Storage -25C - +55C.............................................................................21 3.6 Handling -40C - +70C...........................................................................23 3.7 Operation Indoor +5C - +40C ...............................................................23 3.8 Operation Outdoor -33C - +40C ........................................................... 25 3.9 Operation Outdoor -33C - +45C ........................................................... 26 3.10 Operation Outdoor -33C - +55C.........................................................28 3.11 Operation Mast Mounted Equipment -33C - +45C.............................28 3.12 Operation Mast Mounted Equipment -33C - +55C............................28 4 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206.................................................................31 4.1 Introduction..............................................................................................31 4.2 References...............................................................................................32 4.3 Denitions................................................................................................ 32 4.4 Frequency Bands.....................................................................................34 4.5 RF Properties...........................................................................................34 4.6 Basic Congurations................................................................................35 4.7 Site Cell Congurations...........................................................................67 4.8 Co-Siting with RBS 200 or RBS 2000 Macro Cabinet............................74 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 3 (421) RBS 2206 Reference Manual 5 Product Data..................................................................................................79 5.1 Site Equipment Overview........................................................................ 79 5.2 Site Power Options..................................................................................80 5.3 Power Connections..................................................................................80 5.4 RBS 2206 Cabinet Hardware Description...............................................84 5.5 External Alarm and Transmission Interface............................................93 5.6 BBS 2000 Rack Description....................................................................96 5.7 Antenna System ...................................................................................... 98 6 Unit Description, DXU-21 .............................................................................117 6.1 System Environment................................................................................117 6.2 Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 118 6.3 Functions ................................................................................................. 120 6.4 External Interfaces...................................................................................120 6.5 Dimensions and Weight...........................................................................124 7 Unit Description, dTRU.................................................................................125 7.1 Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 125 7.2 Functions ................................................................................................. 126 7.3 External Interfaces...................................................................................127 7.4 Technical Data.........................................................................................128 8 Unit Decription, CDU-G and CDU-F ............................................................ 129 8.1 CDU Types..............................................................................................129 8.2 CDU Functions ........................................................................................ 132 8.3 External Interfaces...................................................................................133 8.4 Technical Data.........................................................................................133 9 Unit Description, CXU-10 .............................................................................135 9.1 Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 135 9.2 Functions ................................................................................................. 135 9.3 External Interfaces...................................................................................136 9.4 Technical Data.........................................................................................136 10 Unit Description, FCU-01............................................................................137 10.1 Functions ............................................................................................... 137 4 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 RBS 2206 Reference Manual 10.2 External Interfaces.................................................................................137 10.3 Indicator.................................................................................................138 10.4 Electrical Data........................................................................................138 11 Unit Description, DC-Filter 01....................................................................141 11.1 Functions ............................................................................................... 141 11.2 External Interfaces.................................................................................141 11.3 Input Data..............................................................................................141 11.4 Dimensions and Weight.........................................................................142 12 Unit Description, PSU 1200 W...................................................................143 12.1 PSU AC ................................................................................................. 143 12.2 PSU DC.................................................................................................148 13 Unit Description, ACCU/DCCU.................................................................. 153 13.1 ACCU.....................................................................................................153 13.2 DCCU.....................................................................................................154 14 Unit Description, IDM..................................................................................157 14.1 Functions ............................................................................................... 157 14.2 External Interfaces.................................................................................157 14.3 Indicators and Buttons...........................................................................158 14.4 Input Data..............................................................................................158 14.5 Output Data ........................................................................................... 158 14.6 Dimensions and Weight.........................................................................159 15 Broadcast.....................................................................................................161 15.1 References.............................................................................................161 15.2 Concepts................................................................................................161 15.3 Functions ............................................................................................... 161 16 Common Control Channel Handling.........................................................167 16.1 References.............................................................................................167 16.2 Function.................................................................................................167 16.3 Operational Conditions..........................................................................173 17 Physical Channel Handling........................................................................175 17.1 References.............................................................................................175 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 5 (421) RBS 2206 Reference Manual 17.2 Functions ............................................................................................... 175 18 Speech and Data Services.........................................................................179 18.1 References.............................................................................................179 18.2 Concepts................................................................................................179 18.3 Functions ............................................................................................... 180 18.4 Operational Conditions..........................................................................184 19 Packet Data Services..................................................................................187 19.1 References.............................................................................................187 19.2 Functions ............................................................................................... 187 20 Call Control..................................................................................................189 20.1 References.............................................................................................189 20.2 Channel Activation.................................................................................189 20.3 Adaptive Frame Alignment....................................................................194 20.4 Asynchronous Handover Detection.......................................................195 20.5 RF Channel Release ............................................................................197 20.6 Deactivate SACCH................................................................................198 20.7 Link Establish Indication........................................................................198 20.8 Link Release Indication ......................................................................... 200 20.9 Link Establishment Request..................................................................201 20.10 Link Release Request ......................................................................... 201 20.11 Transparent Message Transmission...................................................202 20.12 Transparent Message Reception ........................................................ 203 20.13 SACCH Info Modify ............................................................................. 204 20.14 LAPDm.................................................................................................205 20.15 Channel Reactivation...........................................................................206 20.16 Power Information................................................................................210 21 GPRS, Physical Link Layer........................................................................213 21.1 References.............................................................................................213 21.2 Concepts................................................................................................213 21.3 Functions ............................................................................................... 213 22 Base Station Power Control ......................................................................217 6 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 RBS 2206 Reference Manual 22.1 References.............................................................................................217 22.2 Concepts................................................................................................217 22.3 Functions ............................................................................................... 217 22.4 Operational Conditions..........................................................................218 23 Channel Measurements..............................................................................219 23.1 References.............................................................................................219 23.2 Concepts................................................................................................219 23.3 Functions ............................................................................................... 219 23.4 Operational Conditions..........................................................................221 24 Discontinuous Transmission.....................................................................223 24.1 References.............................................................................................223 24.2 Functions ............................................................................................... 223 25 Frequency Hopping ...................................................................................227 25.1 References.............................................................................................227 25.2 Concepts................................................................................................227 25.3 Function.................................................................................................227 25.4 Operational Conditions..........................................................................228 26 Encryption....................................................................................................229 26.1 References.............................................................................................229 26.2 Start Encryption at Channel Activation..................................................229 26.3 Encryption Mode Change......................................................................230 26.4 Encryption Mode Change at Mode Modify............................................231 27 Mode Modify ...............................................................................................233 27.1 References.............................................................................................233 27.2 Function.................................................................................................233 27.3 Operational Conditions..........................................................................236 28 Mobile Station Power Control....................................................................237 28.1 References.............................................................................................237 28.2 Functions ............................................................................................... 237 29 Short Message Service...............................................................................239 29.1 References.............................................................................................239 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 7 (421) RBS 2206 Reference Manual 29.2 Functions ............................................................................................... 239 29.3 Operational Conditions..........................................................................241 30 Diversity Supervision ................................................................................. 243 30.1 References.............................................................................................243 30.2 Concepts................................................................................................243 30.3 Function.................................................................................................244 30.4 Operational Conditions..........................................................................245 31 Synchronization.......................................................................................... 247 31.1 References.............................................................................................248 31.2 Concepts................................................................................................248 31.3 Synchronizing to the Reference Source................................................249 31.4 Selection of the Reference Source ....................................................... 250 31.5 Hold-Over Operation..............................................................................251 31.6 Supervision of Reference Source..........................................................252 31.7 Locking to the Reference Source..........................................................253 31.8 FN-Offset ............................................................................................... 254 31.9 ESB Distribution.....................................................................................254 31.10 Timing Compensation..........................................................................254 32 Radio Reception..........................................................................................257 32.1 References.............................................................................................257 32.2 Radio Reception.................................................................................... 257 32.3 Diversity.................................................................................................257 33 Radio Transmission....................................................................................259 33.1 References.............................................................................................259 33.2 Concepts................................................................................................260 33.3 Functions ............................................................................................... 261 33.4 Operational Conditions..........................................................................262 34 Frequency Allocation Support...................................................................265 34.1 References.............................................................................................265 34.2 Concepts................................................................................................265 34.3 Functions ............................................................................................... 265 8 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 RBS 2206 Reference Manual 34.4 Operational Conditions..........................................................................267 35 Restart and Recovery.................................................................................269 35.1 References.............................................................................................269 35.2 Concepts................................................................................................269 35.3 Function.................................................................................................270 35.4 Operational Conditions..........................................................................271 36 Function Change.........................................................................................273 36.1 Concepts................................................................................................273 36.2 Functions ............................................................................................... 274 36.3 Operational Conditions..........................................................................276 37 Functionality Administration..................................................................... 277 37.1 References.............................................................................................277 37.2 Concepts................................................................................................277 37.3 Functions ............................................................................................... 278 37.4 Operational Conditions..........................................................................281 38 Operation and Maintenance Support........................................................283 38.1 References.............................................................................................283 38.2 Concepts................................................................................................283 38.3 Buttons...................................................................................................285 38.4 Change RU to Local Mode....................................................................285 38.5 Change RU to Remote Mode................................................................286 38.6 Change RU to Remote Mode Cancel ................................................... 287 38.7 Change SW Power Boost Slave RU to Local Mode.............................287 38.8 Loop Control.......................................................................................... 288 38.9 RF Loop Test Supervision.....................................................................288 38.10 Calendar Time Request.......................................................................289 38.11 RSSI Temperature Compensation ...................................................... 289 38.12 Max Cooling.........................................................................................290 38.13 Fault Indicator......................................................................................291 38.14 BS Fault Indicator................................................................................292 38.15 Operational Indicator ........................................................................... 292 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 9 (421) RBS 2206 Reference Manual 38.16 Tx Not Enabled Indicator.....................................................................294 38.17 Local Mode Indicator...........................................................................295 38.18 External Alarms Indicator .................................................................... 296 38.19 DC Disconnected Indicator..................................................................296 38.20 Battery Mode Indicator ........................................................................ 297 38.21 Bat Disconnected Indicator..................................................................298 38.22 AC Fault Indicator................................................................................298 38.23 Test Result Indicators (not used)........................................................298 38.24 Local Mode in Progress.......................................................................299 39 Installation Data Handling..........................................................................301 39.1 References.............................................................................................301 39.2 Concepts................................................................................................301 39.3 General..................................................................................................301 39.4 Database Information Handling Elements.............................................301 39.5 Functions ............................................................................................... 303 39.6 Operational Conditions..........................................................................303 40 Self Test and Supervision..........................................................................305 40.1 References.............................................................................................305 40.2 Concepts................................................................................................305 40.3 Self Test.................................................................................................305 40.4 Supervision of Memory..........................................................................306 41 Diagnostics and Fault Handling................................................................315 41.1 References.............................................................................................315 41.2 Concepts................................................................................................315 41.3 Fault Detection.......................................................................................316 41.4 Fault Localization...................................................................................318 41.5 Local Action...........................................................................................319 41.6 Fault Reporting......................................................................................319 41.7 Fault Logging.........................................................................................320 41.8 RBS Diagnostics....................................................................................320 42 Operation and Maintenance Terminal.......................................................321 10 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 RBS 2206 Reference Manual 42.1 References.............................................................................................321 42.2 Concepts................................................................................................321 42.3 Functions ............................................................................................... 322 42.4 Operational Conditions..........................................................................330 43 External Alarms...........................................................................................331 43.1 References.............................................................................................331 43.2 Concepts................................................................................................331 43.3 Function.................................................................................................331 43.4 Operation and Maintenance.................................................................. 332 44 Handling of Auxiliary Equipment..............................................................335 44.1 References.............................................................................................335 44.2 Concepts................................................................................................335 44.3 Function.................................................................................................335 44.4 Operational Conditions..........................................................................336 45 Climate Protection...................................................................................... 336 45.1 Concepts................................................................................................337 45.2 Functions ............................................................................................... 337 46 EMC Capabilities.........................................................................................341 46.1 References.............................................................................................341 46.2 Concepts................................................................................................342 46.3 Capabilities ............................................................................................ 343 47 Transmission Interface Handling G.703 2048 kbit/s ............................... 349 47.1 References.............................................................................................349 47.2 Concepts................................................................................................349 47.3 Functions ............................................................................................... 351 47.4 Operational Conditions..........................................................................359 48 Transmission Interface Handling DS1 1544 kbit/s..................................361 48.1 References.............................................................................................361 48.2 Concepts................................................................................................361 48.3 Functions ............................................................................................... 363 49 Terrestrial Link Handling............................................................................373 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 11 (421) RBS 2206 Reference Manual 49.1 References.............................................................................................373 49.2 Concepts................................................................................................373 49.3 Function.................................................................................................373 49.4 Operational Conditions..........................................................................373 50 Channel Distribution Function.................................................................. 375 50.1 References.............................................................................................375 50.2 Concepts................................................................................................375 50.3 Functions ............................................................................................... 376 50.4 Operational conditions...........................................................................383 51 Transport network O&M functions-DXX Support....................................385 51.1 Introduction............................................................................................385 51.2 References.............................................................................................386 51.3 Concepts................................................................................................387 51.4 Functions ............................................................................................... 388 51.5 Operational conditions...........................................................................398 52 BTS Parameter Limitations........................................................................399 52.1 Purpose and Readers............................................................................399 52.2 References.............................................................................................399 52.3 Parameters ............................................................................................ 399 52.4 Appendix................................................................................................405 53 Glossary.......................................................................................................407 12 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 1 1.1 Preface This Reference Manual is valid for the Ericsson GSM system BSS R8. For the RBS 2000 library structure, see Figure 1 on page 14. Preface Objectives This manual is a detailed overview of the Ericsson RBS 2000 Macro system based on 12TRX cabinets for GSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1900. The manual describes RBS 2206, and comprises the following:
RBS 2000 General information (chapters 2 3):
Preface (chapter 1) System Specications and Requirements. RBS 2000 Hardware descriptions (chapters 4 5):
System overviews and hardware congurations. Unit descriptions (chapters 6 14) Function Specications (chapters 15 51):
Provide detailed information about the RBS from a functional point of view. The Function Specications are customer-adapted and give a deeper understanding of the behaviour of the RBS. BTS Parameter Limitations (chapter 52):
State congurable BTS parameters for RBS 2000. BTS parameters with limitations compared with the parameter ranges in the Abis O&M IWD are stated in this chapter. Glossary (chapter 53) 1.2 1.3 1.3.1 Target Groups Customers and Ericsson personnel involved in RBS activities. RBS 2000 Library Overview Outdoor RBS The Customer Product Information (CPI) for dTRU based RBS 2000 Macro cabinets consists of the following manuals:
EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 13 (421) Preface 1.4 1.4.1 RBS 2000 RBS 2206 Library Reference Manual Installation and Integration Manual RBS Synchronization Manual Cabinet Assembly and Extension Manual Maintenance Manual Spare Parts Catalogue P007803C Figure 1 The CPI for the RBS 2206 Macro 12TRX cabinet How to Order CPI CPI can be ordered in the same way as all other Ericsson products using the product number to identify each product. Orders can be placed through any local Ericsson company, or alternatively, on the Internet. How operators and customers and Ericsson companies order CPI is described in detail below. Outside Ericsson To place an order for CPI, contact any Ericsson company and follow the same procedure as with all other Ericsson products. The most up-to-date CPI can be downloaded from the Extranet by customers and contractors that have obtained access by visiting Ericssons Extranet e-business site. See access information below. How to Obtain Access to the Extranet Access is granted by the Key Account Manager (KAM) from your local Ericsson company. The Extranet address is:
https://ebusiness.ericsson.net To be able to access the Extranet site you need to ensure that:
your company allows access to secure sites (HTTPS) through its rewall. your PC has either Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 with SP2 or later, or Netscape navigator 4.61 or later. your browser has the plug-ins necessary to view or download PDF and Microsoft ofce les. If you are unsure of any of these preconditions, please check with your local IS/IT Support or help desks within your company. The Access Process To access the site you must have an individual user name and password. To request access, send an e-mail to the support centre asq.ex@era.ericsson.se stating your name, telephone number, e-
mail address and with which customer or Ericsson company you work. 14 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Preface Once your access is setup, a reply with all the details you need will be sent to you. Alternatively, you can download the Portal Order form from the Extranet. The rst time you log in to the site, we recommend you to read the user instructions. More information about Extranet can be found at the Extranet address below. For support on issues related to the Extranet, Tel.: +46 8 585 33085. Inside Ericsson The Intranet is an internal Ericsson web that can only be accessed by Ericsson personnel. All CPI products are available on the Intranet at CPI Store:
http://cpistore.ericsson.se Ericsson personnel, who may require access to CPI while operating outside Ericssons rewall, can get more information about Extranet access from the following address:
http://inside.ericsson.se/ebusiness/
1.4.2 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 15 (421) Preface This page is intentionally left blank 16 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Product Safety Requirements RBS 2000 2 Product Safety Requirements RBS 2000 The purpose of this document is to specify the product safety requirements for RBS 2000. 2.1 References 73/23/EEC CAN/CSA-C22.2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 EN 60950 IEC 215 IEC 529 IEC 60950 UL 1419 UL 1950 Low Voltage Directive No 1-M94 Audio, Video and Similar Electronic Equipment No 950-95 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment Safety requirements for radio transmitting equipment Classication of degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code) Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment Standard for Professional Video and Audio Equipment Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment 2.2 Product Safety This part of the document denes the Electrical, Mechanical, Heat and Fire Safety Requirements for the Radio Base Station. General The RBS is designed to comply with the following International Standards:
73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive. (To achieve this, the RBS shall conform to the standards below.) EN 60950 "Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment". The RBS fulls the requirements in the general IEC 60950 including national differences notied in EN 60950. IEC 215 Safety requirements for transmitting equipment. The RBS shall be listed by National Recongnized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). The RBS fulllls encapsulation class IP XX according to IEC 529. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 17 (421) Product Safety Requirements RBS 2000 In addition to this the product fullls the environmental requirements. The RBS is so designed and constructed that, under all conditions of normal use and under a likely fault condition, it protects against personal injury from electrical shock and other hazards. The RBS is protected against serious re originating in the equipment as well as mechanical hazards in the equipment, as well as mechanical hazards in the meaning of the applicable standard. For the US the following standards are applicable:
UL 1950 "Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment". For Canada the following standards are applicable:
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 1-M94 Audio, Video and Similar Electronic Equipment. 2.2.1 Declaration of Conformity Tests and inspections shall be carried out according to ECMA requirements. 18 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 3 3.1 3.2 Environmental Capabilities Environmental Capabilities Scope This chapter covers the environmental requirements for the indoor and outdoor temperature non-controlled operation conditions. Subjects covered are: Climatic, Biological, Chemically active substances, Mechanically active substances and Mechanical conditions. Terminology Denition of concepts:
Normal operation conditions Environmental conditions where all units shall be able to function as specied. Safe function Environmental stress above the limits for normal operation where all units shall continue to function during the stress, but performance or capacity may be reduced. Reduction of performance or capacity shall be documented as typical value. When the environmental stress has dropped to normal operation conditions, function as specied shall automatically be achieved. Safe function refers to an operation period of not more than 72 consecutive hours, and a total of not more than 15 days in one year. Non-destruction Environmental stress above the limits for safe function during which no function is guaranteed and performance may degrade in an unspecied manner. When the environmental stress has dropped to normal operation conditions, no manual intervention (on site) is needed to restore full performance of the RBS. Non-destruction refers to an operation period of not more than 96 consecutive hours, and a total of not more than 5.5 days in a 3 years period. GSM concepts The GSM concepts for Normal operation and Extreme operation conditions as dened in GSM 11.20-12.3.2 are both equal to the Normal condition as dened and used in this document. This means, all RF parameters are guaranteed within the Normal condition range as dened in this document. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 19 (421) Environmental Capabilities 3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 20 (421) References IEC 721-3-.. Classication of groups of environmental parameters and their severities. ETSI 300 019-1-.. Classication of environmental conditions. Transport -40C - +70C General Conditions The severity of the requirements is in conformity with: IEC 721-3-2 classes 2K4/2B2/2C2/2S2/2M2. and ETS 300 019-1-2 Class 2.3
"PUBLIC transportation". These requirements are valid for equipped cabinets (excluding batteries). The values in these conditions are valid for a maximum transport time of 3 months. The time is measured from the packages are leaving the shipping store, and includes storing in connection with the transport. Note:
These requirements restrict ight transportation to aircrafts with pressure cabins. As modern aircrafts have pressure cabins, these limitations are expected to be only formal. Note:
The severity levels are chosen with equipped cabinets in mind. Therefore transport of equipment outside the cabinets can result in extremes. These extremes shall be handled by its own packing. Climatic conditions During transportation the equipment could be exposed to extremes in temperature and humidity. The equipment shall be packaged. The equipment shall be operational after being subjected to the ambient temperature and humidity stated hereafter. The severity of these requirements are in conformity with: IEC 721-3-2 class 2K4. and ETS 300 019-1-2 Class 2.3. Requirements Table 1 Environmental Parameters Temperature Relative Humidity Unit
C
Value
- 40- +70 5-100 Biological conditions. The severity of these requirements is in conformity with: IEC 721-3-2 class 2B2. and ETS 300 019-1-2 Class 2.3. Chemically Active Substances. The severity of these requirements is in conformity with: IEC 721-3-2 class 2C2. and ETS 300 019-1-2 Class 2.3. Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 3.4.5 3.4.6 3.5 3.5.1 Environmental Capabilities Note:
The values are average yearly levels of airborne contaminants that can be accepted. It is assumed that one of the contaminants is dominant at each site, and that the other is present in insignicant amounts. Mechanically active substances The severity of these requirements is in conformity with: IEC 721-3-2 class 2S2. and ETS 300 019-1-2 Class 2.3. Mechanical conditions The packing and transport method shall be chosen in order not to expose the equipment to stress beyond these limits. The equipment shall function as specied when installed after test. The severity of these requirements is in conformity with: IEC 721-3-2 class 2M2. and ETS 300 019-1-2 Class 2.3. Requirements Table 2 Environmental Parameters Vibration sinus:
displacement acceleration frequency Random ASD:
Shock:
acceleration frequency peak acceleration duration Storage -25C - +55C Unit mm m/s Hz m2/s3 m/s Hz m/s ms Value 3.5 10 15 2-9 9-200 200-500 1.0 12.0 2-200 100 11 General Conditions The severity of the requirements is in conformity with: IEC 721-3-1 classes 1K4/1Z2/1Z3/1Z5/1B2/1C2/1S3/1M2, and ETS 300 019-1-1 Class 1.2. "WEATHERPROTECTED, not temperature-controlled storage". During storage the equipment shall be packaged. The values in these conditions are valid for a maximum storage time of 12 months. The time refers to equipment in its outer package and stored at the consignee in a conditioned store. 3.5.2 Climatic conditions The equipment shall be shall be in packaged condition. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 21 (421) Environmental Capabilities 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.6 The severity of these requirements is in conformity with IEC 721-3-1 classes 1K4/1Z2/1Z3/1Z5. and ETS 300 019-1-1 class 1.2 Requirements Table 3 Environmental Parameters Temperature Relative Humidity Unit
C
Value
- 25 - +55 10 -100 Biological conditions The severity of these requirements is in conformity with IEC 721-3-1 class 1B2. and ETS 300 019-1-1 class 1.2 Chemically Active Substances The severity of these requirements is in conformity with: IEC 721-3-1 class IC2 and ETS 200 019-1-1 Class 1.2. Note:
The values are average yearly levels of airborne contaminants that can be accepted. It is assumed that one of the contaminants is dominant at each site, and that the other is present in insignicant amounts. Mechanically Active Substances The severity of these requirements is in conformity with: IEC 721-3-1 class 1S3. and ETS 300 019-1-1 Class 1.2. Mechanical Conditions The packing and transport method shall be chosen in order not to expose the equipment to stress beyond these limits. The equipment shall function as specied when installed after test. The severity of these requirements is in conformity with: IEC 721-3-1 class 1M2. and ETS 300 019-1-1 Class 1.2. Requirements Table 4 Environmental Parameters Vibration sinus:
Shock:
displacement acceleration frequency peak acceleration duration Unit mm m/s Hz m/s ms Value 3.5 2-9 40 22 10 9 -200 22 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.6.4 3.6.5 3.6.6 3.7 3.7.1 Environmental Capabilities Handling -40C - +70C General Conditions This section refers to shorter periods of transport and storage in unpacked conditions. Precautions to avoid condensation before subjecting the equipment to operational conditions are necessary. Climatic conditions During handling the equipment withstands the conditions stated in Section 3.4.2 on page 20 in this document. Biological conditions. During Handling the equipment withstands the conditions stated in Section 3.4.3 on page 20 in this document. Chemically active substances During Handling the equipment withstands the conditions stated in Section 3.4.4 on page 20 in this document. Mechanically active substances During Handling the equipment withstands the conditions stated in Section 3.4.5 on page 21 in this document. Mechanical conditions The equipment shall endure stresses normal for handling, during handling the equipment withstand the conditions stated in Section 3.4.6 on page 21in this document. Operation Indoor +5C - +40C General Conditions The severity of these requirements is in conformity with: IEC 721-3-3 classes 3K3/3Z2/3Z4/3B1/3C2(3C1)/3S2/3M1. and ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.1 "TEMPERATURE-controlled locations". This clause refers to the environment which an RBS for indoor use shall endure. Note:
The different operating temperature levels according to Safe function and Non destruction, refer to situations where the RBS is supposed to have been operating in "normal condition" mode for a certain time. Then the surrounding temperature in the compartment increases (decreases) according to this gures. Accordingly, this means that the surrounding temperature is allowed to change within the limits while the RBS still operates and has its own loss of energy. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 23 (421) Environmental Capabilities 3.7.2 Climatic conditions. The severity of these requirements are in conformity with: IEC 721-3-3 classes 3K3/3Z2/3Z4. and ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.1. Table 5 Environmental Parameters Temperature Relative Humidity Unit
C
Normal Condition
+5- +40 5-85 Value Safe funct. 0 - +45 5 - 90 Non Destr.
-10 - +55 5 - 90 3.7.3 Biological conditions Requirements There are no requirements for this condition. 3.7.4 3.7.5 3.7.6 Chemically active substances The severity of these requirements is in conformity with: IEC 721-3-3 classes /3C2(3C1)/. and ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.1. Note:
The values are average yearly levels of airborne contaminants that can be accepted. It is assumed that one of the contaminants is dominant at each site, and that the other is present in insignicant amounts. Mechanically active substances The severity of these requirements is in conformity with: IEC 721-3-3 class /3S2/. and ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.1. Mechanical conditions The severity of these requirements is in conformity with: IEC 721-3-3 class/3MI/. and ETS 300 019-1-3 class 3.1. 24 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Environmental Capabilities Unit mm m/s Hz m2/s3 m2/s3 m/s m/s Hz m/s ms 0.6 2-9 Value 0.1 0.2 3.8 5.4 2-200 40 11 2 9 -200 1) 2) 1) 2) 3) Table 6 Environmental Parameters Vibration sinus:
displacement acceleration frequency Vibration random:
ASD ASD acceleration acceleration frequency peak acceleration duration Shock:
1)Safe function 2)Non destruction 3)This requirement belongs to Safe function with the exemption:
performance of the RBS shall be veried as no loss of calls Seismic Exposure The complete equipped RBS shall be tested for seismic exposure. Deviations shall be reported. Safe function during seismic exposure. Deviations shall be reported. Table 7 Test frequency range Required Response Spectrum Shape of RRS 1-15 Hz RRS as IEC g 3 Number of time scale histories 1/ testing direction Duration of time scale histories Number of testing directions 35 s 3 If necessary there are possibilities to equip the RBS with an optional Seismic Exposure protection device. 3.8 Operation Outdoor -33C - +40C This Environmental class corresponds in full to Operation Outdoor
-33C - +45C with the exception of the upper temperature limit. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 25 (421) Environmental Capabilities 3.9 3.9.1 3.9.2 3.9.3 3.9.4 3.9.5 Operation Outdoor -33C - +45C The severity of the requirements is in conformity with: IEC 721-3-4 classes 4K2/4Z5/4Z7/4B1/4C2(4C3)/4S2/4M5. and ETS 300 019-1-4 Class 4.1. "NON-WEATHERPROTECTED location", except for the temperature range which is extended to +45C. This clause refers to the environment which an RBS for outdoor non-weather protected location shall endure. The gures below refers to the environment that is surrounding the cabinet and the temperature is the shaded air temperature. Climatic Conditions The severity of these requirements is in conformity with: IEC 721-3-4 classes 4K2/4Z5/4Z7. and ETS 300 019-1-4 Class 4.1. In addition to this Ericsson demands more rigorous values than stated by IEC and ETSI above. The RBS shall be designed for a power loss of max. 48 hours. This applies both to installation and operation. Table 8 Environmental Parameters Temperature Relative Humidity Unit Value
C
Normal Condition Non Destr.
-33 - +45 15 - 100
-40 - +70 15 - 100 Biological Conditions The severity of these requirements is in conformity with: IEC 721-3-4 class /4B1/. and ETS 300 019-1-4 Class 4.1. Chemically Active Substances The severity of these requirements is in conformity with: IEC 721-3-4 classes /4C2(4C1)/. and ETS 300 019-1-4 Class 4.1. Note:
The values are average yearly levels of airborne contaminants that can be accepted. It is assumed that one of the contaminants is dominant at each site, and that the other is present in insignicant amounts. Mechanically Active Substances The severity of these requirements is in conformity with: IEC 721-3-4 class /4S2/. and ETS 300 019-1-4 Class 4.1. Mechanical Conditions The severity of these requirements are in conformity with: IEC 721-3-4 class /4M5/. and ETS 300 019-1-4 Class 4.1. 26 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Environmental Capabilities Table 9 Environmental Parameters Unit Value Vibration sinus:
0.6 2-9 displacement acceleration frequency no. of sweep cycles no. of test directions testing method Vibration random:
ASD ASD acceleration acceleration frequency testing method mm m/s Hz m2/s3 m2/s3 m/s m/s Hz 5 3 IEC 68-2-6 0.1 0.2 3.8 5.4 2-200 IEC 68-2-64 Shock:
<100 kg
>100 kg m/s ms 250 6 peak acceleration duration pulse shape no. of shock pulses no. of test directions testing method 100 6 half sine 500 per direction 6 IEC 68-2-27 2 9 -200 1) 2) 1) 2) 3) 1)Safe function 2)Non destruction 3)These requirements belong to Safe function with the exemption:
performance of the RBS shall be veried as no loss of calls Seismic Exposure The complete equipped RBS shall be tested for seismic exposure. Deviations shall be reported. Safe function during seismic exposure. Deviations shall be reported. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 27 (421) Environmental Capabilities Table 10 Test frequency range Required Response Spectrum Shape of RRS 1-15 Hz RRS as IEC g 3 Number of time scale histories 1/ testing direction Duration of time scale histories Number of testing directions 35 s 3 3.10 3.11 There are possibilities to equip the RBS with an optional Seismic Exposure protection device. Operation Outdoor -33C - +55C This Environmental class corresponds in full to Operation Outdoor
-33C - +45C with the exception of the upper temperature limit. Operation Mast Mounted Equipment -33C - +45C This Environmental class corresponds to Operation Outdoor -33C -
+45C with the exceptions stated below. Table 11 Environmental Parameters Unit Temperature Change of temperature Vibration sinus:
displacement acceleration frequency ASD frequency duration of exposure no. of test directions Vibration random:
Fauna
C
C/min mm m/s2 Hz m2/s3 Hz min Hz none Value Normal Cond. Non destruct.
-33 - +45 6
-40 - +70 6 10 9 - 200 3.0 2 - 9 0.5 2 - 200 30 3 Not Appl. Not Appl. 3.12 Operation Mast Mounted Equipment -33C - +55C This Environmental class corresponds to Operation Outdoor -33C -
+55C with the exceptions stated below. 28 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Table 12 Environmental Parameters Unit Temperature Relative humidity Absolute humidity Change of temperature Rain temperature Vibration sinus:
displacement acceleration frequency Vibration random:
ASD frequency peak acc. duration Shock:
Fauna
C
g/m3
C/min
C mm m/s2 Hz m2/s3 Hz m/s2 ms none Environmental Capabilities Value Normal Cond.
-33 - +55 5 - 100 0.26 -40 6 5 Non destruct.
-40 - +70 5 - 100 0.26 - 40 6 5 3 2 - 9 0.5 2 - 200 100 11 Not Appl. 10 9 - 200 0.2 200 - 500 1) Not Appl. 1) The requirements belong to Safe function with the exemption:
performance of the RBS shall be veried as no loss of calls EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 29 (421) Environmental Capabilities This page is intentionally left blank 30 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 This chapter describes the RBS 2206 radio congurations and their performance. All congurations, especially GSM 1900, are not described in this chapter. Introduction Mobile Telephone System 4 4.1 4.1.1 RBS 2000 in the Ericsson GSM system Figure 2 The Base Station System (BSS) contains two functional entities: the Base Station Controller (BSC) and the Base Transceiver Station (BTS). The BSC handles radio-related functions, such as handover, management of the radio network resources, and cell conguration data. It also controls radio frequency power levels in RBSs and MSs. The BTS is a network component which serves one cell and is controlled by the BSC. The BTS contains a number of transceivers. It consists of the radio transceivers and all the digital signal processing equipment. RBS 2000 contains equipment for 1 - 3 BTSs. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 31 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 4.1.2 4.2 Figure 3 An example of an RBS 2000 servicing a three-cell site Radio Base Station The Radio Base Station 2000 (RBS 2000) is Ericssons second generation of RBSs developed to meet the GSM specications for BTSs. References
/GSM:05.05/
/GSM:05.08/
GSM Requirements 05.05 phase 2+ Radio Transmission and Reception. GSM Requirements 05.08 phase 2+ Radio Subsystem Link Control. 4.3 Denitions Tower Mounted Amplier (TMA) The TMA compensates for signal loss in the receiver antenna cables, reduces system noise and improves uplink sensitivity. The TMA can consist of a duplex lter. Duplex is the function that allows communication in two directions (sending and receiving) on one channel. The TMA used for 12 TRX products is Dual Duplex TMA (ddTMA). Antenna Reference Point The antenna reference point is the point where the radio signal crosses the RBS border, that is, the connector for the antenna feeder. See the gure below. Note:
The TMA is inside the RBS border. 32 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Antenna X X = Antenna reference point Combining system
filtering RBS TRX TRX
. TRX P007531A Figure 4 Antenna reference point Antenna System The antenna system is constituted by all RF transmission and reception antennas, directed to cover the same area or multi-casting congurations. Base Transceiver Station (BTS) A BTS is a unit operating on a set of frequencies in one cell. Basic Conguration A basic conguration is a specied set of transceivers, CDUs, and in some cases, TMAs, connected to one antenna system. A basic conguration can be multiplied or used in combination with other basic congurations to build the needed site equipment. Variations of a basic conguration may exist, differing in cable lengths. This depends on factors such as implementation in different cabinets. Radio Base Station (RBS) An RBS is all equipment in an Ericsson base station, and may be comprised of several BTSs. Each RBS has one DXU, controlling a maximum of 12 TRXs. Site/Cell Conguration (SCC) The SCC is a geographical concept describing how an area around one RBS site is divided into radio trafc areas. The following types of site are dened:
Omni-site Radio coverage in one 360 degree sector, that is in one area, using one BTS. 2sector site 3sector site Radio coverage in two sectors, that is two distinct areas, using two BTSs. Radio coverage in three sectors, that is three distinct areas, using three BTSs. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 33 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 4.3.1 Cabinet Types RBS 2206 Indoor cabinet with a maximum of six dTRUs/12 TRXs per cabinet 4.3.2 Denition of Congurations G9deht_3.6(5)\a Variant indication, lower case letter a-z Number of used transceivers Max number of transceivers Number of antennas dd TMA used Hybrid in dTRU; used Modified frequency band Duplexer in CDU; used Frequency band CDU-type P007365A Figure 5 The denition of the basic conguration type refers to CDU type 4.4 Frequency Bands P-GSM 900 Uplink:
890 915 MHz Downlink: 935 960 MHz E-GSM 900 Uplink:
880 915 MHz Downlink: 925 960 MHz GSM 1800 GSM 1900 Uplink:
1710 1785 MHz Downlink: 1805 1880 MHz Uplink:
1850 1910 MHz Downlink: 1930 1990 MHz 4.5 RF Properties This section denes the properties of the RF parts integrated in the BTS. The RF parts consist of transceivers and CDUs. The CDUs functions are:
Filters and combines transmitted signals into the same transmit antenna system. 34 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.6 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Filters, amplies and distributes received signals to receivers belonging to one BTS. Isolation Values The RF isolation between the antenna reference points within any conguration is required to be at least 30 dB. See industry standard /
GSM:05.05/. RX Description The receiver system performance is conguration dependent. Third-Order Intermodulation Products Receiver sensitivity is reduced when a third-order intermodulation product, generated by the radio transmitters in the RBS, is received at the same ARFCN as the useful signal. This occurs when the distance in frequency between two simultaneous transmitters is chosen in such a way that a third-order intermodulation product is generated at the same frequency as the operating frequency of one of the receivers in the RBS. The receiver sensitivity reduction due to third-order intermodulation products can be avoided with frequency planning. No frequency planning is needed for intermodulation products of higher than third-order. Basic Congurations The GSM 900 and GSM 1800 congurations meet the GSM requirements, except where otherwise stated. The capacity of a conguration is dened at the TX and RX antenna reference points at the RBS border. There is an X close to every reference point in the gures. The RBS border is not included in the gures. The equivalent output power with SW power boost (TX diversity) congured is the original output power specied for the basic conguration increased with typically 3 dB, if separate TX antennas are used. The congurations that support SW power boost are listed in Section 4.7.3 SW Power Boost Congurations with CDU-G on page 73. Functional views of radio signal paths for various congurations are shown in Figure 6 on page 36 upto and including Figure 24 on page 64. Only components necessary to illustrate the conguration are shown. In some congurations, the radio signal paths can differ depending on where in the cabinet the basic conguration is used. The gures show fully-equipped cabinets with two or three BTSs, that is two or three basic congurations are shown in the same gure. These are different physical implementations of the same basic conguration, not different congurations. The second BTS is drawn with dotted lines to show how an SCC in a fully-equipped cabinet is connected. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 35 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 4.6.1 dTRU Topology Conguration of Hybrid Combiner The dTRU can be congured with or without the hybrid combiner, using two external cables. RX Signals Distributed from Two Ports The RX signals can be distributed from the RX1 and RX2 ports to all four receivers when both transceivers are connected to the same antenna system. TX TX Hybrid combiner TX TX TX1 HC1 TX1+TX2 HC2 TX2 TX Hybrid combiner TX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX1 HC1 TX1+TX2 HC2 TX2 RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 dTRU with no hybrid combiner in use dTRU with hybrid combiner in use P007394B Figure 6 dTRU with and without hybrid combiner in use 36 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 4.6.2 CDU-F Congurations Basic Conguration F9de_2.4 and F18d_2.4 dTRU dTRU TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 RX1 RX2 FCOMB FCOMB LNA LNA CDU-F DPX X X CXU Figure 7 F9de_2.4 and F18d_2.4 Characteristics Number of CDUs Frequency band Max. number of TRXs Number of feeders Number of antennas Antenna conguration 1 E-GSM GSM 1800 4 2 2 TX/RX + RX TX/
RXA Ant. RXB P007376A
(F9de_2.4)
(F18d_2.4) EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 37 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Basic Conguration F9det_2.4 and F18dt_2.4 dTRU dTRU TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 RX1 RX2 FCOMB FCOMB LNA LNA CXU CDU-F DPX DPX LNA DPX X DPX LNA DPX X TX/
RXA Ant. RXB P007377A Figure 8 F9det_2.4 and F18dt_2.4 Characteristics Number of CDUs Frequency band Max. number of TRXs Number of feeders Number of antennas Antenna conguration TMA conguration
(F9det_2.4)
(F18dt_2.4) 1 E-GSM GSM 1800 4 2 2 TX/RX + RX ddTMA + ddTMA or ddTMA + rTMA 38 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Basic Conguration F9de_2.6 and F18d_2.6 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 RX1 RX2 FCOMB FCOMB LNA LNA FCOMB FCOMB FCOMB FCOMB LNA LNA CDU-F DPX X X CDU-F CDU-F DPX X X TX/
RXA Ant. RXB BTS1 BTS2 TX/
RXA Ant. RXB CXU P007378A Figure 9 F9de_2.6 and F18d_2.6 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 39 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Characteristics Number of CDUs Frequency band 2*
E-GSM GSM 1800 6 2 2 TX/RX + RX Max. number of TRXs Number of feeders Number of antennas Antenna conguration
* Three CDU-Fs support two sectors.
(F9de_2.6)
(F18d_2.6) Note:
The second BTS is only shown to illustrate a 2 x 6 conguration. BTS1 and BTS2 are two different physical implementations of the same basic conguration. 40 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Basic Conguration F9det_2.6 and F18dt_2.6 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 FCOMB FCOMB RX1 RX2 LNA LNA TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 FCOMB FCOMB FCOMB FCOMB CDU-F DPX DPX LNA DPX X DPX LNA DPX X BTS1 BTS2 CDU-F CDU-F DPX DPX LNA DPX X RX1 RX2 LNA LNA CXU DPX LNA DPX X TX/
RXA RXB TX/
RXA RXB Figure 10 F9det_2.6 and F18dt_2.6 P007379A EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 41 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Characteristics Number of CDUs Frequency band Max. number of TRXs Number of feeders Number of antennas Antenna conguration TMA conguration
(F9det_2.6)
(F18dt_2.6) 2*
E-GSM GSM 1800 6 2 2 TX/RX + RX ddTMA + ddTMA or ddTMA + rTMA
* Three CDU-Fs support two sectors. Note:
The second BTS is only shown to illustrate a 2 x 6 conguration. BTS1 and BTS2 are two different physical implementations of the same basic conguration. 42 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Basic Conguration F9de_2.8 and F18d_2.8 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 CDU-F DPX X TX/
RXA TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 FCOMB FCOMB RX1 LNA TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 FCOMB FCOMB CDU-F DPX X RX1 LNA CXU Ant. TX/
RXB P007380A Figure 11 F9de_2.8 and F18d_2.8 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 43 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Characteristics Number of CDUs Frequency band Max. number of TRXs Number of feeders Number of antennas Antenna conguration
(F9de_2.8)
(F18d_2.8) 2 E-GSM GSM 1800 8 2 2 TX/RX + TX/RX 44 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Basic Conguration F9det_2.8 and F18dt_2.8 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 CDU-F DPX DPX LNA DPX X CDU-F DPX DPX LNA DPX X dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 FCOMB FCOMB RX1 LNA TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 FCOMB FCOMB RX1 LNA CXU Figure 12 F9det_2.8 and F18dt_2.8 TX/
RXA Ant. TX/
RXB Ant. P007381A EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 45 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Characteristics Number of CDUs Frequency band Max. number of TRXs Number of feeders Number of antennas Antenna conguration TMA conguration
(F9det_2.8)
(F18dt_2.8) 2 E-GSM GSM 1800 8 2 2 TX/RX + TX/RX ddTMA + ddTMA 46 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Basic Conguration F9de_2.12 and F18d_2.12 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 FCOMB FCOMB CDU-F DPX X TX/
RXA Ant. RX1 LNA TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 FCOMB FCOMB FCOMB FCOMB RX1 LNA CXU CDU-F CDU-F DPX X TX/
RXA Ant. Figure 13 F9de_2.12 and F18d_2.12 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved P007382A 47 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Characteristics Number of CDUs Frequency band Max. number of TRXs Number of feeders Number of antennas Antenna conguration
(F9de_2.12)
(F18d_2.12) 3 E-GSM GSM 1800 12 2 2 TX/RX + TX/RX 48 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Basic Conguration F9det_2.12 and F18dt_2.12 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 FCOMB FCOMB RX1 LNA TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 FCOMB FCOMB FCOMB FCOMB RX1 LNA CXU CDU-F DPX DPX LNA DPX X TX/
RXA Ant. CDU-F CDU-F DPX DPX LNA DPX X TX/
RXB Ant. P007383A Figure 14 F9de_2.12 and F18dt_2.12 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 49 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Characteristics Number of CDUs Frequency band Max. number of TRXs Number of feeders Number of antennas Antenna conguration TMA conguration
(F9det_2.12)
(F18dt_2.12) 3 E-GSM GSM 1800 12 2 2 TX/RX + TX/RX ddTMA + ddTMA 4.6.3 CDU-G Congurations Basic Conguration G9de_2.2, G18d_2.2 and G19d_2.2 dTRU TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 CXU CDU-G LNA DPX X DPX X LNA Figure 15 G9de_2.2, G18d_2.2 and G19d_2.2 Characteristics Number of CDUs Frequency band Max. number of TRXs Number of feeders Number of antennas Antenna conguration 1 E-GSM GSM 1800 GSM 1900 2 2 2 TX/RX + TX/RX TX/
RXA Ant. TX/
RXB P007384A
(G9de_2.2)
(G18d_2.2)
(G19d_2.2) 50 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Basic Conguration G9det_2.2, G18dt_2.2 and G19dt_2.2 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 dTRU TX1 RX1 RX2 TX2 CXU TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 CDU-G LNA LNA DPX DPX LNA DPX X DPX DPX LNA DPX X TX/
RXA Ant. TX/
RXB ddTMA P007385A Figure 16 G9det_2.2, G18dt_2.2 and G19dt_2.2 Characteristics Number of CDUs Frequency band Max. number of TRXs Number of feeders Number of antennas Antenna conguration
(G9det_2.2)
(G18dt_2.2)
(G19dt_2.2) 1 E-GSM GSM 1800 GSM 1900 2 2 2 TX/RX + TX/RX EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 51 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Basic Conguration G9deh_2.4, G18dh_2.4 and G19dh_2.4 TX1+TX2 dTRU RX1 RX2 TX1 RX1 CDU-G LNA DPX X TX1+TX2 dTRU RX1 RX2 TX2 RX2 CXU DPX X LNA TX/
RXA Ant. TX/
RXB P007386A Figure 17 G9deh_2.4, G18dh_2.4 and G19dh_2.4 Characteristics Number of CDUs Frequency band Max. number of TRXs Number of feeders Number of antennas Antenna conguration
(G9deh_2.4)
(G18dh_2.4)
(G19dh_2.4) 1 E-GSM GSM 1800 GSM 1900 4 2 2 TX/RX + TX/RX 52 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Basic Conguration G9deht_2.4, G18dht_2.4 and G19dht_2.4 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 TX1 RX1 CDU-G LNA TX2 RX2 LNA TX1+TX2 dTRU RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 dTRU CXU DPX DPX LNA DPX X DPX DPX LNA DPX X TX/
RXA Ant. TX/
RXB ddTMA P007387A Figure 18 G9deht_2.4, G18dht_2.4 and G19dht_2.4 Characteristics Number of CDUs Frequency band Max. number of TRXs Number of feeders Number of antennas Antenna conguration
(G9deht_2.4)
(G18dht_2.4)
(G19dht_2.4) 1 E-GSM GSM 1800 GSM 1900 4 2 2 TX/RX + TX/RX EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 53 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Basic Conguration G9deh_3.6, G18dh_3.6 and G19dh_3.6 TX1+TX2 dTRU RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU TX1 RX1 CDU-G LNA DPX X TX2 RX2 DPX X LNA TX1 CDU-G LNA DPX X TX/
RXA Ant. TX/
RXB TX Ant. BTS1 BTS2 TX TX2 DPX X LNA TX1 RX1 CDU-G LNA DPX X TX2 RX2 DPX X LNA CXU TX/
RXA Ant. TX/
RXB P007388A Figure 19 G9deh_3.6, G18dh_3.6 and G19dh_3.6 54 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Characteristics Number of CDUs Frequency band Max. number of TRXs Number of feeders Number of antennas Antenna conguration
* Three CDU-Fs support two sectors. Radio Congurations, RBS 2206
(G9deh_3.6)
(G18dh_3.6)
(G19dh_3.6) 2*
E-GSM GSM 1800 GSM 1900 6 3 3 TX/RX + TX/RX + TX Note:
The second BTS is only shown to illustrate a 2 x 6 conguration. BTS1 and BTS2 are two different physical implementations of the same basic conguration. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 55 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Basic Conguration G9deht_3.6, G18dht_3.6 and G19dht_3.6 TX1+TX2 dTRU RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU TX1 RX1 CDU-G LNA TX2 RX2 LNA DPX DPX LNA DPX X DPX DPX LNA DPX X ddTMA TX1 CDU-G LNA DPX X TX2 DPX X LNA BTS1 BTS2 TX1 RX1 CDU-G LNA TX2 RX2 LNA DPX DPX LNA DPX X DPX DPX LNA DPX X TX/
RXA Ant. TX/
RXB TX Ant. TX TX/
RXA Ant. TX/
RXB CXU ddTMA P007389A Figure 20 G9deht_3.6, G18dh_3.6 and G19dh_3.6 56 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Characteristics Number of CDUs Frequency band Max. number of TRXs Number of feeders Number of antennas Antenna conguration TMA conguration
* Three CDU-Fs support two sectors. Radio Congurations, RBS 2206
(G9deht_3.6)
(G18dht_3.6)
(G19dht_3.6) 2*
E-GSM GSM 1800 GSM 1900 6 3 3 TX/RX + TX/RX + TX ddTMA + ddTMA Note:
The second BTS is only shown to illustrate a 2 x 6 conguration. BTS1 and BTS2 are two different physical implementations of the same basic conguration. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 57 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Basic Conguration G9deh_4.8, G18dh_4.8 and G19dh_4.8 TX1 RX1 CDU-G LNA DPX X TX2 DPX X LNA TX1 RX1 CDU-G LNA DPX X TX2 DPX X LNA TX1+TX2 dTRU RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 dTRU dTRU dTRU CXU TX/
RXB Ant. TX TX/
RXB Ant. TX P007390A Figure 21 G9deh_4.8, G18dh_4.8 and G19dh_4.8 58 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Characteristics Number of CDUs Frequency band Max. number of TRXs Number of feeders Number of antennas Antenna conguration Radio Congurations, RBS 2206
(G9deh_4.8)
(G18dh_4.8)
(G19dh_4.8) 2 E-GSM GSM 1800 GSM 1900 8 4 4 TX/RX + TX + TX/
RX + TX EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 59 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Basic Conguration G9deht_4.8, G18dht_4.8 and G19dht_4.8 TX1+TX2 dTRU RX1 RX2 TX1 RX1 CDU-G LNA DPX DPX LNA DPX X ddTMA dTRU TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX2 DPX X LNA TX1 RX1 CDU-G LNA DPX DPX LNA DPX X ddTMA TX2 DPX X LNA dTRU dTRU TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 CXU Figure 22 G9deht_4.8, G18dht_4.8 and G19dht_4.8 Ant. TX/
RXA TX TX/
RXB Ant. TX P007391A 60 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Characteristics Number of CDUs Frequency band Max. number of TRXs Number of feeders Number of antennas Antenna conguration TMA conguration Radio Congurations, RBS 2206
(G9deht_4.8)
(G18dht_4.8)
(G19dht_4.8) 2 E-GSM GSM 1800 GSM 1900 8 4 4 TX/RX + TX + TX/
RX + TX ddTMA + ddTMA EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 61 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Basic Conguration G9deh_6.12, G18dh_6.12 and G19dh_6.12 TX1 RX1 CDU-G LNA DPX X TX2 DPX X LNA TX1 CDU-G LNA DPX X TX2 DPX X LNA TX1 RX1 CDU-G LNA DPX X TX1+TX2 dTRU RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU TX2 DPX X LNA CXU TX/
RXA TX TX Ant. TX TX/
RXB TX Figure 23 G9deh_6.12, G18dh_6.12 and G19dh_6.12 P007392A 62 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Characteristics Number of CDUs Frequency band Max. number of TRXs Number of feeders Number of antennas Antenna conguration Radio Congurations, RBS 2206
(G9deh_6.12)
(G18dh_6.12)
(G19dh_6.12) 3 E-GSM GSM 1800 GSM 1900 12 6 6 2 x TX/RX + 4 x TX EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 63 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Basic Conguration G9deht_6.12, G18dht_6.12 and G19dht_6.12 TX1 RX1 CDU-G LNA DPX DPX LNA DPX X ddTMA TX2 DPX X LNA TX1 RX1 CDU-G LNA DPX X TX2 DPX X LNA TX1 RX1 CDU-G LNA DPX DPX LNA DPX X ddTMA TX2 DPX X LNA TX/
RXA TX TX Ant. TX TX/
RXB TX TX1+TX2 dTRU RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 TX1+
TX2 RX1 RX2 dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU dTRU CXU Figure 24 G9deht_6.12, G18dht_6.12 and G19dht_6.12 P007393A 64 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Characteristics Number of CDUs Frequency band Max. number of TRXs Number of feeders Number of antennas Antenna conguration TMA conguration Radio Congurations, RBS 2206
(G9deht_6.12)
(G18dht_6.12)
(G19dht_612) 3 E-GSM GSM 1800 GSM 1900 12 6 6 2 x TX/RX + 4 x TX ddTMA + ddTMA 4.6.4 RX Connection from Antenna to dTRU Connection in the RX path is performed using the CXU. It varies, depending on the basic congurations used and the position in the cabinet. To avoid having to change cables for different congurations, the connections are set up automatically by the software. The TX antenna connections are independent of the CXU. The tables below show how TMAs and their associated bias injectors are connected to congurations using TMAs. Table 13 1 x 12 congurations with CDU-F CDU TMA No. / Connector No. (TMA cong. only) 1 / TX / RX 3 / TX / RX 1 5 Table 14 1 x 12 congurations with CDU-G CDU TMA No. / Connector No. (TMA cong. only) 1 / TX / RX1 3 / TX / RX1 1 5 Table 15 2 x 6 congurations with CDU-F Antenna TX / RXA TX / RXB Antenna TX / RXA TX / RXB CDU TMA Antenna No. / Connector No. (TMA cong. only) Cell 1 1 / TX / RX 1 / RX Cell 2 3 / TX / RX 3 / RX 1 2 5 6 TX / RXA RXB TX / RXA RXB EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 65 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Table 16 2 x 6 congurations with CDU-G CDU TMA Antenna No. / Connector No. (TMA cong. only) Cell 1 Cell 2 1 / TX / RX1 1 / TX / RX2 3 / TX / RX1 3 / TX / RX2 1 2 5 6 Table 17 3 x 4 congurations with CDU-F TX / RXA TX / RXB TX / RXA TX / RXB CDU TMA Antenna No. / Connector No. (TMA cong. only) Cell 1 1 / TX / RX 1 / RX Cell 2 2 / TX / RX 2 / RX Cell 3 3 / TX / RX 3 / RX 1 2 4 3 6 5 TX / RXA RXB RXB TX / RXA RXB TX / RXA Table 18 3 x 4 and 3 x 2 congurations with CDU-G CDU TMA Antenna No. / Connector No. (TMA cong. only) Cell 1 Cell 2 Cell 3 1 / TX / RX1 1 / TX / RX2 2 / TX / RX1 2 / TX / RX2 3 / TX / RX1 3 / TX / RX2 1 2 4 3 6 5 TX / RXA TX / RXB TX / RXB TX / RXA TX / RXB TX / RXA Table 19 1 x 8 congurations with CDU-F CDU TMA Antenna No. / Connector No. (TMA cong. only) Cell 1 1 / TX / RX 1 / TX / RX Alt cell 1 3 / TX / RX 3 / TX / RX 1 3 3 5 TX / RXA TX / RXB TX / RXA TX / RXB 66 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Table 20 1 x 8 congurations with CDU-G CDU TMA Antenna No. / Connector No. (TMA cong. only) Cell 1 1 / TX / RX1 1 / TX / RX1 Alt. cell 1 3 / TX / RX1 3 / TX / RX1 1 3 3 5 TX / RXA TX / RXB TX / RXA TX / RXB Note:
It is only possible to have one 1 x 8 conguration in the cabinet. One 1 x 8 conguration can be combined with one 1 x 4 conguration. Site Cell Congurations The following section shows site cell congurations in one RBS. More RBSs can be combined to form larger congurations at a site. Possible expansions, where different RBSs are connected using TG-
synchronization, are described in Section 4.8 Co-Siting with RBS 200 or RBS 2000 Macro Cabinet on page 74. The following SCCs are supported by the RBS:
the RBS with any number of dTRUs within the specied range inserted in the specied position order. specied basic radio congurations 4.7 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 67 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 4.7.1 RBS 2106 and RBS 2206 Congurations CDU-F Single Band Congurations Table 21 CDU-F congurations with a fully-equipped cabinet Conguration TMA Number of Antennas Allowed Number of dTRUs SCC 1 x 12 2 x 6 3 x 4 F9de_2.12 F9det_2.12 F18d_2.12 F18dt_2.12 2 x F9de_2.6 2 x F9det_2.6 2 x F18d_2.6 2 x F18dt_2.6 3 x F9de_2.4 3 x F9det_2.4 3 x F18d_2.4 3 x F18dt_2.4 1 x 8 + 1 x 4 F9de_2.8 + F9de_2.4 F9det_2.8 + F9det_2.4 F18d_2.8 + F18d_2.4 F18dt_2.8 + F18dt_2.4 1 x 4 + 1 x 8 F9de_2.4 + F9de_2.8 F9det_2.4 + F9det_2.8 F18d_2.4 + F18d_2.8 F18dt_2.4 + F18dt_2.8 No M No M No M No M No M No M No M No M No M No M
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2) (2)
(2) (2)
(2) (2)
(2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2)
(2) (2)
(2) (2)
(2) (2)
(2) (2)
(2) (2)
(2) (2)
(2) (2)
(0..6)
(0..6)
(0..6)
(0..6)
(0..3) (0..3)
(0..3) (0..3)
(0..3) (0..3)
(0..3) (0..3)
(0..2) (0..2) (0..2)
(0..2) (0..2) (0..2)
(0..2) (0..2) (0..2)
(0..2) (0..2) (0..2)
(0..4) (0..2)
(0..4) (0..2)
(0..4) (0..2)
(0..4) (0..2)
(0..2) (0..4)
(0..2) (0..4)
(0..2) (0..4)
(0..2) (0..4) M = Mandatory SCC 1 x 2 and 2 x 2 can be achieved as a subset of SCC 3 x 4 or 2 x 6. SCC 1 x 4 can be achieved as a subset of either SCC 3 x 4 or 2 x 6. SCC 1 x 6 can be achieved as a subset of SCC 2 x 6 or 1 x 12. SCC 2 x 4 can be achieved as a subset of SCC 3 x 4 or 2 x 6. SCC 3 x 2 can be achieved as a subset of SCC 3 x 4. SCC 1 x 2 and 1 x 4 require one CDU-F. SCC 2 x 2 and 2 x 4 require two CDU-Fs. SCC 1 x 6 as a subset of SCC 2 x 6 requires two CDU-F or one CDU-F and one CDU-Fx. SCC 1 x 6 as a subset of SCC 1 x 12 requires two CDU-F or one CDU-F and one CDU-Fx. SCC 3 x 2 requires three CDU-Fs. 68 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Table 22 CDU-F congurations with a partly-equipped cabinet Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 SCC Conguration TMA 1 x 4 2 x 4 1 x 8 F9de_2.4 F9det_2.4 F18d_2.4 F18dt_2.4 2 x F9de_2.4 2 x F9det_2.4 2 x F18d_2.4 2 x F18dt_2.4 F9de_2.8 F9det_2.8 F18d_2.8 F18dt_2.8 M = Mandatory No M No M No M No M No M No M Number of Antennas
(2) (0) (0)
(2) (0) (0)
(2) (0) (0)
(2) (0) (0)
(2) (2) (0)
(2) (2) (0)
(2) (2) (0)
(2) (2) (0)
(2) (0)
(2) (0)
(2) (0)
(2) (0) Allowed Number of dTRUs
(0..2) (0) (0)
(0..2) (0) (0)
(0..2) (0) (0)
(0..2) (0) (0)
(0..2) (0..2) (0)
(0..2) (0..2) (0)
(0..2) (0..2) (0)
(0..2) (0..2) (0)
(0..4) (0)
(0..4) (0)
(0..4) (0)
(0..4) (0) CDU-G Single Band Congurations without Hybrid Combiner Table 23 CDU-G congurations without hybrid combiner in a fully or partly-equipped cabinet SCC Conguration TMA 3 x 2 3 x G9de_2.2 3 x G9det_2.2 3 x G18d_2.2 3 x G18dt_2.2 3 x G19d_2.2 3 x G19dt_2.2 No M No M No M M = Mandatory Number of Antennas
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2) Allowed Number of dTRUs
(0..1) (0..1) (0..1)
(0..1) (0..1) (0..1)
(0..1) (0..1) (0..1)
(0..1) (0..1) (0..1)
(0..1) (0..1) (0..1)
(0..1) (0..1) (0..1) EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 69 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Table 24 CDU-G congurations without hybrid combiner in a partly-equipped cabinet only SCC Conguration TMA 1 x 2 2 x 2 G9de_2.2 G9det_2.2 G18d_2.2 G18dt_2.2 G19d_2.2 G19dt_2.2 2 x G9de_2.2 2 x G9det_2.2 2 x G18d_2.2 2 x G18dt_2.2 2 x G19d_2.2 2 x G19dt_2.2 M = Mandatory No M No M No M No M No M No M Number of Antennas
(2) (0) (0)
(2) (0) (0)
(2) (0) (0)
(2) (0) (0)
(2) (0) (0)
(2) (0) (0)
(2) (2) (0)
(2) (2) (0)
(2) (2) (0)
(2) (2) (0)
(2) (2) (0)
(2) (2) (0) Allowed Number of dTRUs
(0..1) (0) (0)
(0..1) (0) (0)
(0..1) (0) (0)
(0..1) (0) (0)
(0..1) (0) (0)
(0..1) (0) (0)
(0..1) (0..1) (0)
(0..1) (0..1) (0)
(0..1) (0..1) (0)
(0..1) (0..1) (0)
(0..1) (0..1) (0)
(0..1) (0..1) (0) CDU-G Single Band Conguration with Hybrid Combiner Table 25 CDU-G congurations with hybrid combiner in a fully- or partly-equipped cabinet SCC Conguration TMA 3 x 4 3 x G9deh_2.4 3 x G9deht_2.4 3 x G18dh_2.4 3 x G18dht_2.4 3 x G19dh_2.4 3 x G19dht_2.4 2 x 6 2 x G9deh_3.6 2 x G9deht_3.6 2 x G18dh_3.6 2 x G18dht_3.6 2 x G19dh_3.6 2 x G19dht_3.6 1 x 12 G9deh_6.12 G9deht_6.12 G18dh_6.12 G18dht_6.12 G19dh_6.12 G19dht_6.12 No M No M No M No M No M No M No M No M No M Number of Antennas
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(3) (3)
(3) (3)
(3) (3)
(3) (3)
(3) (3)
(3) (3)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6) Allowed Number of dTRUs
(0..2) (0..2) (0..2)
(0..2) (0..2) (0..2)
(0..2) (0..2) (0..2)
(0..2) (0..2) (0..2)
(0..2) (0..2) (0..2)
(0..2) (0..2) (0..2)
(0..3) (0..3)
(0..3) (0..3)
(0..3) (0..3)
(0..3) (0..3)
(0..3) (0..3)
(0..3) (0..3)
(0..6)
(0..6)
(0..6)
(0..6)
(0..6)
(0..6) M = Mandatory SCC 1 x 2 and 2 x 2 can be achieved as a subset of SCC 3 x 4. 70 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 SCC 1 x 4 can be achieved as a subset of either SCC 3 x 4 or 2 x 6. SCC 1 x 6 can be achieved as a subset of SCC 2 x 6. SCC 2 x 4 can be achieved as a subset of SCC 3 x 4 or 2 x 6. SCC 3 x 2 can be achieved with use of SCC 3 x 4. SCC 1 x 2 and 1 x 4 require one CDU-G. SCC 2 x 2 and 1 x 6 require two CDU-Gs. SCC 3 x 2 requires three CDU-Gs. Table 26 CDU-G congurations with hybrid combiner in a partly-equipped cabinet only SCC Conguration TMA 1 x 4 G9deh_2.4 G9deht_2.4 G18dh_2.4 G18dht_2.4 G19dh_2.4 G19dht_2.4 2 x 4 2 x G9deh_2.4 2 x G9deht_2.4 2 x G18dh_2.4 2 x G18dht_2.4 2 x G19dh_2.4 2 x G19dht_2.4 G9deh_4.8 G9deht_4.8 G18dh_4.8 G18dht_4.8 G19dh_4.8 G19dht_4.8 M = Mandatory 1 x 8 4.7.2 No M No M No M No M No M No M No M No M No M Number of Antennas
(2) (0) (0)
(2) (0) (0)
(2) (0) (0)
(2) (0) (0)
(2) (0) (0)
(2) (0) (0)
(2) (2) (0)
(2) (2) (0)
(2) (2) (0)
(2) (2) (0)
(2) (2) (0)
(2) (2) (0)
(4) (0)
(4) (0)
(4) (0)
(4) (0)
(4) (0)
(4) (0) Allowed Number of dTRUs
(0..2) (0) (0)
(0..2) (0) (0)
(0..2) (0) (0)
(0..2) (0) (0)
(0..2) (0) (0)
(0..2) (0) (0)
(0..2) (0..2) (0)
(0..2) (0..2) (0)
(0..2) (0..2) (0)
(0..2) (0..2) (0)
(0..2) (0..2) (0)
(0..2) (0..2) (0)
(0..4) (0)
(0..4) (0)
(0..4) (0)
(0..4) (0)
(0..4) (0)
(0..4) (0) GSM 900/GSM 1800 Dual Band Congurations The notation for dual band congurations is done with the lower frequency (900 MHz) conguration to the left and the higher frequency
(1800 MHz) conguration to the right, separated by the | symbol. This notation is valid regardless of the position in the cabinet. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 71 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 CDU-F Congurations Table 27 Dual band congurations with CDU-F in a fully- or partly-equipped cabinet SCC Conguration 1 x 4 | 1 x 8 F9de_2.4 | F18d_2.8 F9det_2.4 | F18dt_2.8 1 x 8 | 1 x 4 F9de_2.8 | F18d_2.4 F9det_2.8 | F18dt_2.4 TMA No | No M | M No | No M | M Number of Antennas
(2) | (2)
(2) | (2)
(2) | (2)
(2) | (2) Allowed Number of dTRUs
(0..2) | (0..2)
(0..2) | (0..4)
(0..4) | (0..2)
(0..4) | (0..2) M = Mandatory There are two options for placing the equipment in the cabinet:
GSM 900 on the left-hand side/GSM 1800 on the right-hand side, or the other way round. Table 28 Dual band congurations with CDU-F in a partly-equipped cabinet only SCC Conguration TMA Number of Antennas Allowed Number of dTRUs 1 x 4 | 1 x 4 F9de_2.4 | F18d_2.4 F9det_2.4 | F18dt_2.4 No | No M | M
(2) | (2)
(2) | (2)
(0..2) (0) | (0..2)
(0..2) (0) | (0..2) M = Mandatory There are two options for placing the equipment in the cabinet:
GSM 900 on the left-hand side/GSM 1800 on the right-hand side, or the other way round. In each case the middle positions are not used. CDU-G Congurations Table 29 Dual band congurations, CDU-G with hybrid in a fully- or partly-equipped cabinet SCC Conguration 1 x 8 | 1 x 4 G9deh_4.8 | G18dh_2.4 G9deht_4.8 | G18dht_2.4 1 x 4 | 1 x 8 G9deh_2.4 | G18dh_4.8 G9deht_2.4 | G18dht_4.8 TMA No | No M | M No | No M | M Number of Antennas
(4) | (2)
(4) | (2)
(2) | (4)
(2) | (4) Allowed Number of dTRUs
(0..4) | (0..2)
(0..4) | (0..2)
(0..2) | (0..4)
(0..2) | (0..4) M = Mandatory There are two options for placing the equipment in the cabinet:
GSM 900 on the left-hand side/GSM 1800 on the right-hand side, or the other way round. Table 30 Dual band congurations, CDU-G with hybrid in a partly-equipped cabinet only SCC Conguration TMA Number of Antennas Allowed Number of dTRUs 1 x 4 | 1 x 4 G9deh_2.4 | G18dh_2.4 G9deht_2.4 | G18dht_2.4 M = Mandatory No | No M | M
(2) | (2)
(2) | (2)
(0..2) (0) | (0..2)
(0..2) (0) | (0..2) 72 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 There are two options for placing the equipment in the cabinet:
GSM 900 on the left-hand side/GSM 1800 on the right-hand side, or the other way round. In each case the middle position is not used. 4.7.3 SW Power Boost Congurations with CDU-G This section does not include any additional site cell congurations, it species which congurations support SW power boost. A minimum of two TRXs is required in an antenna system to use SW power boost in the antenna system. Separate TX antennas are used for the two transmitters in a SW power boost conguration. SPB with CDU-G Congurations without Hybrid Combiner The following SCC supports SW power boost. The basic radio congurations specied are used. Table 31 CDU-G congurations without hybrid combiner SCC 3 x 2 Conguration TMA 3 x G9det_2.2 3 x G18dt_2.2 3 x G19dt_2.2 M M M Number of Antennas
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2) Allowed Number of dTRUs
(0..1) (0..1) (0..1)
(0..1) (0..1) (..1)
(0..1) (0..1) (0..1) M = Mandatory SCC 1 x 2 and 2 x 2 can be achieved as a subset of SCC 3 x 2. SCC 1 x 2 requires one CDU-G. SCC 2 x 2 requires two CDU-Gs. SPB with CDU-G Congurations with Hybrid Combiner The following SCC supports SW power boost. The basic radio congurations specied are used. SW power boost can be used in cells that have two dTRUs installed. Table 32 CDU-G congurations with hybrid combiner Conguration TMA 3 x G9deht_2.4 3 x G18dht_2.4 3 x G19dht_2.4 M M M Number of Antennas
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2) Allowed Number of dTRUs
(0..2) (0..2) (0..2)
(0..2) (0..2) (0..2)
(0..2) (0..2) (0..2) M = Mandatory Each sector is split into two cells:
one underlaid cell consisting of the second TRX in the rst dTRU and the rst TRX in the second dTRU. SPB is used in this cell. one overlaid cell consisting of the two other TRXs. SPB is not used in this cell. SCC 3 x 4 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 73 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 4.8 Co-Siting with RBS 200 or RBS 2000 Macro Cabinet This section shows expansions where RBSs, forming an original SCC, are co-sited and use TG-synchronization to form one new resulting SCC. Antennas are not shared. 4.8.1 RBS 200 Expanded with 12TRX Cabinet Co-Siting with RBS 200 Using a Filter Combiner Using TG-synchronization, it is possible to build one resulting SCC from the described SCC in the table below. The antenna systems are not shared between RBSs. Table 33 Expansion using lter combiner Result SCC Original SCC Cabinet Combiner Antennas TMA Original SCC Basic Conguration Antennas 1 x 16 *
1 x 4 RBS 200 FCOMB RBS 205 FCOMB RBS 205 FCOMB RBS 205 FCOMB&DPX RBS 205 FCOMB 1 x 8 RBS 200 FCOMB RBS 205 FCOMB RBS 205 FCOMB RBS 205 FCOMB&DPX RBS 205 FCOMB
(3)
(3)
(3)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(2)
(2) No No M No M No No M No M 1x12 F9de_2.12 F18d_2.12 F18dt_2.12 F18d_2.12 F18dt_2.12 1x12 F9de_2.12 F18d_2.12 F18dt_2.12 F18d_2.12 F18dt_2.12
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2) 1 x 20
3 x 8
3 x 4 RBS 200 FCOMB
(3) (3) (3) No 3x4 3 x F9de_2.4
(2) (2) (2)
RBS 205 FCOMB
(3) (3) (3) No RBS 205 FCOMB
(3) (3) (3) M RBS 205 FCOMB&DPX
(2) (2) (2) No RBS 205 FCOMB
(2) (2) (2) M 3 x F18d_2.4
(2) (2) (2) 3 x F18dt_2.4
(2) (2) (2) 3 x F18d_2.4
(2) (2) (2) 3 x F18dt_2.4
(2) (2) (2) M = Mandatory
* 1 x 6, 1 x 8, 1 x 10, 1 x 12 and 1 x 14 can be accomplished with a partly-equipped expansion conguration.
** 1 x 10, 1 x 12, 1 x 14, 1 x 16 and 1 x 18 can be accomplished with a partly-equipped expansion conguration.
*** 3 x 6 can be accomplished with a partly-equipped expansion conguration.
**** When using TG-synchronization, only one RBS 200/RBS 205 can act as master. Therefore the 3 x 4 conguration, which is three separate RBSs, must be rebuilt to one single RBS, that is, all three sectors of the RBS 200 must be connected to the same TMCB. 74 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Co-Siting with RBS 200 Using Hybrid Combiner Using TG-synchronization, it is possible to build one resulting SCC from the described SCC in the table below. The antenna systems are not shared between RBSs. Table 34 Expansion using hybrid combiner Result SCC Original SCC Cabinet Combiner Antennas TMA Original SCC Basic Conguration Antennas 3 x 8 *
3 x 4 ** RBS 200 HCOMB
(3) (3) (3) No 3 x 4 3 x G9deh_2.4
(2) (2) (2) RBS 205 HCOMB
(3) (3) (3) No RBS 205 HCOMB
(3) (3) (3) M 3 x G18dh_2.4
(2) (2) (2) 3 x G18dht_2.4
(2) (2) (2) RBS 205 HCOMB&DPX
(2) (2) (2) No 3 x G18dh_2.4
(2) (2) (2) RBS 205 HCOMB
(2) (2) (2) M 3 x G18dht_2.4
(2) (2) (2) M = Mandatory
* 3 x 6 can be accomplished with a partly-equipped expansion conguration. 1 x 8 can be accomplished with one RBS 200/RBS 205 and a partly-equipped expansion conguration.
** When using TG-synchronization, only one RBS 200/RBS 205 can act as master. Therefore the 3 x 4 conguration, which is three separate RBSs, must be rebuilt to one single RBS, that is, all three sectors of the RBS 200 must be connected to the same TMCB. 4.8.2 6TRX RBS 2000 Macro Cabinets Expanded with 12TRX Cabinet Co-Siting with Single TRU-Based RBS 2000 Using Filter Combiner Using TG-synchronization, it is possible to build one resulting SCC from the described SCC in the table below. The antenna systems are not shared between RBSs. Table 35 Expansion using lter combiner Result SCC Original SCC 1 x 18 *
1 x 6 1 x 24 **
1 x 12 RBS 1 Basic Conguration Antennas D9de_2.6 D18d_2.6 D18_2.6 D9de_2.12 D18d_2.12 D18_2.12
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2) Original SCC 1 x 12 1 x 12 RBS 2 Basic Conguration Antennas F9de_2.12 F18d_2.12 F18dt_2.12 F9de_2.12 F18d_2.12 F18dt_2.12
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
* 1 x 8, 1 x 10, 1 x 12, 1 x 14 and 1 x 16 can be accomplished with a partly-equipped RBS 2.
** 1 x 14, 1 x 16, 1 x 18, 1 x 20 and 1 x 22 can be accomplished with a partly-equipped RBS 2. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 75 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 Co-Siting with Single TRU-Based RBS 2000 Using Hybrid Combiner Using TG-synchronization, it is possible to build one resulting SCC from the described SCC in the table below. The antenna systems are not shared between RBSs. Table 36 Expansion using hybrid combiner RBS 1 Basic Conguration Result SCC Original SCC Antennas RBS 2 Basic Conguration Original SCC 3 x 8 *
3 x 4 3 x C + 9d_2.4
(2) (2) (2) 3 x 4 3 x G9deh_2.4 D9de_2.12 3 x C + 9de_2.4
(2) (2) (2) 3 x C + 18d_2.4 3 x C + 18_2.4 3 x C + 19d_2.4 3 x C + 19_2.4
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2) Antennas
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2) 3 x G9deh_2.4 3 x G18dh_2.4 3 x G18dht_2.4
(2) (2) (2) 3 x G19dh_2.4
(2) (2) (2) 3 x G19dht_2.4
(2) (2) (2)
* 3 x 6 is accomplished with a partly-equipped RBS 2. 4.8.3 12TRX RBS 2000 Macro Cabinet Expanded with 12TRX Cabinet Co-Siting with dTRU-Based RBS 2000 Macro Cabinet Using Filter Combiner It is possible to build one resulting SCC from the described SCC in the table below, using TG-synchronization. The antenna systems are not shared between RBSs. Table 37 Expansion using lter combiner Result SCC 3 x 8 *
Original SCC 8 + 4 1 x 24 **
1 x 12 RBS 1 Basic Conguration F9de_2.8 +
F9de_2.4 F9det_2.4 +
F9det_2.4 F18d_2.8 +
F18d_2.4 F18dt_2.8 +
F18dt_2.4 F9de_2.12 F9det_2.12 F18d_2.12 F18d_2.12 RBS 2 Antennas Original SCC Basic Conguration
(2) (2) (-) 4 + 8
(2) (2) (-)
(2) (2) (-)
(2) (2) (-)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2) 1 x 12 F9de_2.4 +
F9de_2.8 F9det_2.4 +
F9det_2.8 F18d_2.4 +
F18d_2.8 F18dt_2.4 +
F18dt_2.8 F9de_2.12 F9det_2.12 F18d_2.12 F18dt_2.12 Antennas
(-) (2) (2)
(-) (2) (2)
(-) (2) (2)
(-) (2) (2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
* 3 x 6 can be accomplished with a partly-equipped RBS 1 and RBS 2, although it is more easily performed with 2 x 6 in RBS 1 and 1 x 8 with three dTRUs in RBS 2. TG-synchronization is not required. 76 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Radio Congurations, RBS 2206
** 1 x 14, 1 x 16, 1 x 18, 1 x 20 and 1 x 22 are accomplished with a partly-equipped RBS 2. Co-Siting with dTRU-Based RBS 2000 Using Hybrid Combiner Using TG-synchronization, it is possible to build one resulting SCC from the described SCC in the table below. The antenna systems are not shared between RBSs. Table 38 Expansion using hybrid combiner RBS 1 RBS 2 Result SCC Original SCC Basic Conguration Antennas Original SCC Basic Antennas 3 x 8 *
3 x 4 3 x G9deh_2.4
(2) (2) (2) 3 x 4 3 x G9deht_2.4
(2) (2) (2) 3 x G18dh_2.4
(2) (2) (2) 3 x G18dht_2.4
(2) (2) (2) Conguration 3 x G9deh_2.4 3 x G9deht_2.4 3 x G18dh_2.4
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2) 3 x G18dht_2.4
(2) (2) (2)
* 3 x 6 is accomplished with a partly-equipped RBS 2. Co-Siting with dTRU-Based RBS 2000 without Hybrid Combiner Using TG-synchronization, it is possible to build one resulting SCC from the described SCC in the table below. The antenna systems are not shared between RBSs. Table 39 Expansion using CDU-G without hybrid combiner Antennas Original SCC Basic Antennas RBS 2 RBS 1 Original SCC Basic Conguration Result SCC 3 x 4 3 x 2 3 x G9de_2.2
(2) (2) (2) 3 x 2 3 x G9det_2.2 3 x G18d_2.2 3 x G18dt_2.2 3 x G19dh_2.4
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2) Conguration 3 x G9de_2.4 3 x G9det_2.4 3 x G18d_2.4 3 x G18dt_2.4 3 x G19dh_2.4
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2)
(2) (2) (2) 3 x G19dht_2.4
(2) (2) (2) 3 x G19dht_2.4
(2) (2) (2) EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 77 (421) Radio Congurations, RBS 2206 This page is intentionally left blank 78 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 5 5.1 Product Data Site Equipment Overview Product Data AC power cable AC Distribution box Antenna system Alarm cable Microwave Link DF AC Protection
(Optional) Unit BBS Optical cable
+24V DC PCM cable RBS 2206 TMR 9202 Site Equipment Overview Figure 25 The following is a list of the most common equipment on a radio site, divided into function groups:
P007416A RBS 2206 Power:
BBS 2000 AC Distribution box Power cables Antenna System Antennas TMA Feeder cables Transmission TMR 9202 DXX EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 79 (421) Product Data 5.2 Mini DXC Mini Link Installation Material Earthing DF Cable ladder Site Power Options The RBS cabinet has three power source options:
120 - 250 V AC mains input power through screw-terminals. The power inputs feed four separate PSUs. A battery back-up
+24 V DC may be connected simultaneously as an option. This is the same as the +24 V described below.
+24 V DC. The radio cabinet can operate on +24 V DC from an external power source.
-(48 - 60) V DC is connected in a similar manner as the AC. Observe that the +24 V DC battery back-up is not available in this power conguration. 5.3 Power Connections DANGER Improper electrical installation may cause re or electrical shock. Approved circuit breakers for the AC mains and the cables cross sectional areas must always be selected in accordance with local laws and regulations. Only a qualied and authorized electrician is permitted to install or modify the electrical installation. The RBS 2206 can be delivered in two versions. The rst version has power interface inlets for one AC mains supply voltage and one inlet for DC power: +24 V DC. The other version has power interface for
-(48 - 60) V DC, see table below. Table 40 The power supply voltage can be one of the following alternatives:
Nominal Range 120 - 250 V AC, 50 - 60 Hz 90 - 275 V AC, 45 - 65 Hz PSU PSU-AC
+24 V DC
+20.5 - +29 V DC PSU not needed
-(48 - 60) V DC
-(39 - 72) V DC PSU-DC 80 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Product Data 5.3.1 AC Mains Power Connection There are two ways to connect power to the base station. They are:
Single phase line to neutral. Single phase line to line. Single Phase Line to Neutral Circuit breaker AC Distribution box L N RBS interface RBS Power connection, L1-N (120 - 250 V AC) Figure 26 One circuit breaker per PSU is required. Single Phase Line to Line RBS interface RBS Circuit breakers AC Distribution box L1 L2 P007349A P007350A Power connection, L1-L2 (120 - 250 V AC) Figure 27 Two circuit breakers per PSU are required. AC Mains Power Requirements AC mains power is connected to the ACCU in the cabinet using four AC cables. The cables must be protected by a circuit breaker according to the gures above. If the existing power system does not meet the specied requirements, measurements must be taken to avoid damage to the RBS and to secure proper operation, for example by installing lters and stabilizers. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 81 (421) Product Data Table 41 AC mains power requirements Voltage range for specied performance (phase voltage) Voltage range Frequency Inrush current, max. Maximum AC power Non-destructive range Overvoltage <20 ms 120 - 250 V AC 108(1)-275 V AC 45 - 65 Hz 30 A 1.4 kW x 4 0 300 V AC 300 V(2)
(1) 90 V AC with reduced output power.
(2) Install external lter and stabilizer if not met. Mains Fuses Table 42 Mains fuses recommendation Voltage Nominal 120 - 250 V Minimum for Safe Function 10 A(1)/15 A Maximum Allowed Fuse Rating 16 A
(1) For 200 - 250 V range only Minimum for safe value means the smallest fuse that can be used with respect to power consumption and start up current. Maximum allowed must not be exceeded due to the dimensions of the internal wiring and components. AC Power Cables There are four external power cables for the radio cabinet, one for each Power Supply Unit. They are connected to the ACCU main switch with screw terminals. The conductor area can be 1.5 2.5 mm2 and the cable diameter can be 8.5 12.5 mm. 5.3.2
+24 V DC Power Supply DC Power Supply Requirements (+24 V) Table 43 DC power supply requirements Nominal Default Range Non-destructive range Inrush current
+24 V DC
+27.2 V DC
+20.5 +29.0 V DC
+0 - +32.0 V DC max. 500 A (0.1 - 10 ms) 82 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Product Data Fuses The +24 V DC cables must be protected with an approved circuit breaker/fuse. Table 44
+24 V DC fuses recommendation Minimum for Safe Function Maximum Allowed Fuse Rating 175 A 200 A
+24 V DC Cables The +24 V DC supply is connected to the DC lter by a pair of 95 - 150 mm2 cables, one for + and one for -. 5.3.3
-(48 - 60) V DC Power Supply DC Power Requirements -(48 - 60) V Table 45 DC power requirements Nominal Range Non-destructive range Inrush current, typical
-48/-60 V DC
-(40.0 - 72.0) V DC
+0 - (-80) V DC 200 A (0.1 - 0.5 ms) Fuses Table 46
-(48 - 60) V fuses recommendation Fuse Rating for -60 V DC Fuse Rating for -48 V DC 32 A 40 A
-(48 - 60) V DC Cables There are four power cables for the cabinet, one pair for each Power Supply Unit. They are connected to the DCCU main switch with screw terminals. The cables must be connected via an approved circuit breaker/fuse for each cable. The conductor area can be 6 10 mm2and cable diameter can be 4.5 7 mm. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 83 (421) Product Data 5.4 RBS 2206 Cabinet Hardware Description Connection field ACCU or DCCU FCU DC filter Fans Connection field CDU CXU dTRU IDM DXU Base frame PSU P008165A Figure 28 ACCU CDU CXU DCCU dTRU DXU FCU IDM PSU OXU AC Connection Unit Combining and Distribution Unit Conguration Switch Unit DC Connection Unit Double Transceiver Unit Distribution Switch Unit Fan Control Unit Internal Distribution Module Power Supply Unit Optional Expansion Unit RBS 2206 is a high-capacity indoor base station. It is used for indoor applications, with up to six double Transceiver Units (dTRU). The RBS 2206 is designed to be transported as a fully-assembled cabinet to the site. All units in the cabinet are easily accessible from the front of the cabinet, which means that the cabinets can be mounted side by side with their backs against a wall. RBS Cabinet Hardware The RBS 2206 has a number of replaceable units. The functions of specic units of the RBS 2206 are described briey here. Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 5.4.1 84 (421) Product Data Distribution Switch Unit (DXU-21) The DXU is the central control unit for the RBS. It supports the interface to the BSC, and it collects and transmits the alarms. The DXU controls the power and climate equipment for the RBS. It has a removable compact ashcard which makes it possible to replace a faulty DXU without the need for loading RBS software from the BSC. The DXU is also provided with four connections for transmission lines. It can handle both 2 Mbit (E1) and 1.5 Mbit (T1) PCM links. The DXU has hardware support for EDGE on 12 TRXs. Double Transceiver Unit (dTRU) RBS 2206 has capacity for a maximum of six dTRUs. The dTRU contains two TRXes for transmission and reception of two radio carriers. It has a built-in combiner with the optional possibility of combining two TX signals into one TX output. It is also prepared for four-branch RX diversity for further improvements in sensitivity. One version of the dTRU imports only GMSK and the other version supports both GMSK and EDGE. Combining and Distribution Unit (CDU) The CDU is the interface between the transceivers and the antenna system. All signals are ltered before transmission and after reception by means of bandpass lters. The CDU allows several dTRUs to share antennas. There are a maximum of three CDUs in one RBS 2206. The task of the CDU is to combine transmitted signals from several transceivers, and to distribute received signal to several transceivers. The CDU is hardware-prepared to support EDGE. Two different CDU types are used in RBS 2206 to support all the congurations. CDU-F is a lter combiner intended for high capacity solutions. It can handle up to four transceivers on two antennas. One-, two- and three-
sector congurations are possible in one cabinet with only two antennas per sector. A combination of three CDU-Fs can handle 12 transceivers on two antennas. CDU-G can be congured either for high capacity or for high coverage. It is a combiner that can be used for synthesizer hopping. To achieve capacity, CDU-G is used in a conguration where the hybrid combiner in the dTRU is used. Up to two dTRUs (four transceivers) can be connected to two antennas. One-, two- and three-sector congurations are supported. To achieve maximum coverage, CDU-G is used in a conguration where the hybrid combiner within the dTRU is not used. Only one dTRU can be connected to each antenna. The number of dTRUs in an RBS 2206 cabinet is limited to three in this case. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 85 (421) Product Data Conguration Switch Unit (CXU) The task of the CXU is to cross-connect the CDU and the dTRU in the receiver path. The CXU makes it possible to expand or recongure a cabinet without moving or replacing any RX cables. The RX inputs/outputs on the dTRU and the CDU are placed in such positions that they minimize the amount of cable types for connecting the CXU with the dTRUs and the CDUs. The CXU is congured by means of software. Power Supply Unit (PSU) The RBS 2206 contains up to four Power Supply Units (PSU). The PSUs are available in two versions, PSU AC for connection to AC mains, or PSU DC for connection to -48 or -60 V DC power supply. The PSU AC converts 120-250 V to regulated +24 V DC. The PSU DC converts -(48 - 60) V DC to regulated +24 V DC. Cooling System The cooling system uses forced air. The air inlet is the perforated door and the outlet is on the roof. The cooling system consists of four fans and a Fan Control Unit (FCU) that controls the fan speed. The FCU is controlled by the DXU. When the cabinet is not fully equiped, RU dummies are needed to ensure that the cooling system works properly. The fans are positioned between the CDU subrack and the roof, giving a common suction area. They draw the air through three separate channels around the RUs. Internal Distribution Module (IDM) The IDM is a panel for distributing the internal +24 V DC power to the various units. Each distribution circuit in the cabinet is connected to a circuit breaker in the IDM. AC Connection Unit/DC Connection Unit (ACCU/DCCU) The ACCU/DCCU handles distribution and connection/disconnection of the incoming power supply voltages to the PSUs. The connection/dis-
connections are performed by the main switch. The units also contain lter equipment. DC Filter Unit The DC lter unit is the interface for +24 V DC power supply or battery back-up. Space for Optional Expansion (OXU) There are four positions available for optional RUs in the DXU/PSU subrack, for example for TMA-CM and DXX. One 19-inch OXU-
position is also available between the CXU and the dTRU subrack. 86 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 5.4.2 Measurements Product Data 0 0 3 0 5 2 0 0 8 1 0 5 8 1 0 0 1 2 600 400 P006382B Radio cabinet measurements Figure 29 Recommended distance between the cabinet and cable ladder is 250 mm. A shorter distance makes it difcult to exchange fans and may hinder the air ow. The door projects 50 mm in front of the cabinet. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 87 (421) Product Data Site Equipment Room 300 250 1000 a2=130o 800 1000 Unit of measurement: mm P006362A Floor layout and space requirements Figure 30 The picture above shows oor layout and space requirements. There must always be a space between the cabinet and the cable ladder for the ow of exhaust air, and to be able to replace fans. If the RBS cabinet must meet earthquake requirements, the space between wall and cabinet must be at least 100 mm, and between cabinets at least 150 mm. 5.4.3 Weights Table 47 Weight of cabinet Unit Fully equipped cabinet incl. base frame Base frame Weight 230 kg 12 kg The weight of the heaviest replaceable unit is less than 15 kg (CDU-G). 88 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 5.4.4 Foot Print Product Data o 20x75
(RBS 2202) RBS 2206 99 FRONT 400 598 45 220 320 400 Unit of measurement: mm P008315A Figure 31 Drilling template for RBS 2206 The RBS 2206 has the same footprint as both cabinets in the RBS 200 system, and the RBS 2202 cabinet. The base frame is used as a template to mark new holes for the RBS 2206. Replacements The RBS 2206 cable interfaces are different from the RBS 200 and the RBS 2202. New power distribution circuit breakers and new matching power cables may have to be installed between the power distribution board and the cabinet, see Section 5.3 Power Connections on page 80. Make sure the existing feeders and other cables reach the radio cabinet and that the battery back-up cables have the correct cross-sectional area. 5.4.5 Power Consumption Table 48 Power consumption for RBS 2206 RBS (fully equipped) Maximum power consumption Power Supply Voltage 120 - 250 V AC 3.9 kW/ 5.8 kW(1)
+24 V DC 3.2 kW
-48 V DC 3.8 kW
(1) Power consumption during maximum battery charging. The RBS 2206 has capacity to supply units with power up to 4.8 kW. The power consumption during operation depends upon conguration and trafc. 5.4.6 Heat Dissipation All power consumed by the RBS can be considered as heat dissipation in the RBS room. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 89 (421) Product Data 5.4.7 Climate Endurance Table 49 Climatic endurance Environmental Parameters Temperature Relative humidity Units
C
Normal Conditions
+5 - +40 NonDestructive Conditions
-10 - +55 5 - 85 5 - 90 Normal conditions describe the environmental conditions where all units function as specied. Non-destructive conditions describe environmental stress above the limits for normal conditions with no function guaranteed and unspecied degradation. When the environmental stress has dropped to normal conditions, restoring full RBS performance requires no manual intervention on site. Non-destructive conditions refer to a period of maximum 96 consecutive hours, and a total of maximum 5.5 days in a three year period. Acoustic Dispersion In operation, the base station will not generate acoustic noise exeeding the following limits:
Sound power of 5.8 Bel (B) at environmental temperature below +30C. Sound power of 6.3 Bel (B) at maximum environmental temperature, above +30C. Vibrations RBS 2206 is tested to withstand random vibrations of up to 0.2 m/s. It is also tested for single shocks up to 40 m/s. RBS 2206 is tested for seismic exposure with a test frequency of 1 -
35 Hz. Maximum test level of the Required Response Spectrum (RRS) is 50 m/s within 2 - 5 Hz. The shape of RRS is dened by ETSI standard. External Alarms The external alarm inputs in the RBS 2206 do not have overvoltage protection. It is compulsory to use the DF to protect the external alarm inputs. The optional Distribution Frame (DF) provides connections for RBS 2206 external alarms. There are 16 external alarms available. The alarm device can set the alarm by either an open or closed circuit. The alarm device connected to the screw terminals should be isolated relay contacts. A closed contact (logic zero) is required to be below 2 k
, and an open contact (logic one) above 100 k
. The current through a closed 0 contact is 1.2 mA. The voltage between terminals with an open contact is 24 V DC. The external alarms are dened at the installation. They are dened by using the Operation and Maintenance Terminal (OMT) or from the BSC. 5.4.8 5.4.9 5.4.10 90 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Product Data For further information see Section 5.5.1 Distribution Frame with Overvoltage Protection on page 93. 5.4.11 RBS 2206 Connection Interface G703-1 G703-2 ACCU/DCCU FCU
+24 V DC DC out G703-4 G703-3 External Alarms ESB-2 ESB-1 TD RD DC-Filter-01 Connection eld for external connectors Figure 32 External cable connections are made in the top section of the cabinet, towards the front, inside the door. P007683C Signal Cable Connections Table 50 Signal Cable Connections Connector Description G703-1 G703-2 G703-3 G703-4 DC out Transmission Link 1 Transmission Link 2 Transmission Link 3 Transmission Link 4
+24 V DC to external equipment External Alarms External alarm inputs ESB-1 ESB-2 External Synchronisation Bus External Synchronisation Bus Transmission cables, alarm cable and ESB cables are located on the left side of the cabinets top front section. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 91 (421) Product Data Antenna Cable Connections Rx Tx/Rx CDU-F Figure 33 Connection interface CDU-F Tx/Rx1 Tx/Rx2 CDU-G P007937A P007936A Connection interface CDU-G Figure 34 Antenna feeders are directly connected to the CDUs. If bias-injector is used, it is connected directly to the CDU and the antenna feeder is connected to bias-injector. Power and Earthing Connections Table 51 Power and earthing connections Connector
+24 V DC
-24 V DC Earth ACCU 1 ACCU 2 ACCU 3 ACCU 4 DCCU 1 DCCU 2 DCCU 3 DCCU 4 Description DC-lter +
DC-lter -
Earth stud M8 Mains connection to PSU-AC 1 Mains connection to PSU-AC 2 Mains connection to PSU-AC 3 Mains connection to PSU-AC 4
-48 V connection to PSU-DC 1
-48 V connection to PSU-DC 2
-48 V connection to PSU-DC 3
-48 V connection to PSU-DC 4 92 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Opto Cable Connections The optical cable inputs between the RBS 2206 and the BBS 2000 are located on, and immediately below, the FCU, see Figure 32 on page 91. Product Data Table 52 Opto cable connections Connector Description FCU-RD FCU-TD From BBS To BBS Optional Connections The right part of the cabinet contact eld has four pieces of blank panels for optional applications. Blank panels can be exchanged with contact plates in order to equip the area. 5.5 5.5.1 External Alarm and Transmission Interface Distribution Frame with Overvoltage Protection OVP for external alarm Distribution module PCM overvoltage module Earthing P008200A Figure 35 Distribution Frame with Overvoltage Protection The Distribution Frame (DF) is a connection and Overvoltage Protection (OVP) device for external alarms and PCM-links. The OVP limits the voltage to 100 V relative to ground. The PCM-link can be provided with a balun (balanced/unbalanced transformer). The DF can be mounted on a wall or in a 19 frame. All cables between the DF and the RBS are included. The cable set is available in two versions, 7 m and 15 m. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 93 (421) Product Data OVP for External Alarm It is possible to connect 16 external alarms to the DF. Each alarm connection is provided with over-voltage protection. (One OVP module protects two alarm connections.) PCM Overvoltage Module This module contains overvoltage protection for the PCM lines. If the PCM lines are terminated in equipment outside the RBS equipment room, these lines must be protected by overvoltage protectors (OVP) in the DF. Failure to do so might damage the DXU-21, if a voltage transient is transported along the cable. RBS 2206 is designed for 100/120 balanced (twisted pair) cable. If 75 unbalanced (coaxial) cable is to be connected, the module must contain a balun card that converts 75 unbalanced to 100/120 balanced line. A by-pass relay card can be installed in the module to bypass the transmission network during power failure. Distribution Module This unit supervises the OVP and controls the by-pass relay if by-pass relay is used. It can also distribute +24 V DC to external transmission equipment. Earthing The DF is provided with a short earth cable which is to be connected to the earth collection bar. The DF must be placed close to the earth collection bar, therefore the earth cable must not be extended. 5.5.2 Transmission Adapter (Optional) P008218A Transmission adapter (TA) Figure 36 The Transmission Adapter (TA) is a unit that contains a balun
(balanced/unbalanced transformer) for transforming 75 unbalanced to 120 balanced cable. It is provided with two BNC connectors for connection of the 75 coaxial cable. It is intended for mounting directly on the transmission link connector
(G-703) on the cabinets connection eld, see Figure 32 on page 91. 94 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 5.5.3 5.5.4 Product Data Transmission Network Connection LAPD concentration and LAPD multiplexing can be used to make the transmission resource more efcient. The DXU is equipped with four transmission ports. It is connected to a 2 Mbit/s PCM signal or to a 1.5 Mbit/s signal. Two types of transmission network standards may occur: 2 Mbit/s PCM with 75 unbalanced lines or 120 balanced lines. The second case is 1.5 Mbit/s PCM balanced 100 lines. On the top part of the cabinet are connections for optional transmission equipment which is mounted externally. The connections are:
Blank panels for connectors to Optional Transmission Equipment
(OXU) PCM cables
+24 V DC Transmission Power RBS 2206 can feed the transmission equipment with +24 V DC. The maximum power output is 250 W. BBS 2000 can feed the transmission equipment with +24 V DC. If a DC/DC converter is used, the BBS 2000 can deliver -48 V DC. The converter is mounted in the BBS 2000. Maximum power outputs from the BBS 2000 are given in the table below. Table 53 Maximum power output Battery Fuse Unit BFU-21 BFU-22 Current 2 x 12 A Power Output max. 2 x 250 W (+24 V DC) 200 W (-48 V DC) 40 A max. 800 W (+24 V DC) EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 95 (421) Product Data 5.5.5 Cascading BSC BSC RBS 1 RBS 2 A B C D A B C D Next RBS P007503A Cascade connection Figure 37 RBS 2000 can be cascaded. This means that the unused time slots from the BSC are cascaded from the rst base station to a second base station, where the second base station can be located at some distance from the rst one. Both base stations use the same transmission line to the BSC. The cable from the previous and to the next base station in the chain is connected through four PCM cables A-D. 5.6 BBS 2000 Rack Description BFU-21 BBS2000 1800 DC/DC BBS2000 BBS2000 BBS2000 Batteries 1850 400 Unit of measurement: mm P008268A Example of three battery stands Figure 38 Battery back-up is used to power the site during mains power failure and also to protect the site from short interruptions in the AC mains supply. It is available in an external cabinet. 96 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Product Data It is possible to supply external transmission equipment from the battery cabinet. The transmission equipment is provided with power supply longer than the RBS. In event of mains failure, the batteries in the BBS 2000 will deliver the necessary power to the radio cabinet as well as to the transmission equipment, if used. This enables the radio system to operate during mains failure. The battery back-up can be delivered for 1, 2, 4, 6 or 8 hours back-up time, depending on the chosen conguration of the RBS. The BBS can feed +24 V DC or -48 V DC to the TM equipment. The
-48 V DC supply requires an internal DC/DC converter in the BBS. It is possible to share battery back-up between RBS 2202 and RBS 2206. 5.6.1 Converting BBS 2202 If BBS 2202 is used, a conversion kit is needed to run RBS 2206. The battery fuse unit determines which conversion kit should be used:
BFU-21:
BFU-22:
product number BMY 201 237/5 product number BMY 201 237/6 5.6.2 Weights Table 54 BBS 2000 unit weight Unit Battery stand, without batteries Battery stand, with 2 batteries 490 Battery stand, with 3 batteries 650 Weight in kg 170 Weight in lb. 375 1080 1433 5.6.3 Output Voltage The voltage range to the RBS cabinet is +20.2 - 29.0 V DC. Predened voltage Battery low voltage limit
+27.2 V DC
+21.0 V DC 5.6.4 BBS Cabinet Hardware Battery Fuse Unit The battery fuse unit (BFU) monitors and controls the batteries. It will cut off the load (the RBS) when any of the following conditions occur:
A mains failure lasts longer than the back-up time. When the battery voltage drops below a preset value, the BFU disconnects the RBS. This is to prevent damaging the batteries by over-
discharging. The BFU continues to feed the transmission EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 97 (421) Product Data equipment and/or the DC/DC converter until the voltage has dropped to 20.0 V DC. The temperature of the batteries is too high. A short circuit occurs between the distribution cables. This will release the circuit breaker in the BFU. The BFU also supplies voltage through two fuses directly to transmission equipment and/or through the DC/DC converter (optional) to transmission equipment. BFU-21 supplies through two fuses (12 A), BFU-22 supplies through one fuse (40 A). One BFU is needed for each RBS cabinet. BFU-21 and BFU-22 differ in their power outputs, see Table 53 on page 95. DC/DC converter (optional) The DC/DC converter is located in the BBS and converts +24 V DC to -48 V DC. Battery Blocks The batteries are for stationary use. They are a sealed lead-acid type, with valve ventilators. The battery is composed of battery blocks in one or more battery strings. One string of +24 V batteries has four 6 V blocks. Further information regarding the BBS 2000 can be found in:
Power Manual BBS 2000 K 1556-BZZ 208 06-101 5.6.5 Cable Connection Interfaces 5.7 See Section 5.3.2 +24 V DC Power Supply on page 82. Antenna System This chapter contains information about antenna congurations for outdoor cells. There are a number of antenna system products available, such as antennas, feeders, jumpers, TMAs and so on. For more detailed information about products, see RBS Site Solutions homepage:
http://gsmrbs.ericsson.se/gsmsystems/solutions/rbs_site_solutions/
index.htm 98 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 5.7.1 Tower Mounted Amplier (TMA) Product Data ddTMA Ant RX/TX Bias-T Injector RBS TMA-CM TX/RX CDU-F CDU-G 900/1800/1900 MHz P006375B Figure 39 TMA connections for 12 TRX RBSs Function The TMA compensates for signal loss in the receiver antenna cables, reduces system noise and improves uplink sensitivity. The TMA can consist of a duplex lter. Duplex is the function that allows communication in two directions (sending and receiving) on the same communication channel. The TMA used for 12 TRX products is Dual Duplex TMA (ddTMA). Requirements The TMA is mounted as close to the antennas as possible in the GSM 900, 1800 and 1900 systems, preferably on the same support. Cable length is approximately 1 m. Feeder Loss The GSM 1800 and 1900 receivers are optimized to have a maximum sensitivity with a feeder loss of 4 dB. Feeder loss of less than 4 dB will cause a deterioration of receiver sensitivity if strong interfering signals are present. Feeders with 4 dB loss or more must be selected at sites where strong interfering signals are expected. It may be necessary to select a feeder with higher loss and calculate the length to obtain a total loss of 4 dB. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 99 (421) Product Data Dual Duplex TMA (ddTMA) Antenna ddTMA TX/RX RBS P007931A Figure 40 Dual Duplex TMA (ddTMA) The ddTMA is to be used for GSM 900, for all macro base stations and 1800 or 1900 systems for RBS 2206 and RBS 2106. A Dual Duplex TMA contains two duplex lters and a low noise amplier. The rst duplex lter splits up the signal path from the antenna into one transmitter and one receiver path. The received signal is amplied in the low noise amplier. After amplication, the receiver and transmitter paths are combined in the second duplex lter. The ddTMA is a narrow-band product and is available in a number of versions depending on the frequency band to be used. A bias-injector is used to feed the ddTMA with 15 V DC. The unit has two 7/16 socket connectors, see gure below. 100 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Product Data 100 117 8 9 2 Unit of measurement: mm ANT TX/RX P004347A Figure 41 Dimensions of ddTMA Table 55 Unit ddTMA Weight 4 kg without mounting bracket Dimensions height 298 mm width 117 mm depth 100 mm Bias-Injector The bias-injectors are used to provide the TMA with DC power from the TMA-CM, over the RX/TX feeder cables. The bias-injector is mounted between the antenna feeder and the CDU. TMA-CM Six bias-injectors can be connected to one TMA-CM. The TMA-CM can be mounted either externally, as in the RBS 2202;
or internally, as in the RBS 2206. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 101 (421) Product Data 5.7.2 Antenna System Connections 3 x 2 CDU-F Number of cells Number of TRX/cell Type of CDU P008302A CDU conguration key Figure 42 The various congurations available for cabinets are described using the following system:
In the example above, the cabinet is tted with three CDUs, each connected to two TRXs; the total number of TRXs is thus six in this case. The CDU is type CDU-F. The RF cables between each CDU and its associated dTRUs are standardized and do not normally change. Each CDU uses a set of standard RF wiring patterns for connection between each CDU and the cabinet connection eld. In the gures and tables in the sections that follow, the cabinets shown are fully-equipped. Congurations consisting of a part of the fully-
equipped cabinet can also be derived from the following gures and tables. GSM 900/1800 CDU-F, congurations without TMA Cell A Cell B Cell C DX1 RXB DX1 RXB DX1 RXB Figure 43 Conguration scheme, 3x2 CDU-F and 3x4 CDU-F P008227A 102 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Product Data Table 56 3x2 CDU-F and 3x4 CDU-F Cell A CDU 1 B C 2 2 Connection TX/RX RX TX/RX RX TX/RX RX Signal TX/RX RX TX/RX RX TX/RX RX Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:RXB CellB:DX1 CellB:RXB CellC:DX1 CellC:RXB 1x2 CDU-F From the conguration in gure above, the following congurations can be derived:
2x2 CDU-F 1x4 CDU-F 2x4 CDU-F Cell A DX1 DX2 P008229A Figure 44 Conguration scheme, 1x8 CDU-F Table 57 1x8 CDU-F Cell A CDU 1 2 Connection TX/RX TX/RX Signal TX/RX TX/RX Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:DX2 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 103 (421) Product Data Cell A DX1 DX2 Figure 45 Conguration scheme, 1x12 CDU-F Table 58 1x12 CDU-F Cell A CDU 1 3 Connection TX/RX TX/RX Signal TX/RX TX/RX Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:DX2 Cell A Cell B DX1 RXB RXB DX1 Figure 46 Conguration scheme, 2x6 CDU-F P008228A P008232A 104 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Product Data Table 59 2x6 CDU-F Cell A CDU 1 B 3 Connection TX/RX RX TX/RX RX Signal TX/RX RX TX/RX RX Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:RXB CellB:DX1 CellB:RXB Cell A Cell B DX1 RXB DX1 DX2 P008230A Figure 47 Conguration scheme, 1x4+1x8 CDU-F Table 60 1x4+1x8 CDU-F Cell A CDU 1 B 2 3 Connection TX/RX RX TX/RX TX/RX Signal TX/RX RX TX/RX TX/RX Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:RXB CellB:DX1 CellB:DX2 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 105 (421) Product Data Cell A Cell B DX1 DX2 DX1 RXB P008231A Figure 48 Conguration scheme, 1x8+1x4 CDU-F Table 61 1x8+1x4 CDU-F Cell A B CDU 1 2 3 Connection TX/RX TX/RX TX/RX RX Signal TX/RX TX/RX TX/RX RX Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:DX2 CellB:DX1 CellB:RXB GSM 900/1800 CDU-F, congurations with TMA Cell A TMA TMA TMA Cell B Cell C TMA TMA TMA DX1 RXB DX1 RXB DX1 RXB Figure 49 Conguration scheme, 3x2 CDU-F and 3x4 CDU-F P008260A 106 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Product Data Table 62 3x2 CDU-F and 3x4 CDU-F Cell A CDU 1 B C 2 2 Connection TX/RX RX TX/RX RX TX/RX RX Signal TX/RX RX TX/RX RX TX/RX RX Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:RXB CellB:DX1 CellB:RXB CellC:DX1 CellC:RXB 1x2 CDU-F From the conguration in gure above, the following congurations can be derived:
2x2 CDU-F 1x4 CDU-F 2x4 CDU-F Cell A TMA TMA DX1 DX2 P008255A Figure 50 Conguration scheme, 1x8 CDU-F Table 63 1x8 CDU-F Cell A CDU 1 2 Connection TX/RX TX/RX Signal TX/RX TX/RX Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:DX2 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 107 (421) Product Data Cell A TMA TMA DX1 DX2 P008256A Figure 51 Conguration scheme, 1x12 CDU-F Table 64 1x12 CDU-F Cell A CDU 1 3 Connection TX/RX TX/RX Signal TX/RX TX/RX Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:DX2 Cell A Cell B TMA TMA TMA TMA DX1 RXB DX1 RXB Figure 52 Conguration scheme, 2x6 CDU-F Table 65 2x6 CDU-F Cell A CDU 1 B 3 Connection TX/RX TX/RX TX/RX RX Signal TX/RX TX/RX TX/RX RX P008257A Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:RXB CellB:DX1 CellB:RXB 108 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Product Data Cell A Cell B TMA TMA TMA TMA DX1 RXB DX1 DX2 Figure 53 Conguration scheme, 1x4+1x8 CDU-F Table 66 1x4+1x8 CDU-F Cell A CDU 1 B 2 3 Connection TX/RX RX TX/RX TX/RX Signal TX/RX RX TX/RX TX/RX Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:RXB CellB:DX1 CellB:DX2 Cell A Cell B TMA TMA TMA TMA DX1 DX2 DX1 RXB Figure 54 Conguration scheme, 1x8+1x4 CDU-F P008259A P008258A EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 109 (421) Product Data Table 67 1x8+1x4 CDU-F Cell A CDU 1 2 3 B Connection TX/RX TX/RX TX/RX RX Signal TX/RX TX/RX TX/RX RX Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:DX2 CellB:DX1 CellB:RXB GSM 900/1800 CDU-G, congurations without TMA Cell A Cell B Cell C DX1 DX2 DX1 DX2 DX1 DX2 P008223A Figure 55 Conguration scheme, 3x2 CDU-G and 3x4 CDU-G Table 68 3x2 CDU-G and 3x4 CDU-G Cell A CDU 1 B C 2 3 Connection TX/RX1 TX/RX2 TX/RX1 TX/RX2 TX/RX1 TX/RX2 Signal TX/RX TX/RX TX/RX TX/RX TX/RX TX/RX Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:DX2 CellB:DX1 CellB:DX2 CellC:DX1 CellC:DX2 1x2 CDU-G From the conguration in the gure above, the following congurations can be derived:
2x2 CDU-G 1x4 CDU-G 2x4 CDU-G 110 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Product Data Cell A DX1 TX1 DX2 TX2 Figure 56 Conguration scheme, 1x8 CDU-G Table 69 1x8 CDU-G Cell A CDU 1 2 Connection TX/RX1 TX/RX2 TX/RX1 TX/RX2 Signal TX/RX TX TX/RX TX Cell A P008225A Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:TX1 CellA:DX2 Cell:ATX2 DX1 TX1 TX2 TX3 DX2 TX4 Figure 57 Conguration scheme, 1x12 CDU-G P008226A EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 111 (421) Product Data Table 70 1x12 CDU-G Cell A CDU 1 2 3 Connection TX/RX1 TX/RX2 TX/RX1 TX/RX2 TX/RX1 TX/RX2 Signal TX/RX TX TX TX TX/RX TX Cell A Cell B Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:TX1 CellA:TX2 CellA:TX3 CellA:DX2 CellA:TX4 DX1 DX2 TX1 TX2 DX1 DX2 Figure 58 Table 71 2x6 CDU-G Cell A CDU 1 B 2 3 Connection TX/RX1 TX/RX2 TX/RX1 TX/RX2 TX/RX1 TX/RX2 Signal TX/RX TX/RX TX TX TX/RX TX/RX P008224A Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:DX2 CellA:TX1 CellA:TX2 CellA:DX1 CellA:DX2 112 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 GSM 900/1800 CDU-G, congurations with TMA Product Data Cell A TMA TMA TMA Cell B Cell C TMA TMA TMA DX1 DX1 DX2 DX2 DX1 DX2 P008261A Figure 59 Conguration scheme, 3x2 CDU-G and 3x4 CDU-G Table 72 3x2 CDU-G and 3x4 CDU-G Cell A B C CDU 1 2 3 Connection TX/RX1 TX/RX2 TX/RX1 TX/RX2 TX/RX1 TX/RX2 Signal TX/RX TX/RX TX/RX TX/RX TX/RX TX/RX Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:DX2 CellB:DX1 CellB:DX2 CellC:DX1 CellC:DX2 1x2 CDU-G From the conguration above, the following congurations can be derived:
2x2 CDU-G 1x4 CDU-G 2x4 CDU-G EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 113 (421) Product Data Cell A TMA TMA DX1 TX1 DX2 TX2 Figure 60 Conguration scheme, 1x8 CDU-G with TMA Table 73 1x8 CDU-G Cell A CDU 1 2 Connection TX/RX1 TX/RX2 TX/RX1 TX/RX2 Signal TX/RX TX TX/RX TX Cell A P008233A Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:TX1 CellA:DX2 Cell:ATX2 TMA TMA DX1 TX1 TX2 TX3 DX2 TX4 Figure 61 Conguration scheme, 1x12 CDU-G P008262A 114 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Product Data Table 74 1x12 CDU-G Cell A CDU 1 2 3 Connection TX/RX1 TX/RX2 TX/RX1 TX/RX2 TX/RX1 TX/RX2 Signal TX/RX TX TX TX TX/RX TX Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:TX1 CellA:TX2 CellA:TX3 CellA:DX2 CellA:TX4 Cell A Cell B TMA TMA TMA TMA DX1 DX2 TX1 TX2 DX1 DX2 Figure 62 Conguration scheme, 2x6 CDU-G Table 75 2x6 CDU-G Cell A CDU 1 B 2 3 Connection TX/RX1 TX/RX2 TX/RX1 TX/RX2 TX/RX1 TX/RX2 Signal TX/RX TX/RX TX TX TX/RX TX/RX P008263A Labelling CellA:DX1 CellA:DX2 CellA:TX1 CellA:TX2 CellA:DX1 CellA:DX2 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 115 (421) Product Data This page is intentionally left blank 116 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 6 6.1 Unit Description, DXU-21 Unit Description, DXU-21 This chapter describes DXU-21. The DXU is a CPU, which acts as an interface between the transmission network and the transceivers. It also extracts timing information from the PCM link and generates a timing reference for the RBS. The DXU also performs supervisory tasks. The DXU-21 transmission interface has long haul capability and can be run on both 1.544 Mbit/s (T1) and 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) PCM links. System Environment The DXU-21 is designed to work in RBS 2000 Macro radio base stations. This block diagram shows DXU-21 in the RBS 2206 system environment. OXU CDU CDU CDU CXU IOM-
bus d T R U d T R U d T R U d T R U d T R U d T R U DXU Y-links Cabinet ID Cabinet LEDs Option BFU PSU FAN EPC-
bus External alarms ESB OMT GPS EOM Transmission lines Figure 63 DXU-21 environment P007455C EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 117 (421) Unit Description, DXU-21 6.2 Block Diagram 13 MHz test Part of timing system OVCXO+DAC Compact Flash Card Interface CPU System MMI Ext. Sync. Source (GPS) Ext. Sync. Source (ESB) Ext. O&M (EOM) O&M Terminal (OMT) EPC bus Transm. lines G.703-A G.703-B G.703-C G.703-D Transm. Interface Controller Communication switch system Ylinks (12 pcs) DXU OPT-inputs OPT-outputs External alarms Vcc for backplane memory IOM-bus Cabinet LEDs Rack/Shelf/unit pos Ext. Ref source Timing bus Local bus Local bus Power supply
+24 V P007457C CPU system Communication switch system Figure 64 DXU-21, block diagram Electrically, the DXU-21 consists of the following main blocks:
Transmission interface controller Timing system Power supply Miscellaneous logic 118 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Compact Flash Card Unit Description, DXU-21 I2C controller Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s (full-duplex) controller, MAC CPU System The heart of the DXU-21 is a 32bit embedded controller with a PPC 405 processor core with interfaces to a wide range of peripherals. The CPU system consists of:
SDRAM memory FLASH memory ASIC GARP Compact Flash Card Communication Switch System This system block contains circuits that handle trafc between the BSC and the TRUs. Transmission Interface Controller This part contains circuits for four transmission links and the transmission interface controller, which controls the trafc for all four transmission links. The bit rate is SW controlled. Two speeds are available: E1
(2.048 Mbit/s) or T1 (1.544 Mbit/s). Power Supply The power supply delivers all the voltages necessary for the DXU-21. The input voltage +24 V DC is supplied through the backplane connectors. Timing System The timing system is used for generating a 13 MHz clock signal. Miscellaneous Logic This function contains the following:
System voltage measurement Temperature measurement Power on reset Compact Flash Card The removable Compact Flash Card permits quick and easy change of the SW and IDB in the DXU. 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 119 (421) Unit Description, DXU-21 6.3 Functions The DXU serves as the Central Main CPU node and its main functions are:
Provides the RBS with an interface to the transport network through four xed E1/T1 transmission ports. Handles incoming trafc, controls and supervises information and sends it to its destination within the RBS. Provides frequency reference signals and clock signals for circuits within the RBS. Stores and executes RBS SW. SW is stored on a removable ash card. Controls the climate and power system. 6.4 External Interfaces Compact Flash Card View of backplane OMT ESB GPS EOM V7-12 DXU reset Fault Operational Local RSB Fault Ext Alarms EPCbus fault EOMbus fault Local Remote Test EPC V 1-6 Port B Port A Port D Port C Status Port A Port B Status Port C Port D Power supply External alarm Local bus Timing bus P007456C Figure 65 DXU-21, front panel and backplane G.703 Interface The four G.703 interfaces are connected to the BSC (Protocol GSM-
Abis) or to cascaded base stations. In cascade mode, this interface can control an external bypass relay. Unused time slots can be through-
connected to a succeeding base station. The communication speed in E1 interfaces is 2 Mbit/s and in T1, 1.5 Mbit/s. 120 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Unit Description, DXU-21 The DXU is tested for Electro Magnetic Compability (EMC) and complies with the following standards:
Fast transient test: EN 301 489-1, 0.5 kV Surge test: ITU-T K.45 Test no. 2.1.1.a (CM), basic level: 1.5 kV Test no. 2.1.1.b (DM), basic level: 1.5 kV An EMC environment exceeding the above values requires additional overvoltage protection of the G.703 interface. External Alarm Inputs Through this interface it is possible to connect up to 16 binary alarms. This interface is found in the upper backplane connector. The equipment connected to the terminals should be insulated relay contacts. A closed contact (logic zero) is required to be below 2 kOhm, and an open contact (logic one) is required to be above 100 kOhm. The current through a closed 0 contact is 1.2 mA. The alarm contacts connected to the external alarm inputs should be insulated and have a current range above 1.2 mA. The voltage between terminals with an open contact is 24 V DC. Local Bus The local bus is a time slot and multidrop bus, where the DXU-21 is the master of the bus. In this DXU, two identical local buses are implemented, with common frame synchronization and clock signals. The interface is accessed through the lower backplane connector. The local bus is used for TRUs and sTRUs. Timing Bus This interface is used for distribution of timing information to the TRUs through the backplane. The interface is accessed through the lower backplane connector. The timing bus is only used for TRUs. External Sync. 0 (Freq. Ref.) This interface is used for connecting an external frequency reference. It uses a generic synchronization port for the synchronization information. Optional Output This interface enables control of up to eight devices, which can be of various types. These outputs are accessed through the upper backplane connector. Optional Input This interface enables connection of up to eight internal cabinet signals, such as alarms. These inputs are accessed through the upper backplane connector. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 121 (421) Unit Description, DXU-21 IOM-Bus This interface consists of three individual I2C ports. It is accessed through the lower backplane connector and is used to communicate with the CDU, CXU and cabinet ID. An I2C bus is reserved for reading a memory device which identies the source for the system. The interface is accessed through the lower backplane connector. Y-Links This interface is used for communication with the dTRUs and sTRUs. The Y-interface consists of 12 separate Y-links. The Y-links are accessed through connectors located on the front of the DXU. EPC-Bus (Optical Cable) This interface is used for communication with the power supply equipment in the RBS, such as PSUs and BFU. The optical communication interface is accessible through connectors located on the front of the DXU. The connectors are marked "EPC". The EPC-bus is not used in RBS 2101/2102/2202. External Sync. 1 (GPS/LMU) This interface is used for interfacing an external sync./frequency source, such as GPS. It is accessed through a connector of type 8-pin RJ-45, located on the front of the DXU. The connector is marked "GPS". GPS/LMU This interface is identical to the serial line used in the interface
"External sync. 1". It is possible to use this interface from the backplane together with the interface "External sync. 0", as an alternative to the GPS interface. This interface is accessed through the lower backplane connector. External O&M (EOM) The EOM bus is designed as a standard Ethernet port and is intended for a site-LAN to communicate with other units on the site. Both half-
duplex and full-duplex operation at 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps operation are supported. The EOM bus is accessed through a connector located on the front of the DXU marked "EOM". The connector is of type 8pin RJ-45. OMT The OMT interface is used for maintenance and supervision purposes. This interface is accessed on the front of the DXU through a 9pin female D-sub connector marked "OMT". 122 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Unit Description, DXU-21 ESB This interface is used to synchronize several transceiver groups in the same cell, for example when one cell is built up by more than one RBS, or one cell is split between two RBSs. Note that a master-slave conguration, as in RBS 2202, is regarded as one transceiver group. The interface is accessed on the front of the DXU through a D-sub 9pin male connector marked "ESB". 6.4.1 OMT The OMT port is used to communicate with the Operation and Maintenance Terminal. Connectors The OMT is connected through a 9pin D-sub female connector. Electrical The OMT connection is galvanically separated. All signals use RS 232 levels. Table 76 The OMT pins and their functions Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Function DCD, looped from DTR (pin 4) RXD, data out of DXU TXD, data into DXU DTR, looped to DCD (pin 1) and DSR (pin 6) Signal ground DSR, looped from DTR (pin 4) RTS, looped to CTS (pin 8) CTS, looped from RTS (pin 7) RI not connected Note:
The connector is congured as a DCE, and thus should be connected to an IBM PC style DTE (such as a computer) with a straight cable. 6.4.2 Test Interface This interface is used for test purposes only. It consists of a buffered version of the 13 MHz signal from the OVCXO. The signal is sinusoidal shaped and is suited for a coaxial cable load of 50
. Connectors The test interface has an SMB connector. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 123 (421) Unit Description, DXU-21 6.4.3 Indicators and Buttons There are 11 indicators located on the front panel (as shown in the table below) and two buttons for DXU Reset and Local/remote. For further information on indicators, see chapter Operation and Maintenance Support. Table 77 Indicators Indicator Fault Operational Colour Red Green Transmission OK (port A, B, C, D) Green (4 pcs) Local RBS fault External alarm EPC bus fault EOM bus fault Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow 6.5 Dimensions and Weight Table 78 DXU21 dimensions and weight Height Width Depth Weight Max. Power Consumption Max. Heat Generation 227 mm (6 HE x 44.45 mm) 71 mm (14 TE x 5.08 mm) 240 mm 2.4 kg 40 W (typical 30 W) 40 W 124 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 7 Unit Description, dTRU Unit Description, dTRU The dTRU (double Transceiver Unit) is a 2-TRX replaceable unit. A TRX is a transmitter/receiver and signal processing unit which transmits and receives one carrier. There are different versions of dTRU depending on the frequency band and modulation method, that is only GMSK or EDGE. The dTRU has two transmit antenna terminals and four receive antenna terminals. The dTRU features a built-in hybrid combiner. The hybrid combiner can be used to combine the two transmit antenna terminals to one common terminal. Two of the receive antenna terminals are used for 2branch diversity reception. The dTRU is hardware prepared for 4branch diversity reception via the remaining two antenna terminals. 7.1 Block Diagram CPU system RC system Radio system DSP system Y-link TX ctrl TX data Radio trans-
mitter RX ctrl RX data B RX data A B Radio receiver A TX1 RX1 RX2 HC1 CDU-TX ctrl bus Hybrid comb TX1+TX2 Y-link DSP system RC system HC2 RX3 RX4 TX2 RX ctrl RX data B RX data A B A Radio receiver TX ctrl TX data Radio trans-
mitter Radio System Block diagram dTRU Figure 66 The TRU consists of the following main blocks:
P007395A EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 125 (421) Unit Description, dTRU CPU-system DSP-system RC-system Radio system CPU System The CPU system is a control unit in the RBS. Basically it consists of a CPU, support logic, memory and logic for handling the interfaces. DSP System The DSP system performs all baseband signal processing necessary for one TRX. For downlink, this includes Terrestrial Protocol Handling
(TPH), encoding, ciphering and burst generation. For uplink it includes equalization, combining, decoding and TPH. RC System The Radio Control system is responsible for synchronizing and controlling the different parts of the radio, for modulation and D/A conversion of the data to transmit, for ltering the received radio signal with a channel selective lter and for compensating the receiver and transmitter delays and gain variations. The Radio Control system is seen by the rest of the RBS as the front end to the radio which can be asked to transmit a burst of data using a selected modulation, or asked to receive a burst using a selected digital lter. All the time critical radio control functions are performed by the Radio Control system and no computing support is required from the CPU system on a real time basis. Radio System Each Radio system contains two radio receivers and one radio transmitter including power ampliers. The radio receiver receives RF modulated uplink data from one or two diversity branches and sends it to the Radio Control system. The radio transmitter generates the RF downlink signal from the modulated baseband signal. It then sends the RF signal to the power amplier which amplies the downlink RF signals. Functions The dTRU serves as a distributed main CPU DMCN and its main functions are:
Transmitting and receiving radio frequency signals GMSK or 8-PSK modulation Signal processing 7.2 126 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Unit Description, dTRU 7.3 External Interfaces dTRU View of backplane Y-link/-TX control bus Power connector P007454A dTRU, front panel and backplane CDU-TX control bus, IOM bus Figure 67 The dTRU has the following external interfaces:
IOM bus, LEDs and buttons interface RX (front) TX (front) Y-link 7.3.1 Indicators and Buttons On the front panel there are ve indicators (see the following table) and two buttons, one for TRU Reset, and the other for Local/remote mode change. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 127 (421) Unit Description, dTRU Table 79 Indicators Indicator Fault Operational RF off Local mode Colour Red Green Yellow Yellow 7.3.2 7.4 The Backplane The Y-link, CDU-TX control bus, system voltage and connectors are located on the backplane. See Figure 67 on page 127. Technical Data Table 80 dTRU technical data Height Width Depth Weight Max. power consumption Max. heat generation 400 mm (9 HE x 44.45 mm) 71 mm (14 TE x 5.08 mm) 270 mm 8 kg 485 W TBD 128 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 8 8.1 Unit Decription, CDU-G and CDU-F Unit Decription, CDU-G and CDU-F This chapter describes the CDU-F and CDU-G for RBS 2206. The Combining and Distribution Unit (CDU) is the interface between Transceivers (TRUs) and the antenna system. The CDU enables several TRUs to share antennas. A range of CDU types have been developed to support different congurations. Information about which congurations can be built with the various types of CDU is contained in chapter Radio Congurations, RBS 2206. The CDUs can handle GMSK and EDGE. CDU Types A range of CDU types is available. The choice depends on present and future capacity requirements. These factors are considered when selecting CDU type: initial cost, capacity requirements (present and future), number of antennas and frequency hopping capability. CDU-G handles one or two dTRUs. Connected to one dTRU, it provides a low capacity, high output power conguration. Connected to two dTRUs, it provides a high capacity, low output power conguration. CDU-G supports both synthesiser and baseband frequency hopping. CDU-F handles one to six dTRUs. CDU-F is a high capacity, medium output power conguration that only supports baseband frequency hopping. 8.1.1 CDU-G CDU-G 900 Fault Oper. RX1 RX2 CDU bus CDU bus DC in TX1 TX2 Figure 68 CDU-G EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved P007448A 129 (421) Unit Decription, CDU-G and CDU-F TX Part Description CDU-G consists of two identical TX chains. The TX part contains a lowpass lter and a duplex lter. The lowpass lter secures the required reverse isolation. It also reduces spuriouses from the transmitter on the frequencies higher than the TX band. The duplex lter (DPX) allows using a single antenna for both transmitting and receiving. There is an Measurement Coupler Unit (MCU) between the DPX and antenna connector. The MCU samples forwarded and reected signals and distributes them to the Measurement Receiver (MR) for antenna return loss monitoring. RX Part Description CDU-G consists of two identical RX chains. The RX parts consist of a lter and a low noise amplier (LNA). The receiving lter is included in the duplex lter. Distribution of RX signals is performed in the Conguration Switching Unit (CXU). Block Diagram Tx 1 Rx 1 Rx 2 Tx 2 TXLP DPX MCU Filter unit 1 Filter unit 2 MR TX/RX 1 CDU Bus DC in TXLP DPX MCU TX/RX 2 P007449B Figure 69 Block diagram of CDU-G 130 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 8.1.2 CDU-F Unit Decription, CDU-G and CDU-F CDU-F P007450B CDU-F Figure 70 CDU-F has four lter cavities grouped internally two and two. The two lters form a combiner for two TX signals and can be combined with a CNU to a combiner for four signals, or connected to another CDU to form a combining network for six signals. The combined signals are fed through a lowpass TX lter to a duplex lter. The duplex lter allows the use of a single antenna both for transmitting and receiving. The duplex lter is connected directly to the antenna connector on top of the CDU. The duplex lter also lters the RX signal arriving to the same antenna. This ltered RX signal is amplied in a two-stage low noise amplier and then ltered in a lowpass lter. CDU-F also has an extra RX chain for diversity. This extra RX chain is similar to the duplex RX chain. All necessary connections for the TX combining network are done on the front of the CDU with a Combining Network Unit (CNU). EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 131 (421) Unit Decription, CDU-G and CDU-F 1 n i r 2 n i r P P TX1-1 TX1-2 TX2-1 TX2-2 CNU TX1-1+TX1-2 MCU TXLP TXBP-DPX FC TX2-1+TX2-2 RXBP-DPX RXBP MR CPU n i C D 1 n i r 2 n i r P P s u b U D C LNA i n X T 1 X R 2 X R l y p p u s r e w o P i i n o s v r e p u s Pr1out Pr2out Pr1out Pr2out TX/RX RX DC CXU P007451A Block diagram of CDU-F Figure 71 The tuning of the lter cavities is controlled by a measurement receiver and a CPU unit. A small part of the output and reected power is distributed by the Measurement Coupler Unit (MCU) to four outputs. The signals are then connected to the Measurement Receiver (MR). The MR used for measuring can be the MR in the same CDU-F or the MR in another CDU-F, depending on the conguration. The MR measures the input signal to the lter combiners and also the outgoing signal to the antenna. These two signals are used in the CPU to control the stepper motors, one for each lter cavity. Moving parts in the lter cavity, tune the combiner to the correct frequency. 8.2 CDU Functions Table 81 CDU Functions Function Filter Combiner Hybrid Combiner Frequency Hopping Baseband Hopping Synthesizer Hopping RF Filtering RX preamplier Antenna system supervision and support CDU-G CDU-F No No 1) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes 1) Hybrid combiner is located outside the CDU. 132 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 8.3 Unit Decription, CDU-G and CDU-F Common antenna connector for transmitter and receiver signals Common antenna connector for receiver signals (CDU-F only) Output ports for receiver signals Input ports for transmitter signals External Interfaces CDUs have the following external interfaces:
CDU-Bus System Voltage Output ports for forward power (CDU-F only) Output ports for reected power (CDU-F only) Input ports to MR for forward power (CDU-F only) Input ports to MR for reected power (CDU-F only) 8.3.1 Indicators CDUs have two indicators:
Table 82 CDU indicators Indicator Fault Operational Colour Red Green 8.4 Technical Data Table 83 CDU-F Dimension Height Width Depth Weight CDU-F Max. power consumption Max. heat generation CDU-F 400 mm (9 HE x 44.45 mm) CDU-G 400 mm (9 HE x 44.45 mm) 142 mm (28 TE x 5.08 mm) 239 + 90 mm 1) 15 kg 142 mm (28 TE x 5.08 mm) 239 + 90 mm 1) 15 kg 70 W 70 W 30 W 30 W 1) The upper part protrudes 90 mm. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 133 (421) Unit Decription, CDU-G and CDU-F This page is intentionally left blank 134 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 9 Unit Description, CXU-10 Unit Description, CXU-10 The Conguration Switch Unit (CXU) is a unit that distributes the RX signals from the CDU to the dTRU within the same RBS. The CXU supports both GMSK and 8-PSK. One CXU can support up to three CDUs. To congure the CXU, six switches can be set to connect different CDUs with different dTRUs. A block diagram of the CXU is shown in. The CXU is a dual band product, which means it can be used for both 900 MHz and 1800 MHz. The CXU is positioned between the CDU and the dTRU, intended for 12 TRX cabinets. 9.1 Block Diagram CXU CDU bus Power-
supply RX1_TRU1 RX2_TRU1 RX1_TRU2 RX2_TRU2 RX1_TRU3 RX2_TRU3 RX1_TRU4 RX2_TRU4 RX1_TRU5 RX2_TRU5 RX1_TRU6 RX2_TRU6 RX1_CDU1 RX2_CDU1 RX1_CDU2 RX2_CDU2 RX1_CDU3 RX2_CDU3 P007459A Figure 72 Block diagram of the CXU 9.2 Functions The CXU has six different switches. By setting those switches into different positions, the CXU can be congured to connect radio signals from a specic CDU to a specic receiver input on a dTRU. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 135 (421) Unit Description, CXU-10 The CXU is also connected to a CDU-bus. By sending data through the CDU-Bus, the switches can be set to full one of six supported congurations. Inside the CXU there are also some splitters to distribute the incoming RX-signals to the switches and in some cases directly to an out port. The RF cables between CDU and CXU are supervised in the CXU. The RF cables between CXU and dTRU are supervised in the dTRU. The CDU-bus cable is monitored by the DXU. 9.3 Six inputs for RX signals from the CDU External Interfaces The CXU has the following connectors:
Power supply connector Twelve output ports for RX signals to dTRU CDU-bus connector for alarm and conguration settings The CXU has the following indicators:
Operational green Fault red RXI TRU1 RX2 RXI CDU RX2 RXI TRU2 RX2 RXI TRU3 RX2 RXI CDU2 RX2 RXI TRU4 RX2 RXI TRU5 RX2 RXI CDU3 RX2 RXI TRU6 RX2 CXU-10 900 Oper Fault DC/CD U3 CDU bus P007458A Figure 73 CXU-10, external interfaces 9.4 Technical Data Table 84 Technical data Height Width Depth Weight Max. power consumption 22 mm 482.6 mm 120 mm 1) 2 kg 10 W 1) The CXU protrudes 40 mm in front of the magazine. 136 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 10 10.1 Unit Description, FCU-01 Unit Description, FCU-01 The Fan Control Unit (FCU) controls and supervises the fans in the RBS 2206. It is the MMI for the fans, that is, it has indicators for fan status information. The FCU is connected to the EPC-bus that handles communication for the climate and power function in the RBS. The interface towards the EPC-bus consists of an optical bre interface. The interface towards each fan consists of one variable DC voltage output for the power feed and one alarm input. Functions The FCU receives information on the EPC-bus about the required DC voltage level for each fan. It feeds each fan with the required DC voltage level. If no DC level is received, the DC level for the fans will be equal to the FCU input voltage, minus a maximum voltage drop of 0.7 V. If the normally closed circuit in the fan is opened, the indicator "Fan fault" for that fan is illuminated, and an alarm is sent through the EPC-bus. The FCU compares the DC level for each fan with the required DC level. If these do not match, the indicator "FCU fault" is illuminated, and an alarm is sent through the EPC-bus. If the communication on the bus no longer is dened, the indicator "EPC bus fault" is illuminated, and an alarm is sent through the EPC-bus. 10.2 External Interfaces Figure 74 FCU-01 P008265A EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 137 (421) Unit Description, FCU-01 Power in The FCU has the following external interfaces:
Fan power and alarm (1 4) EPC-bus out EPC-bus in 10.3 Indicator The FCU has seven LED indicators that show the status of the FCU, its communication and fan status. Table 85 Indicator Indicator Fault Operational EPC-bus fault Fan 1 fault Fan 2 fault Fan 3 fault Fan 4 fault 10.4 Electrical Data 10.4.1 Input Data Colour Red Green Yellow Red Red Red Red Table 86 Input data Nominal Input Voltage Input Voltage Range Non-Destructive Voltage Input Power
+24.0 V DC
+19.0 to +29.0 V DC 0.0 to +32.0 V DC 4 x 45 W 10.4.2 Output Data Table 87 Output data Output Voltage Output Current Zero and 9 - 28.3 V DC Min. 1.8 A between 9 - 28.3 V DC 10.4.3 Fan Alarm There is one alarm signal for each fan. The alarm circuit is normally closed. An open circuit indicates that the fan speed is too low. The fan has an open collector interface. 138 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Unit Description, FCU-01 Table 88 No alarm Alarm pos. Upos Alarm neg. Uneg Current Ino_alarm Table 89 Alarm Alarm pos. Upos Alarm neg. Uneg Current Ialarm 5 - 30 V DC
< Upos - 2.4 V DC 5 - 20 mA 5 - 30 V DC
< 2 V DC
< 5 mA 10.4.4 Dimensions and Weight Table 90 FCU-01 dimensions and weight Height Width Depth Weight 195 mm 98 mm 45 mm 0.5 kg EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 139 (421) Unit Description, FCU-01 This page is intentionally left blank 140 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 11 11.1 Unit Description, DC-Filter 01 Unit Description, DC-Filter 01 The DC-lter is the interface for +24 V DC supply to the cabinet. It distributes +24 V DC to the Internal Distribution Module (IDM). Functions The DC-lter has the following functions:
EMC lter Capacity for incoming power cables between 70 150 mm2 Protection for incoming cables from pulling forces Power connection for internal distribution 11.2 External Interfaces P008243A Figure 75 DC-lter The DC-lter has the following external interfaces:
Two input terminals for 70 150 mm2 Pull-relief clamps for incoming power cables with diameter 14 26 mm Two output cables with area 70 mm2 11.3 Input Data Table 91 Input data Input Voltage Nominal +24 V DC Range 20.0 - 29.0 V DC Non-Destructive Range Max. Input Current 0.0 - +32.0 V DC 183 A EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 141 (421) Unit Description, DC-Filter 01 11.4 Dimensions and Weight Table 92 FCU-lter-01 dimensions and weight Height Width Depth Weight 293.5 mm 164 mm 70 mm 6 kg (incl. cables) 142 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Unit Description, PSU 1200 W 12 12.1 Unit Description, PSU 1200 W This chapter describes the Power Supply Unit (PSU) which is available in two versions: PSU AC and PSU DC. The PSUs constantly regulate and deliver 1200 W off power over the whole output range from 22 to 29 V DC. PSU AC The PSU recties the incoming AC power to the regulated DC voltage required. 12.1.1 Block Diagram AC Mains t u p n I r e t l i F t t u p u O r e t l i F Bridge Boost DC/DC Control and Supervision Indi-
cators Opto Interface Control Alarm DC Output P007804A Bridge PSU AC block diagram Input lter (EMC lter) Figure 76 The PSU AC consists of the following main units:
Output lter (EMC lter) Control and supervision circuits DC/DC converter Boost converter Input Filter The incoming sine voltage rst passes through an internal fuse and then the input lter, where it is ltered to prevent unwanted signals from being radiated from the PSU. Bridge The bridge recties the incoming AC. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 143 (421) Unit Description, PSU 1200 W Boost Converter Draws a sinusoidal input current in phase with the input voltage, enabling the power supply to have a high power factor and low distribution on input current. The output from the boost converter is 400 V DC. DC/DC Converter A phase-shifted, soft-switched, full-bridge converter that converts the incoming 400 V DC to 24 V DC output voltage. The output provides constant power regulation, rather than the more common current limited, and delivers 1200 W over the whole output range from 22 to 29 V DC. Control and Supervision Circuits The control and supervision circuits support:
load sharing between parallel units remote on/off alarms The output voltage can be adjusted between 22 to 29 V DC. The control and supervision is achieved through an optical signal interface connector on the front of the PSU. Output Filter The output voltage is ltered to prevent unwanted signals from being radiated from the PSU. 12.1.2 Communication Functions The PSU AC has the following functions:
Voltage adjustment Handling alarms Power limitation Communication The PSU communicates with its superior unit (DXU) through an optical interface. The PSU is controlled and supervised through this interface. In the event of communication failure, the PSU continues working with default values. Alarms The following alarms are detected in the rectier and are then forwarded to the DXU and an indicator is illuminated on the PSU front:
Rectier failure 144 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Unit Description, PSU 1200 W Input mains fault Input undervoltage Input overvoltage Output overvoltage hardware alarm Output overvoltage software alarm High internal temperature Power limit Short circuit/overload for more than one minute Voltage Adjustment The desired value of the output voltage of the rectier is set by the ECU function in the DXU. The PSU has a default value of 27.2 V. The DXU adjusts the individual PSU voltage to maintain the required system voltage. Load sharing is achieved by the DXU function when using more than one PSU, load sharing of parallel PSUs is achieved by adjusting the individual voltages to each PSU in the system. Output voltage from the PSU is adjusted to between 26.2 V and 28.5 V depending on battery temperature. Power Limitation When the temperature exceeds the permissable value, the PSU reduces power and an alarm is sent to the DXU. Output power increases when the temperature drops, and the alarm is reset. When the output power of the rectier reaches 1200 W, the rectier limits its power by reducing its output voltage to maintain a constant output power. The output current increases to a maximum of 60 A even in the event of short circuits. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 145 (421) Unit Description, PSU 1200 W 12.1.3 External Interfaces PSU-AC OUTPUT
+27.2 VDC 1200 W Fault Operational EPC-bus TD RD INPUT 120-250 VAC 50/60 Hz 12A P007124A PSU AC Figure 77 The PSU has the following external interfaces, all located on the front:
input 120 250 V AC output +27.2 V DC EPC Bus (Opto) Note:
The PSU has no backplane connections. 12.1.4 Indicators There are three indicators located on the front panel:
146 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Unit Description, PSU 1200 W Table 93 Indicator Fault Operational EPC bus fault Colour Red Green Yellow 12.1.5 Input Data Table 94 Input data Nominal input voltage Permitted variation input voltage Frequency Current 120 to 250 V AC 108 1) to 275 V AC 45-65 Hz
< 8A (at 180 - 275 V AC)
<12 A (at 108 - 140 V AC) Inrush current Internal fuse Efciency Power factor Non-destructive voltage Pulses < 20 ms Max. power consumption Max. heat generation
< 30 A peak 15 A (slow)
> 83%
cos > 0.95 0 - 300 V AC 300 V AC 1446 V A 246 W 1) 90 V AC with reduced output power. 12.1.6 Output Data Table 95 Output data Nominal output voltage Preset output voltage Voltage range Ouput power (108 - 275 V) Output power (90 - 108 V) Output current at 27.2 V DC
+24 V DC
+27.2 0.1 V DC
+22 to +29 V DC 1200 W 1000 W 36.8 A at 90 - 108 V AC 44.1 A at 108 - 275 V AC 12.1.7 Dimensions and Weight Table 96 PSU Dimensions and weight Height Width Depth Weight 262 mm 61 mm 225 mm 3.3 kg EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 147 (421) Unit Description, PSU 1200 W 12.2 PSU DC The PSU DC converts incoming voltage ranging from -39 V to
-72 V DC to the regulated DC voltage that is required. 12.2.1 Block Diagram DC Input t u p n I r e t l i F DC/DC t t u p u O r e t l i F DC Output Control and Supervision Indi-
cators Opto Interface Control Alarm P007805A PSU DC block diagram Input lter (EMC lter) Figure 78 The PSU DC consists of the following main units:
Output lter (EMC lter) Control and supervision circuits DC/DC Converter Input Filter The incoming voltage rst passes through the input lter, where it is ltered to prevent unwanted signals from being radiated from the PSU. DC/DC Converter A phase-shifted, full-bridge converter that converts the DC into a square wave, which is then fed into the primary side of the transformer. The converter limits the current in case of overload. In the transformer, the voltage is converted to a 24 V AC square wave, and this wave is rectied to DC through a diode rectier. The output provides constant power regulation, rather than the more common current limited, and delivers 1200 W over the whole output voltage range from 22 to 29 V. Output Filter Filters the output voltage is to prevent unwanted signals from being radiated from the PSU. 148 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Unit Description, PSU 1200 W Control and Supervision Circuits The control and supervision circuits support:
load sharing between parallel units remote on/off alarms The output voltage can be adjusted between 22 V to 29 V DC. The control and supervision is achieved through an optical signal interface connector on the front of the PSU. 12.2.2 Communication Functions The PSU DC has the following functions:
Voltage adjustment Handling Alarms Power Limitation Communication The PSU communicates with its superior unit (DXU) through an optical interface. The PSU is controlled and supervised through this interface. In the event of communication failure, the PSU continues working with default values. Input fault Converter failure Input undervoltage Alarms The following alarms are detected in the converter and are then forwarded to the DXU, and an indicator is illuminated on the PSU front:
Output overvoltage hardware alarm Output overvoltage software alarm Short circuit/overload for more than one minute High internal temperature Input overvoltage Power limit Voltage Adjustment The desired value of the output voltage of the rectier is set by the ECU function in the DXU. The PSU has a default value of 27.2 V. The DXU adjusts the individual PSU voltage to maintain the required system voltage. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 149 (421) Unit Description, PSU 1200 W Load sharing is achieved by the DXU function when using more than one PSU, load sharing of parallel PSUs is achieved by adjusting the individual voltages to each PSU in the system. Output voltage from the PSU is adjusted to between 26.2 V and 28.5 V depending on battery temperature. Power Limitation When the temperature exceeds the permissable value, the PSU reduces the power and an alarm is sent to the DXU. Output power increases when the temperature drops, and the alarm is reset. When the output power of the converter reaches 1200 W, the converter limits its power by reducing its output voltage in order to maintain a constant output power. The output current increases to a maximum of 60 A even in the event of short circuits. 12.2.3 External Interfaces PSU-DC OUTPUT
+27.2 VDC 1200 W Fault Operational EPC-bus TD RD INPUT 120-250 VAC 50/60 Hz 12A PSU DC Figure 79 The PSU has the following external interfaces, all located on the front:
P007807A 150 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Unit Description, PSU 1200 W input -48/-60 V DC output +27.2 V DC EPC Bus (Opto) Note:
The PSU has no backplane connections. 12.2.4 Indicators There are three indicators located on the front panel:
Table 97 Indicator Fault Operational EPC bus fault Colour Red Green Yellow 12.2.5 Input Data Table 98 Input data Nominal input voltage Permitted variation input voltage Input Current Inrush current Efciency Non-destructive voltage Max. power consumption Max. heat generation
(-48) - (-60) V DC
(-39) - (-72) V DC
< 36 A
< 200 A
> 85%
0 - (-75) V DC 1411 W 211 W 12.2.6 Output Data Table 99 Output data Nominal output voltage Factory set value Voltage range Output power Output current at 27.2 Output current at short circuit
+24 V DC
+27.2 0.1 V DC 22.0 - 29.0 V DC 1200 W 44.1 A
< 60 A EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 151 (421) Unit Description, PSU 1200 W 12.2.7 Dimensions and Weight Table 100 DC-DC Converter dimensions and weight Height Width Depth Weight 262 mm 61 mm 225 mm 3.1 kg 152 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 13 13.1 13.1.1 Unit Description, ACCU/DCCU Unit Description, ACCU/DCCU This chapter describes the AC Connection Unit (ACCU) and the DC Connection Unit (DCCU). They distribute primary power to the PSUs. There is only one ACCU or DCCU in the cabinet, depending on the type of incoming power. ACCU The ACCU consists of a box with:
Four cables to the PSUs One EMC lter Terminal block for incoming AC cables Eight-pole main switch (disconnecting device) Functions The ACCU has the following functions:
Disconnecting incoming AC mains EMC ltering Termination of incoming AC mains cables 13.1.2 External Interfaces ACCU ACCU Figure 80 The ACCU has the following interfaces:
P006805A EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 153 (421) Unit Description, ACCU/DCCU Terminal block for incoming AC mains cables Four outgoing cables to the PSUs Input Data Table 101 Frequency Voltage External fuses Cable diameter Conductor area Number of conductors 45 - 65 Hz 90 - 275 V AC 4 pcs, max. 16 A 8.5 - 12.5 mm 1.5 - 2.5 mm2 3 (L, N, PE) Output Data Four cables with connectors according to IEC 320 and matching the PSU AC inlet. Table 102 Conductor area Number of conductors 13.1.3 Dimensions and Weight Table 103 Height Width Depth Weight 1.5 mm2 3 (L, N, PE) 293.5 mm 141 mm 60 mm 5 kg 13.2 13.2.1 DCCU The DCCU consists of a box with:
A feed-through capacitor lter Four cables to the PSUs Terminal block with incoming DC cables Eight-pole main switch (disconnecting device) Functions The DCCU has the following functions:
Disconnecting incoming DC supply EMC ltering Termination of incoming DC supply cables 154 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 13.2.2 External Interfaces Unit Description, ACCU/DCCU DCCU P007833A Figure 81 DCCU The DCCU has the following interfaces:
Four outgoing cables to the PSUs Terminal block for four incoming DC supply cables Input Data Table 104 Input data Voltage External fuses Cable diameter Conductor area Number of conductors
- (40 - 72) V DC 4 pcs, max. 40 A 4.5 - 7 mm 6 - 10 mm2 2 Output Data Four cables with connectors matching the PSU DC inlet. Table 105 Conductor area Number of conductors 6 mm2 2 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 155 (421) Unit Description, ACCU/DCCU 13.2.3 Dimensions and Weight Table 106 Height Width Depth Weight 293.5 mm 141 mm 60 mm 5 kg 156 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 14 14.1 Unit Description, IDM Unit Description, IDM This chapter describes the internal Distribution Module that distributes
+24 V DC to all DC powered units in the RBS. Distribution circuits are protected by circuit breakers. The IDM consists of a unit with 21 circuit breakers, four PSU cables and connectors to the different DC powered units. Functions The IDM has the following functions:
Distributes power to all DC powered units. Provides fused power distribution to the DC powered units. Provides a manual connect or disconnect function of all DC powered units. Monitors the system voltage (+24 V DC). 14.2 External Interfaces IDM-01 DC out 15A Climate 30A Fan 1 5A Fan 2 5A Fan 3 5A Fan4 5A TRU 1 30A TRU 2 30A CDU 1 5A TRU 3 30A TRU 4 30A CDU 2 5A TRU 5 30A TRU 6 30A CDU 3 5A CXU 1-2 DXU 5 5A DXU/Sys. Volt.Sens. 5A OXU 1 5A OXU 2 5A OXU 3 5A OXU 4 5A Operation System voltage test port P007891B The IDM Four PSU cables Battery connection (positive) Figure 82 The IDM has the following external interfaces:
ESD wrist-strap connector System voltage test port Power distribution connectors (see table below) Battery connection (negative) and earth connection EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 157 (421) Unit Description, IDM Table 107 Connector P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 Function DC out Climate unit Fan 1 - 4 TRU 1 TRU 2 CDU 1 TRU 3 TRU 4 CDU 2 TRU 5 TRU 6 CDU 3 CXU 1 CXU 2 OXU 5 DXU/System voltage sensor/OXU 1 - 4 Test connector Indicator 14.3 14.4 14.5 158 (421) Indicators and Buttons Located on the front panel are one green indicator and 21 circuit breakers. The function of the circuit breakers can be read on the front panel. Table 108 Indicators and buttons Indicator Operational Input Data Table 109 Input data Input voltage Non-destructive range Input power Colour Green Nominal 24 V DC Range +20.0 - 29.0 V DC 0.0 - +32.0 V DC 4800 W Output Data Maximum voltage drop from the input to the output of the IDM is 0.3 V DC. Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Unit Description, IDM Qty 1 4 4 1 3 1 6 1 Table 110 Circuit breaker capacity Circuit Breaker CXU 1 - 2, OXU 5 Capacity 5A Fan 1 - 4 OXU 1 - 4 DXU CDU 1 - 3 DC out TRU 1 - 6 Climate unit 14.6 Dimensions and Weight Table 111 Dimensions and weight Height Width Depth Weight 5A 5A 5A 5A 15A 30A 30A 133 mm 483 mm 80 mm 5 kg EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 159 (421) Unit Description, IDM This page is intentionally left blank 160 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 15 15.1 Broadcast Broadcast
"Broadcast" denotes the RBS resources used for transmission of Synchronisation Information and System Information. The RBS supports:
Broadcast of Synchronisation Information on SCH and FCCH Broadcast of System Information 1, 2, 2bis, 2ter, 3, 4 and 13 on BCCH Broadcast of System Information 5, 5bis, 5ter and 6 on SACCH
(SACCH Filling) Broadcast of System Information 7, 8, 13, 16 and 17 on BCCH Extended Short message service cell broadcast is covered within the context of Short Message Service. References
/GSM:04.06/
/GSM:04.08/
/GSM:05.02/
/GSM:05.03/
/GSM:05.10/
/GSM:08.58/
Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. 15.2 Concepts BCCH Extended Paging, Immediate Assign and System Information 7, 8, 13, 16 and 17 may share the same TDMA frame mapping, see /
GSM:05.02:6.5.1/ and /GSM:05.02:7:
table 2 of 7/
15.3 15.3.1 Functions Broadcast of Synchronisation Information Synchronisation bursts are transmitted on SCH and Frequency Correction bursts are transmitted on FCCH. The bursts are transmitted regularly, allowing attaching mobiles to synchronise on the TDMA structure and on the timing of the cell. Supported logical channels /GSM:05.02:3.3.2/:
FCCH Frequency Correction Channel SCH Supported channel combinations /GSM:05.02:6.4/:
Synchronisation Channel EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 161 (421) Broadcast 15.3.2 15.3.3
(iv) FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH
(v) FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH+SDCCH/4(0..3)+SACCH/
C4(0..3) Transmission on FCCH is in accordance with /GSM:05.02:5.2.4./. Transmission on SCH means transmission of BSIC (Base Station Identity Code) and RFN (Reduced Frame Number) in accordance with /
GSM:05.02:5.2.5./, /GSM:05.03:4.7./ and /GSM:04.08:9.1.30./. The BSIC value is received from the BSC, as a conguration parameter. Reception of BCCH_INFORMATION from BSC By means of the BROADCAST INFORMATION MODIFY procedure /
GSM:08.58:5.5./, the BSC denes new System Information messages 1, 2, 2bis, 2ter, 3, 4, 7, 8, 13, 16 and 17 to be stored and regularly broadcast by the RBS on the BCCH and BCCH Extended channel. The RBS supports:
Interpretation and check of the BCCH_INFORMATION message from BSC Storage and update of System Information 1-4 and 7-8, 13, 16 and 17 System Information is included in the BCCH_INFORMATION message received from the BSC. New System Information received is used in BCCH transmissions when scheduled. Transmission of a specic System Information message can be stopped by a BCCH_INFORMATION message /GSM:08.58:8.5.1/ on order from the BSC. Broadcast of System Information on BCCH The RBS supports scheduled transmission of System Information on the BCCH channel /GSM:04.08:3.2.2.1/. Reception of System Information from the BSC is described in the section above. Supported logical channels /GSM:05.02:3.3.2/:
BCCH Supported channel combinations /GSM:05.02:6.4/:
(iv) FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH
(v) FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH+SDCCH/4(0..3)+SACCH/
C4(0..3) Broadcast Control Channel The following tables dene the System Information type used depending on TC (Transaction Capabilities) /GSM:05.02:6.3.1.3/. For TC=0, System Information type 1 is sent. If type 1 is not loaded from the BSC, type 3 is sent. For TC=4, System Information type 13 is sent. If type 13 is not loaded from the BSC, type 3 is sent or, if loaded, System Information 2ter is sent. If both System Information 2ter and 13 are loaded, they are sent every second time. 162 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Broadcast Table 112 Mapping of BCCH data TC No 2bis, no 2ter 2bis, no 2ter No 2bis, 2ter 2bis, 2ter 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 (3) 1 (3) 1 (3) 1 (3) 2 3 4 13 (3) 2 3 4 2 3 4 13 (3) 2bis 3 4 2 3 4 13 (3) 2ter 3 4 2 3 4 2ter, 13 2bis 3 4 Table 113 The BCCH Extended System Information schedule TC 2 3 0 6 7 Type 17 8 13 16 7 The BCCH Extended blocks only exist if System Information 7, 8, 13, 16 and 17 are loaded. For BCCH blocks, where no System Information (1-4) is dened, "ll frames" /GSM:04.06:5.4.2.3/ are transmitted. Reception of SACCH_FILLING from BSC By means of the SACCH FILLING INFORMATION MODIFY procedure /GSM:08.58:6.2/, the BSC sends System Information 5, 5bis and 6 to be used on all SACCHs handled by a TRX (tranceiver). The RBS supports:
Interpretation and check of the SACCH_FILLING message from BSC Storage and update of System Information 5, 5bis and 6 System Information is included in the SACCH_FILLING used for all SACCHs in one TRX. New System Information received is used in SACCH transmissions when scheduled. Transmission of a specic System Information message can be stopped by a SACCH_FILLING message /GSM:08.58:8.5.1/ on order from the BSC. 15.3.4 15.3.5 Broadcast of System Information on SACCH The RBS supports scheduled transmission of System Information on the SACCH channel /GSM:04.08:3.2.2.1/. Reception of System Information from the BSC for all channel groups within a TRX is described in the section above. Reception of System EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 163 (421) Broadcast Information for one particular channel group is described in chapter
"Call Control", see table of contents. Supported logical channels /GSM:05.02:3.3.4/:
SACCH Supported channel combinations /GSM:05.02:6.4/:
(ii) TCH/H(0,1) + FACCH/H(0,1) + SACCH/TH(0,1)
(i) TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/TF
(v) FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH+SDCCH/4(0..3)+SACCH/
C4(0..3) Slow Associated Control Channel
(vii) SDCCH/8(0..7) + SACCH/C8(0..7) LAPDm frames /GSM:04.06:2.1 (format type B)/ are used for transmission of System Information on SACCH. For SACCH blocks, where no System Information is dened, "ll frames" /GSM:04.06:5.4.2.3/ are transmitted. TRS will change System Information message type for every transmission occasion according to Table 114 on page 164. Even though the System Information types 5 and 6 are not optional, no checks are performed if they are stored (or deleted). If one of the System Information types 5 or 6 (or both) are missing the TRS shall change System Information message type for every transmission occasion according to Table 115 on page 165. Table 114 SACCH System Information schedule Stored System Information Transmission Order 5bis 5ter
5
6
5, 5bis, 5ter, 6... 5, 5bis, 6... 5, 5ter, 6... 5, 5, 6... 164 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Broadcast Table 115 SACCH System Information schedule Stored System Information Transmission Order 5 5bis 5ter 6
5, 5bis, 5ter... 5bis, 5ter, 6... 5, 5bis... 5, 5ter... 5bis, 5ter... 6, 5bis... 6, 5ter... 5,5... 5bis, 5bis... 5ter, 5ter... 6, 6... For SACCH blocks, where no System Information is dened, "ll frames" /GSM:04.06:5.4.2.3/ are transmitted. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 165 (421) Broadcast This page is intentionally left blank 166 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 16 16.1 16.2 16.2.1 Common Control Channel Handling Common Control Channel Handling
"Common Control Channel Handling" denotes the RBS resources utilised for trafc on the Common Control channel. References
/GSM:04.08/
/GSM:08.58/
/GSM:05.02/
/GSM:05.03/
Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. Function Paging By means of the PAGING procedure /GSM:08.58:5.2/, the RBS pages mobiles on command from the BSC. The RBS supports:
Reception, interpretation and check of PAGING_COMMANDs from BSC Queuing of IMSI and TMSI Scheduled transmission of PAGING_REQUEST messages on PCH Retransmission of PAGING_REQUEST messages on PCH EMLPP priority information in the PAGING_REQUEST Channel combinations /GSM:05.02:6.4/ supported:
(iv) FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH
(v) FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH+SDCCH/4(0..3)+SACCH/
C4(0..3) PAGING_COMMAND messages from BSC with the following MS IDENTITY (Id-type) are supported:
IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity TMSI IMSIs and TMSIs are queued for scheduled transmission on PCH. One paging queue is supported for each paging group. The following messages are used for scheduled transmission of IMSI and TMSI is made with:
PAGING_REQUEST_TYPE_2 /GSM:04.08:9.1.23/
PAGING_REQUEST_TYPE_1 /GSM:04.08:9.1.22/
PAGING_REQUEST_TYPE_3 /GSM:04.08:9.1.24/
For dequeuing, priority handling, selection of Page mode, transmission and retransmission, see Section 16.2.4 on page 169. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 167 (421) Common Control Channel Handling 16.2.2 16.2.3 Immediate Assign By means of the IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT procedure /
GSM:08.58:5.7./, the network signals acceptance or rejection of a CHANNEL_REQUEST message from MS. The RBS supports:
Reception, interpretation and check of IMMEDIATE_ASSIGN_COMMAND messages from BSC Queuing of IA (Immediate Assign) and IAR (Immediate Assign Reject) Scheduled transmission of IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT messages on AGCH (Access Grant CHannel) Retransmission of IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT messages on AGCH IAs and IARs are queued for scheduled transmission on the AGCH. The RBS supports one queue for IA messages and one for IAR messages. The following messages are used for scheduled transmission of IA and IAR:
IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_EXTENDED /GSM:04.08:9.1.19/
IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT /GSM:04.08:9.1.18/
IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_REJECT /GSM:04.08:9.1.20/
For dequeuing, priority handling, selection of Page Mode, transmission and retransmission, see Section 16.2.4 on page 169. If two IAs are received in one IMMEDIATE_ASSIGN_COMMAND message from the BSC, they will be queued together and sent after each other. Immediate Assignment Sent By means of IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT SENT procedure the RBS indicates to the BSC, if ordered, when an IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT or IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_EXTENDED is sent on air interface. The RBS supports handling of IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_SENT messages. In case the element "Mobile Identier" is present in the IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_COMMAND from the BSC, the IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_SENT message is sent on Abis as soon as the corresponding IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT or IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_EXTENDED message has been sent on air interface. The following information is included:
Element "Channel Number" indicating the channel on which the IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT or IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_EXTENDED message was transmitted on. Element "Mobile Identier" as received in the IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_COMMAND from the BSC. 168 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 16.2.4 Common Control Channel Handling However, if more than one IA is sent in the same IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_EXTENDED message on air interface, the same number of IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_SENT messages should be sent on Abis. Dequeuing and scheduling CCCH Dequeuing and Transmission Downlink CCCH capacity is used for PAGING as well as for access grant (IMMEDIATE ASSIGN). The RBS supports:
Transmission of system information 7, 8, 13, 16 and 17 Retransmission of messages Selection of Page Mode Packing of messages Dummy paging Handling of Paging is covered in the section Paging above. Handling of Immediate Assign is covered in section Immediate Assign above. Supported Logical Channels /GSM:05.02:3.3.3/:
AGCH Access Grant Channel PCH Paging Channel Dequeuing and Scheduling The RBS dequeues and transmits messages from the CCCH queue system in the following order of priority, where a) has the highest priority:
a) SYSTEM_INFORMATION b) IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT
/GSM:04.08:9.1.18/
/GSM:04.08:9.1.19/
c) IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_REJECT
/GSM:04.08:9.1.20/
d) IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT for Paging Group e) IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_REJECT for Paging Group f) PAGING_REQUEST If no messages are queued for transmission:
IMSIs, TMSIs and IAs stored for retransmission (see section Retransmission of Messages below) are sent at the same priority level as described above. If no messages are stored for retransmission, "Dummy Paging" is used (see section Dummy Paging below). EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 169 (421) Common Control Channel Handling The CCCH queue system is used for system information 7, 8, 13, 16 and 17 for transmisstion on BCCH extended. IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT messages:
The queues are handled in a FIFO (First-In-First-Out) manner when the following messages are composed:
IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_EXTENDED (rst IA) IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_REJECT (rst IAR) IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT PAGING_REQUEST messages:
The queues are handled in a FIFO manner when the rst IMSI or TMSI intended for a PAGING REQUEST message is dequeued. Packing of Messages IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT messages:
If possible, two IAs (queued or stored for retransmission) will be packed into one IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_EXTENDED message. If Extended paging is used, IAs originating from two different paging groups may be packed into the same IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_EXTENDED message. A maximum of four unique IARs can be packed into one IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_REJECT message. If Extended paging is used, IARs originating from different paging groups may be packed into the same IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT_REJECT message. PAGING_REQUEST messages:
As many IMSIs and TMSIs as possible (for a certain paging group) will be packed into one PAGING_REQUEST message (type 1, 2 or 3). If Extended paging is used (see section Selection of Page Mode below), IMSIs and TMSIs originating from two different paging groups may be packed into the same PAGING_REQUEST message. IMSIs and TMSIs stored for retransmission (in the corresponding paging stack) are included in the PAGING_REQUEST message if not enough IMSIs or TMSIs are found in the actual paging queue. Selection of Page Mode The RBS selects the appropriate Page mode value /GSM:04.08:-
10.5.2.26./ for each message. The following Page modes are used:
Extended Paging reorganization Normal The allowed use of extended page mode is congured (as a percentage) on command from the BSC. This is done by means of conguration parameter DRX_DEV_MAX, see section Administration below. 170 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Common Control Channel Handling Page mode extended makes it possible for the RBS to transmit pagings
(IMSIs or TMSIs) or immediate assigns for a certain paging group when the next but one paging group is scheduled /GSM:04.08:3.3.2.1/. The "Page Mode" element (of the PAGING_REQUEST or IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENTs messages), set to extended Paging, is sent as an indication to the MS to be prepared to handle extended Paging as described above. The allowed use of extended page mode is dened (in percentage) by means of conguration parameter DRX_DEV_MAX, see MAX, see section Administration below. On receipt of an IMMEDIATE_ASSIGN_COMMAND* with page mode set to Paging reorganization, RBS uses Page Mode "Paging reorganization" in all of the following air interface messages:-
IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT-IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECTED-IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT EXTENDED-PAGING REQUEST 13, including dummy paging. TRS uses Page Mode "Paging reorganization" until an IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT COMMAND* message is received with page mode set to normal paging or extended paging. The TRS then swaps page mode from "Paging reorganization" to normal operation, which means that normal paging or extended paging is used. If an IMMEDIATE_ASSIGN_COMMAND* is received with page mode set to Same as before the page mode is not changed. Note:
It should be made clear that it is the L3 immediate assign message carried within the IMMEDIATE_ASSIGN_COMMAND that contains the page mode parameter. Retransmission of Messages A copy of a transmitted IMSI, TMSI and IA is stored for retransmission
(IARs are not stored for retransmission). An IMSI or TMSI, or an IA stored for retransmission is discarded, depending on the setting of parameter BS_PA_MFRMS (see section Administration below) as specied below:
BS_PA_MFRMS < = 3 The IMSI/TMSI/IA is discarded if it has not been retransmitted within two schedulings of its paging group BS_PA_MFRMS > 3 The IMSI/TMSI/IA is discarded if it has not been retransmitted within one scheduling of its paging group No message is retransmitted more than once. An IA is discarded if it has not been retransmitted within 80 ms. The BSC may turn the retransmission function on and off by means of conguration parameter CCCH options/CR, see section Administration below. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 171 (421) Common Control Channel Handling Dummy Paging Whenever no PAGING_REQUEST or IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT message is scheduled for transmission in a CCCH block, a Dummy Paging message is used. The message used for Dummy Paging is a PAGING_REQUEST type 1
/GSM:04.08:9.1.22./. Administration The following conguration parameters are used to control the transmission of PAGING_REQUEST messages and IMMEDIATE_ASSIGNMENT messages on downlink CCCH:
Table 116 Conguration parameters Parameter Supported Values Description BS_AG_BLKS_RES 0-1 BS_PA_MFRMS 2-9 CCCH options/CR ON, OFF CCCH options/IPT3 ON, OFF DRX_DEV_MAX 0-100 Number of blocks in each 51 TDMA frame multiframe reserved for AGCH /
GSM:05.02:3.3.2.3/ /GSM:05.02:6.5.1/. Number of 51 TDMA frame multiframes between transmissions of paging messages to mobiles of the same paging group /GSM:05.02:3.3.2.3/ /
GSM:05.02:6.5.1/. Automatic retransmission of pagings and immediate assigns in use (ON), or not in use
(OFF). Paging request type 3 used (OFF) or not used
(ON). 0-100 % allowed use of extended page mode per paging group (for example 50 %, means that Page mode Extended is used every other time it is possible to use it). 16.2.5 Channel Request by MS By means of the CHANNEL REQUEST BY MS procedure /
GSM:08.58:5.1./, the RBS detects channel requests (random accesses) from MSs, and reports these as CHANNEL_REQUIRED messages to BSC. The RBS supports:
Detection of CHANNEL_REQUESTS on RACH Transmission of CHANNEL_REQUIRED messages to BSC The channel request is coded as AB (access bursts) /GSM:05.02:5.2.7./
and /GSM:05.03:4.6./. The RBS observes the TDMA frame number and measures the access delay of the AB arrival. If the rate of CHANNEL_REQUESTs is higher than specied in the section Operational Conditions below, messages may be temporarily stored before transmission to the BSC. Messages not transmitted within 172 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Common Control Channel Handling 50 ms are discarded. Stored messages are transferred in the same order as they arrive from MS. Emergency calls have precedence over temporarily stored messages. Each accepted CHANNEL_REQUEST is reported to BSC as a CHANNEL_REQUIRED message according to /GSM:08.58:8.5.3/. Operational Conditions Paging The number of paging groups supported by the RBS is dependent on the channel combination:
(iv) The use of 16-81 paging groups is supported
(v) The use of 4-27 paging groups is supported The paging queue length varies between 6 and 14 depending on the number of paging queues in use. The length is calculated as:
Length = 14 - (PQMax/10) ; where PQMax = the highest paging group/
queue in use. Immediate Assign Max. number of elements in the IA queue = 10 and in the IAR queue =
10, in the IAPGQ = 3 and in the IRPGQ = 4. CCCH Dequeuing and Transmission A number of stacks are used for message retransmission:
One IA stack, number of elements = 4 Paging stacks (one stack/paging queue), number of elements/stack
= 4 IAPGSs, number of elements = 3 Channel Request by MS The RBS can receive and perform acceptance checks, corresponding to full RACH capacity. The RBS can report accepted channel requests, as CHANNEL_REQUIRED messages, corresponding to 37 % of the requests on full RACH load. 16.3 16.3.1 16.3.2 16.3.3 16.3.4 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 173 (421) Common Control Channel Handling This page is intentionally left blank 174 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 17 17.1 17.2 17.2.1 Physical Channel Handling Physical Channel Handling
"Physical Channel Handling" covers the trafc services provided by the physical layer in the RBS for the air interface. References
/GSM:05.02/
/GSM:05.03/
Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. Functions Normal burst Supported Burst Types The following burst types are supported /GSM:05.02:5.2/:
Frequency correction burst Synchronisation burst Dummy burst Access burst 17.2.2 Supported Logical Channels The following logical channels are supported /GSM:05.02:3/:
BCCH Broadcast Control Channel CBCH CCCH FACCH/F FACCH/H FCCH SACCH/C4 SACCH/C8 SACCH/TF Cell Broadcast Channel Common Control Channel, comprising:
AGCH Access Grant Channel PCH Paging Channel RACH Random Access Channel Fast Associated Control Channel, full rate Fast Associated Control Channel, half rate Frequency Correction Channel Slow Associated Control Channel, dedicated control/4 Slow Associated Control Channel, dedicated control/8 Slow Associated Control Channel, full rate trafc EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 175 (421) Physical Channel Handling SACCH/TH SCH SDCCH/4 SDCCH/8 TCH/F TCH/H TCH/FD SACCH/M SACCH/MD PBCCH PCCCH PACCH PTCCH/D PTCCH/U PRACH PDTCH Slow Associated Control Channel, half rate trafc Synchronization Channel Stand-Alone Dedicated Control Channel/4 Stand-Alone Dedicated Control Channel/8 Trafc Channel, full rate Trafc Channel, half rate Trafc Channel, full rate, uni-directional, multislot conguration. Slow Associated Control Channel, full rate trafc, multislot conguration. SACCH/MD is dened as the downlink part of SACCH/M Packet Broadcast Control Channel Packet Common Control Channel Packet Associated Control Channel Packet Timing Advance Control Channel, downlink Packet Timing Advance Control Channel, uplink Packet Random Access Channel Packet Data Trafc Channel 17.2.3 Supported Channel Combinations The following channel combinations are supported /GSM:05.02:6.4/:
Circuit Switched
(iv) FCCH + SCH + BCCH norm. + BCCH ext. + CCCH
(ii) TCH/H(0,1) + FACCH/H(0,1) + SACCH/TH(0,1)
(i) TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/TF
(v) a) FCCH + SCH + BCCH norm. + BCCH ext. + CCCH
+ SDCCH/4[0..3] + SACCH/C4[0..3]
b) FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH + SDCCH/4[0,1,3] +
SACCH/C4[0,1,3] + CBCH
(vii) 176 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Physical Channel Handling a) SDCCH/8[0..7] + SACCH/C8[0..7]
b) SDCCH/8[0,1,3..7] + SACCH/C8[0,1,3..7] + CBCH
(viii) TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/M
(ix) TCH/F + SACCH/M
(x) TCH/FD + SACCH/MD CCCH = PCH + RACH + AGCH. Channel Combinations (v) and (vii) type b, are valid only when SMS Cell Broadcast is congured. In case of Channel Combination (vii), CBCH is only allowed for TN (Timeslot Number)=0..3. Channel Combinations (iv) and (v) must be congured for TN=0. Channel Combinations (vi) can only be congured for TN=2, 4, 6. Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:
Packet Switched
(xi) PBCCH + PCCCH + PDTCH + PACCH + PTCCH
(xii) PCCCH + PDTCH + PACCH + PTCCH
(xiii) PDTCH + PACCH + PTCCH Each channel combination for packet data is transmitted on PDCH (the physical channel). 17.2.4 Channel Coding Channel Coding (downlink) is performed according to:
/GSM:05.03:3/
Trafc Channels
/GSM:05.03:4/
/GSM:05.03:5/
Control Channels Packet Switched Channels 17.2.5 Channel Decoding Channel Decoding (uplink) is performed according to:
/GSM:05.03:3/
Trafc Channels
/GSM:05.03:4/
/GSM:05.03:5/
Control Channels Packet Switched Channels 17.2.6 Interleaving Interleaving (downlink) is performed according to:
/GSM:05.03:3/
Trafc Channels
/GSM:05.03:4/
Control Channels EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 177 (421) Physical Channel Handling
/GSM:05.03:5/
Packet Switched Channels 17.2.7 De-interleaving De-interleaving (uplink) is performed according to:
/GSM:05.03:3/
Trafc Channels
/GSM:05.03:4/
/GSM:05.03:5/
Control Channels Packet Switched Channels 17.2.8 Burst Assembly Burst Assembly is performed according to:
/GSM:05.02:5.2.3/
Normal bursts
/GSM:05.02:5.2.4/
Frequency correction bursts
/GSM:05.02:5.2.5/
Synchronisation bursts
/GSM:05.02:5.2.6/
Dummy bursts
/GSM:05.02:5.2.7/
Access bursts 17.2.9 Multiplexing Multiplexing of bursts into TDMA frames is performed according to:
/GSM:05.02/
Table 1/
/GSM:05.02/
/GSM:05.02/
/GSM:05.02/
/GSM:05.02/
/GSM:05.02/
/GSM:05.02/
Table 2/
Table 3/
Table 4/
Table 5/
Table 6/
Table 7/
178 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 18 18.1 Speech and Data Services Speech and Data Services This chapter covers speech and data services, as well as the handling of the link between the RBS and the RTC (Remote TransCoder) when neither speech nor data is present. References
/GSM:03.05/
/GSM:08.20/
/GSM:08.54/
/GSM:08.58/
/GSM:08.60/
/GSM:08.61/
GSM 03.05 Phase 2 Ver 4.0.0 GSM 08.20 Phase 2 Ver 4.1.0 GSM 08.54 Phase 2 Ver 4.0.0 GSM 08.58 Phase 2 Ver 4.2.0 GSM 08.60 Phase 2 Ver 4.1.0 GSM 08.61 Phase 2 Ver 4.1.0
/GSM:11.20/
Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. GSM 11.20 Phase 1 Ver 3.11.0 18.2 Concepts Air Timeslot Resource Terrestrial Trafc Channel RTC TRAU Frame The functional entity responsible for all Air interface functions for one Air timeslot. The Air timeslot resource can be seen as 1/8 of a TRX. Physical channel used for communication with remote transcoder/rate adapter. When the transcoders/rate adapters are positioned remote from the RBS, they are called RTCs. In this document, the RTC is a part of BSC but is controlled by the RBS. To control the RTC from the RBS, control information is added to the coded speech information (or data information). This results in a data block called a TRAU
(Transcoder Rate Adapter Unit) frame which is transferred between the RBS and RTC as described in /GSM:08.60/. The size of the TRAU frame for full rate speech/data/idle speech is 320 bits. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 179 (421) Speech and Data Services 18.3 18.3.1 Functions Idle Transmission over A-bis Idle transmission over A-bis is initiated:
When the Managed Object (MO) corresponding to an air timeslot resource receives a start order via A-bis Operation and Maintenance Link (OML) When a TCH ceases to exist because of a disable order to the MO corresponding to an air timeslot resource, via A-bis OML Idle transmission over A-bis is active for the following channels and conditions:
Common Resource channels, idle transmission always active SDCCH channels, idle transmission always active TCH channels, idle transmission active when there is no channel. A 16 kbit/s idle pattern, as specied in /GSM:08.54/, is continuously sent to the RTC on the terrestrial trafc channel allocated to the air timeslot resource. Idle transmission over A-bis is terminated when a trafc channel is enabled on the air timeslot resource. 18.3.2 Terrestrial Link Supervision The function Terrestrial Link Supervision (TLS) supervises a terrestrial link (16 kbps) for a trafc channel and decides when a connection is considered lost. The TLS function is set to On or Off for an idle or active subchannel. TLS on idle subchannel is set On:
16 kbps resource in IDLE state:
Idle speech is transmitted. Terrestrial link supervision is active. 8 kbps resource in IDLE state (this case only exists when the other 8 kbps resource is in ACTIVE state):
Idle pattern is transmitted. Terrestrial link supervision is not active. TLS on idle subchannel is set Off:
For all these cases terrestrial link supervision is not active. 16 kbps resource in IDLE state:
Idle pattern is transmitted. 8 kbps resource in IDLE state (this case only exists when the other 8 kbps resource is in ACTIVE state) 180 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Speech and Data Services Idle pattern is transmitted. When both 8 kbps subchannels of a common TS resource go into idle state they are transformed into one 16 kbps idle resource. Idle pattern is generated as specied in /GSM:08.54/. TLS on active subchannel is set On:
TCH in ACTIVE state including all sub-states and the channel mode is not "signalling". Terrestrial link used for trafc. Terrestrial link supervision is active. TCH in ACTIVE state including all sub-states and the channel mode is "signalling". Idle pattern is transmitted. Terrestrial link supervision is not active. TLS on active subchannel is set Off:
For all these cases terrestrial link supervision is not active. TCH in ACTIVE state including all sub-states and the channel mode is not "signalling". Terrestrial link used for trafc. TCH in ACTIVE state including all sub-states and the channel mode is "signalling". Idle pattern is transmitted. Idle pattern is generated as specied in /GSM:08.54/. This function supervises the downlink TRAU frames. The synchronization bits have to be correct and the received frame type must be expected. The synchronization pattern for an idle subchannel is generated either in the TRA or the BTS (loop). The BTS accepts either one of the synchronization patterns. If disturbances on the link result in a long duration of synchronization and/or frame type errors which exceeds the TLS Filtering Time ( a congured value) then an error condition is considered present. When an error condition is present and supervision is On this is reported to BSC via a FAULT_REPORT message. If the channel is in ACTIVE state and TLS on active subchannel is On then a CONNECTION_FAILURE_INDICATION message is sent to the BSC. 18.3.3 Full Rate Speech Full Rate Speech is either initiated by the Channel Activation function or the Mode Modify function. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 181 (421) Speech and Data Services In order to activate coding/decoding of speech in the RTC, the RBS issues TRAU frames of type Speech/Enhanced speech. In order to deactivate speech coding/decoding in the RTC, the RBS issues TRAU frames of type Idle Speech. During the exchange of TRAU frames between RBS and RTC carrying Full Rate Speech (or Full Rate Idle Speech), the RBS regularly calculates an appropriate time alignment value for controlling the downlink frame timing. This value is included in the transmitted TRAU frames. The TRAU frames exchanged between BTS and RTC during an active call are of three types:
Idle Speech (used by DTX function GSM speech algorithm version 1 only) Enhanced Speech Speech Speech containing coded silence information TRAU frame type Speech uses GSM speech algorithm version 1 and frame type Enhanced Speech uses GSM speech algorithm version 2 as coding/decoding of full rate speech. For TRAU frames of type Speech, improvements of the subjective speech quality is described under: Subjective Speech Quality Improvements. Full rate speech is either terminated by the RF Channel Release function, or the Mode Modify function when Data or Signalling services are requested. Subjective Speech Quality Improvements The RBS supports subjective speech quality improvements that go beyond what is required in the GSM recommendations. The objective is to avoid unpleasant noise effects that would result from e.g. normal decoding of lost speech frames. To improve the subjective speech quality uplink in cases of bad frames reception, the RBS takes local measures such as "substitution" and
"muting" of frames and computes an improved BFI (Bad Frame Indicator). This calculation takes advantage of quality information from the channel decoder. To improve speech quality downlink, ltering of TRAU frames is done after detection of disturbances in the frame quality. The ltering is removed when the disturbances have disappeared. 18.3.4 Half Rate Speech Half Rate Speech is either initiated by the Channel Activation function or the Mode Modify function. In order to activate coding/decoding of speech in the RTC, the RBS issues TRAU frames of type Speech. 182 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Speech and Data Services In order to deactivate speech coding/decoding in the RTC, the RBS issues TRAU frames of type Idle Pattern according to /GSM:08.61/. During the exchange of TRAU frames between RBS and RTC carrying half rate speech, the RBS regularly calculates an appropriate time alignment value for controlling the downlink frame timing. This value is included in the transmitted TRAU frames. The TRAU frames exchanged between RBS and RTC during an active call are of the following types:
Speech containing coded silence information (used by function DTX). Speech Half Rate Speech is either terminated by the RF Channel Release function, or the Mode Modify function when Data or Signalling services are requested. Full Rate Data Full rate data is either initiated by the Channel Activation function or the Mode Modify function. In order to activate and control rate adaptation of data in the RTC, the RBS issues TRAU frames of type Data and channel type Full Rate. In order to deactivate rate adaptation of data in the RTC, the RBS issues TRAU frames of type Idle Speech and channel type Full Rate, according to /GSM:08.60/. The rate adaptation is split up between RTC and RBS and is performed as described in /GSM:08.20/ and /GSM:08.60/. The TRAU frames exchanged between RBS and RTC during an active call can be of the following types:
Data, containing Idle Data Data The arrival of data blocks from the air interface is supervised by the RBS. If no data block is received, it is replaced by an idle data block. Full Rate Data is either terminated by the RF Channel Release function, or the Mode Modify function when Speech or Signalling services are requested. Half Rate Data Full Rate Data is either initiated by the Channel Activation function or the Mode Modify function. In order to activate and control rate adaptation of data in the RTC, the RBS issues TRAU frames opf type Data. In order to deactivate rate adaptation of data in the RTC, the RBS issues TRAU frames of type Idle Speech according to /GSM:08.61/. The rate adaptation is split up between RTC and RBS and is performed as described in /GSM:08.20/ and /GSM:08.61/. 18.3.5 18.3.6 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 183 (421) Speech and Data Services 18.4 18.4.1 18.4.2 The TRAU frames exchanged between RBS and RTC during an active call can be of the following types:
Data, containing Idle Data Data The arrival of data blocks from the air interface is supervised by the RBS. If no data block is received, it is replaced by an idle data block. Half Rate Data is either terminated by the RF Channel Release function, or the Mode Modify function when Speech or Signalling services are requested. Operational Conditions Full Rate Speech The round-trip delay for a full rate speech channel, introduced by the BTS, is less than 68 ms. The values are including additional delay due to the measuring method as described in /GSM 11.20:7.2.6, table 72b/. 9.6 kbits/s 14.4 kbits/s Full Rate Data Transparent data services supported:
1200/75 bits/s 4.8 kbits/s 2.4 kbits/s 1.2 kbits/s 600 bits/s Non-transparent data services supported:
14.4 kbits/s 9.6 kbits/s The round-trip delay for a full rate data channel, introduced by the RBS is:
Less than 89 ms for TCH/F2.4 (this includes TCH/F1.2, TCH/
F1.2/75 and TCH/F0.6 as well) Less than 160 ms for TCH/F4.8, TCH/F9.6 Less than 175 ms for TCH/F9.6NT The values are including additional delay due to the measuring method as described in /GSM 11.20:7.2.6, table 72b/. 184 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 18.4.3 18.4.4 Speech and Data Services Half Rate Speech The round-trip delay for a half rate speech channel, introduced by the BTS, is less than 63 ms. The values are including additional delay due to the measuring method as described in /GSM 11.20:7.2.6, table 72b/. 4.8 kbits/s Half Rate Data Transparent data services supported:
1200/75 bits/s 2.4 kbits/s 1.2 kbits/s 600 bits/s Non-transparent data services supported:
4.8 kbits/s The round-trip delay for a half rate data channel, introduced by the BTS is:
Less than 284 ms for TCH/H4.8 and TCH/H2.4(this includes TCH/H1.2, TCH/H1.2/75 and TCH/H0.6 as well) Less than 315 ms for TCH/H4.8NT. The values are including additional delay due to the measuring method as described in /GSM 11.20:7.2.6, table 72b/. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 185 (421) Speech and Data Services This page is intentionally left blank 186 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 19 19.1 19.2 19.2.1 19.2.2 Packet Data Services Packet Data Services This chapter covers packet data services, including handling of the link, GSL, between RBS and PCU, as well as Terrestrial Link Supervision
(TLS) and Link Quality Supervision. References
/GSM:05.02/CCITT G.821/ CCITT Blue book, rec G.821 Vol III -
Fascicle III.5 "Digital Networks, digital sections and digital line systems"
Functions Terrestrial Link Supervision for GSL This function is used when the PDCH is activated, primarily to supervise that a correct PCU frame synchronization is maintained downlink, and that the received frame type is expected. The function decides when the connection is considered lost. TLS supervision can be controlled using a ag indicating supervision on/off, according to the cases below. TLS on active subchannel is set on:
Terrestrial link used for PDCH trafc. Terrestrial link supervision is active. TLS on active subchannel is set off:
Terrestrial link used for PDCH trafc. No supervision. If, for an activated channel, disturbances on the link between RBS and PCU result in a connection lost decision, a CONNECTION FAILURE message with cause value remote PCU failure is also sent to the BSC. This is done only when the "TLS active" ag is indicating supervision on. PCU-RBS LInk Quality Supervison The Link Quality Supervision function evaluates and reports the Terrestrial Channel link quality for a specied period of time. Measurements are made on the frames received from PCU, and are related to the 16 kbit/s link. Just a subset of the bits are known in advance, for example, synchronization bits. Bit error measurements are only taken on these bits to form an equivalent set of measuring counters. Results of measurements are added to the ACTIVE measuring counters. 19.2.3 Packet Data Upon reception of a CHANNEL ACTIVATION message from the BSC, the startup of the GSL is initiated. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 187 (421) Packet Data Services The RBS initiates the setup and synchronization of the GSL, by issuing PCU frames of type "synchronization". Upon reception of PCU frames of type "synchronization" by RBS, the GSL is established. Upon reception of an RF CHANNEL RELEASE from the BSC, Idle pattern is started to be transmitted to the PCU. The GSL is stopped and the RBS-PCU connection is released. Upon reception of a PCU frame of type "synchronization", RBS associates the downlink FN counter with the Air FN, and returns these values in the next PCU frame of type "synchronization" to the PCU. RBS supervises the frame synchronization of the GSL by checking the PCU frames of type "trafc". To minimize the downlink delay between the Air interface and the PCU, RBS continuously monitors, and if necessary adjusts, the alignment between the Radio Blocks sent on Air Interface and the PCU Frames received on GSL. The procedure runs autonomously as long as the GSL is active. To minimize the uplink delay between the Air interface and the PCU, RBS measures the difference in time between reception from Air interface and transmission to PCU, and performs necessary adjustments. The procedure runs autonomously as long as the GSL is active. 188 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 20 20.1 Call Control Call Control The Call Control function denes the RBS functions related to call establishment and call control on the air interface. References
/GSM 04.04/
/GSM 04.06/
/GSM 04.08/
/GSM 05.02/
/GSM 05.05/
/GSM 05.10/
/GSM 08.58/
Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. 20.2 Channel Activation Purpose To prepare a dedicated channel for use and start up reception and transmission on associated channels. /GSM 08.58:4.1/
Preconditions and Initiation Supported channel combinations /GSM 05.02:6.4/
(i) TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/TF
(ii) TCH/H(0,1) + FACCH/H(0,1) + SACCH/TH(0,1)
(v) FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH+ SDCCH/4[0..3] + SACCH/
C4[0..3]
(vii) SDCCH/8[0..7] + SACCH/C8[0..7]
(viii) TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/M
(ix) TCH/F + SACCH/M
(x) TCH/FD + SACCH/MD Packet Switched A 52multiframe is supported for PDCH. The following channel combinations /GSM:05.02/ can be transmitted on PDCH (the physical channel):
(xi) PBCCH + PCCCH + PDTCH + PACCH + PTCCH
(xii) PCCCH + PDTCH + PACCH + PTCCH
(xiii) PDTCH + PACCH + PTCCH EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 189 (421) Call Control Note:
All logical channels (except PTCCH) are transparent for the BTS. Bm + ACCHs (Associated Control Channels) Lm + ACCHs Supported channel numbers /GSM 08.58:9.3.1/
SDCCH/4 + ACCH (TN=0) SDCCH/8 + ACCH PDCH Normal Assign Immediate Assign Supported activation types /GSM 08.58:9.3.3/
Asynchronous Handover Multislot conguration Packet Channel Initial activation Supported channel modes /GSM 08.58:9.3.6/
TCH/F Signalling TCH/H TCH/FS TCH/FS TCH/HS SDCCH Signalling Full rate speech, GSM speech alg. Ver 1 Full rate speech, GSM speech alg. Ver 2 Half rate speech Signalling For the non-transparent service TCH/F14.4 Full rate data 14.4 kbit/s non-transparent TCH/F9.6 TCH/H4.8 Full rate data 9.6 kbit/s non-transparent Half rate data 4.8 kbit/s non-transparent For the transparent service TCH/F14.4 TCH/F9.6 TCH/F4.8 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 Full rate data 14.4 kbit/s transparent Full rate data 9.6 kbit/s transparent Full rate data 4.8 kbit/s transparent Full rate data 2.4 kbit/s transparent Full rate data 1.2 kbit/s transparent 190 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F TCH/FS TCH/FS TCH/F14.4 TCH/F9.6 TCH/H4.8 TCH/F9.6 TCH/F4.8 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/FS TCH/FS TCH/F14.4 TCH/F9.6 Call Control Full rate data 600 bit/s transparent Full rate data 1200/75 bit/s (1200 network
>MS, 75 MS >network) transparent Signalling, Bi-directional (not allowed on channel combination ix) Full rate speech, GSM speech alg. Ver 1, Bi-directional Full rate speech, GSM speech alg. Ver 2, Bi-directional Full rate data 14.4 kbit/s non-transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 9.6 kbit/s non-transparent, Bi-directional Half rate data 4.8 kbit/s non-transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 9.6 kbit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 4.8 kbit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 2.4 kbit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 1.2 kbit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 600 bit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 1200/75 bit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate speech, GSM speech alg. Ver 1, Uni-directional Full rate speech, GSM speech alg. Ver 2, Uni-directional Full rate data 14.4 kbit/s non-transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 9.6 kbit/s non-transparent, Uni-directional EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 191 (421) Call Control TCH/H4.8 TCH/F9.6 TCH/F4.8 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/H4.8 TCH/H4.8 TCH/H2.4 TCH/H2.4 TCH/H2.4 TCH/H2.4 Half rate data 4.8 kbit/s non-transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 9.6 kbit/s transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 4.8 kbit/s transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 2.4 kbit/s transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 1.2 kbit/s transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 600 bit/s transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 1200/75 bit/s transparent, Uni-directional Half rate data 4.8 kbit/s non-transparent Half rate data 4.8 kbit/s transparent Half rate data 2.4 kbit/s transparent Half rate data 1.2 kbit/s transparent Half rate data 600 bit/s transparent Half rate data 1200/75 bit/s (1200 network
>MS, 75 MS >networ) transparent Note:
TCH/F4.8 non-transparent is only hardware supported. Classication (see section Concepts) of elements, common for all activation types Channel Identication Ignored BS Power MS Power BS Power Parameters MS Power Parameters Physical Context Optional Required Rejected Rejected Rejected Immediate Assign /GSM 08.58:4.1/
The optional elements for Immediate Assign are:
Encryption Information Rejected Handover Reference Rejected 192 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Call Control Timing Advance Required Normal Assignment /GSM 08.58:4.1/
The optional elements for Normal Assignment are:
Encryption Information Optional Handover Reference Timing Advance Rejected Required Optional SACCH Information If the parameter SACCH Information is present, the contents will be used for this channel group instead of the information received in the SACCH FILLING INFORMATION MODIFY procedure described in Broadcast. Asynchronous Handover /GSM 08.58:4.1/
The optional elements for Asynchronous Handover are:
Encryption Information Optional Handover Reference Timing Advance Required Rejected Optional SACCH Information If the parameter SACCH Information is present, the contents will be used for this channel group instead of the information received by the SACCH FILLING INFORMATION MODIFY procedure described in Broadcast. Multislot conguration (secondary channels) /GSM 08.58:4.1/
The activation for the multislot conguration procedure is in accordance with /GSM 08.58:4.1/. Encryption Information Optional Optional SACCH Information If the parameter SACCH Information is present, the contents will be used for this channel group instead of the information received in the SACCH FILLING INFORMATION MODIFY procedure described in Broadcast. The function is initiated when a CHANNEL_ACTIVATION /
GSM 08.58:4.1/ message is received from BSC. Packet Channel The following actions are taken by the RBS:
Start scheduling the PDCH multiframe on Air interface. No power is transmitted (except for PTCCH downlink) and no LAPDm links are inititated. Initiate establishment of GSL. Send CHANNEL_ACTIVATION_ACKNOWLEDGE to BSC. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 193 (421) Call Control Set Dedicated Resource Channel state = Activate. Description In order to activate a channel between MS and RBS, the RBS receives an idle trafc channel from BSC in a Channel_Activation message. This message contains the reason for the activation (immediate assignment, normal assignment, asynchronous handover, multislot conguration), the identication of the channel to be used (channel no.) and a complete description of the channel (full/half rate, speech/data, coding/rate adaption, hopping sequence, encryption key, and so forth). If the activation of the channel is successful, the RBS answer is Channel_Activation_Acknowledgement. Otherwise, if the channel for some reason cannot activate, the answer is a Channel_Activation_Negative_Acknowledgement. MS RBS BSC CHAN ACTIV CHAN ACTIV ACK OR CHAN ACTIV NCK P003011A Figure 83 Channel activation message 20.3 Adaptive Frame Alignment Purpose To ensure that the burst received in the RBS from an MS is in time alignment. Precondition and initiation See Channel Activation above. Description This function ensures that the burst received in the RBS from an active MS at different distances from the RBS, is in time alignment. To ensure this, the RBS must inform the MS at which instant the MS shall start sending its bursts. /GSM 05.10:5/
Example An MS is very close to an RBS. It is allocated on TS3 and only using this time slot for the call. During the call, the MS moves away from the RBS causing the information sent from the RBS to arrive at the MS 194 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Call Control later and later. The answer from the MS also arrives later and later at the RBS. This function prevents the delay becoming so long as to cause TS3 to overlap onto TS4, thus disturbing another call. The function is terminated when the dedicated Resource Channels enter state IDLE. There are three different kinds of Adaptive Frame Alignment:
1. Access Delay Measurement From the start of normal burst reception on a dedicated channel, the RBS measures the Access Delay on all received bursts. These values are used at the calculation of a new ordered TA value to the MS, see Dynamic Time Alignment. 2. Initial Time Alignment At start of downlink SACCH transmission, an initial ordered TA value
(received at channel activation) is used in the L1 header of the SACCH block. 3. Dynamic Time Alignment Three inputs are used to calculate the new/next TA order value included in the L1 header of the downlink SACCH block /GSM 04.04:7.1/:
The access delay measurements on all normal bursts that are received since the last calculation (one SACCH reporting period) The actual used (by MS) TA value which is received in L1 header
/GSM 04.04:7.2/ of the uplink SACCH block The previous/unit ordered TA value to MS The ordered TA value must not be changed more than 1 step from the TA /GSM 05.10:5/ previously ordered. 20.4 Asynchronous Handover Detection Purpose To detect access bursts (in a handover situation). Preconditions and Initiation See Channel Activation above. Description When the RBS is taking over the communication, in a handover situation, it has no information of the distance to the MS and consequently no Timing Advance information. The MS transmits access bursts. These burst are kept very short (only 8 bits of information) in order to prevent disturbing another call. This function measures the delay of handover access burst received by the RBS and sets the Timing Advance. The information is included in the EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 195 (421) Call Control Physical_Information message to MS and the Handover_Detection message to BSC. /GSM 08.58:4.3/
MS RBS BSC HANDO ACCESS PHY INFO HANDO DET P003012A Physical information message Figure 84 There are some criterias that have to be fullled if the Handover Access messages shall be accepted. Acceptance of a Handover_Access message is based on:
Handover Reference (received in handover message), which shall match the value received in the related Channel Activation from BSC Measured Access Delay, which must not exceed 63 (64 not accepted) To accept the MS handover access, RBS shall receive:
Two out of three acceptable Handover_Access messages (ABs) for channel combination (i) Two out of four acceptable Handover access messages (ABs) for channel combination (v) and (vii) The TA difference between acceptable Access Bursts must be less than or equal to 4 bit periods. On acceptance of the MS handover access, the RBS takes the following actions:
Opens all logical channels for transceiving on the air (start Normal Burst reception) and starts active channel measurements on the dedicated resource. Sends Handover detection to BSC /GSM 08.58:8.4.7/ including the measured access delay value. Sends a Physical information message to the MS /
GSM 04.08:3.4.4.2.2/. The Physical information shall be repeated. If no correct frame is received from the MS, transmission of Physical information shall be repeated. 196 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Example:
Call Control 3. MS 1. 2. 3. OLD NEW BSC P003013A Transmission of physical information Figure 85 1. BSC sends a message to the MS through the old RBS containing information about the frequency and time slot to change to. This information is sent over FACCH. 2. The MS tunes to the new frequency, and transmits handover access bursts in the correct time slot. The access bursts are small enough to be sent without any Timing Advance information and do not disturb any other call. 3. (This function) RBS detects the handover access bursts and measures the delay. The delay gives information about the Timing Advance which is included in the Physical Information to the MS and the Handover Detection message to BSC. 20.5 RF Channel Release Purpose To release a radio channel which is no longer needed. Precondition and Initiation See Channel Activation above. The function is initiated when the RBS receives a Channel_Release message from BSC. Description All trafc and signalling on a group of dedicated logical channels are stopped, and all associated resources are released. After having released the channel, or if the channel is already released, the RBS sends an RF_Channel_Acknowledge message to BSC /GSM 08.58:4.7/. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 197 (421) Call Control RBS BSC RF CHAN REL RF CHAN REL ACK Figure 86 RF channel release 20.6 Deactivate SACCH Purpose To stop transmission on SACCH of the addressed channel group. Precondition and Initiation See Channel Activation above. The function is initiated when the RBS receives a Channel_Release message from BSC. Description The RBS immediately stops all transmission on SACCH of the addressed channel group. /GSM 08.58:4.6/
MS RBS BSC CHAN REL DEACT SACCH P003014A P003015A Figure 87 Deactivate SACCH 20.7 Link Establish Indication Purpose To establish a link layer connection between MS and network. 198 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Call Control Precondition and Initiation Channel combination supported is dened in section Channel Activation above /GSM 04.06:5.4.4/. The Link Establish Indication function is applicable for:
SAPI-0 on SDCCH and FACCH SAPI-3 on SDCCH and FACCH/T There are two cases of establishment as described in /GSM 04.06:5.4.1/:
Normal establishment Contention resolution establishment The function is initiated when the RBS receives an SABM from MS. Description The following procedure is used by RBS to indicate to BSC that a link layer on the air interface has been established by an initiative from the MS. After reception of a rst SABM an indication (ESTablish INDication) is sent to the BSC that a link layer on the radio path has been established in multiframe mode. It is the MS that takes initiative of the establishment. This is done when the mobile, for example, wants to send a measurement report to the network. MS RBS BSC first SABM UA EST IND P003016A Link establish indication Figure 88 The Normal Establishment is utilized for SAPI-0 links (in conjunction with a normal assign or handover) as well as for SAPI-3 links (at SMS point-to-point). The Contention Resolution Establishment is utilized for SAPI-0 links only (in conjunction with an immediate assign). An attempt to establish an SAPI-3 link is rejected (Disconnect Mode response to MS if the SAPI-0 link is not established). Messages queued for transmission are lost if the link is re-established. Collision cases are treated as specied in Technical Specication /
GSM 04.06/
Fault handling related to the link establish procedure is in accordance with /GSM 04.06:5.4.4/
EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 199 (421) Call Control The link establishment procedure is in accordance with /
GSM 08.58.3.1/ and /GSM 04.06:5.4.1/
20.8 Link Release Indication Purpose To release a link layer connection between MS and the network. Precondition and Initiation Channel combination supported is dened in section Channel Activation above. The Link Release Indication function is applicable for:
SAPI-3 on SDCCH, SACCH/T and SACCH/M SAPI-0 on SDCCH and FACCH The function is initiated when the RBS receives a DISC frame from MS. Description The following procedure is used by RBS to indicate to BSC that a link layer on the air interface has been released by an initiative from the MS
(disconnect). The MS sends a DISC frame on a link layer connection in multiframe mode. Multiframe mode means that an answer UA
(unnumbered acknowledgment) is required. The RBS then sends a RELease INDication message to BSC to conrm the release of the link layer. It is the mobile that takes initiative for the release. This is used when the signalling between MS and network is done and the link is no longer needed. MS BTS BSC first DISC UA REL IND P003017A Figure 89 Link release indication The link release procedure is in accordance with /GSM 08.58:3.3/,
/GSM 08.58:8.3.9/ and for RELease INDication with /
GSM 08.58:8.3.9/. Collision cases are treated as specied in Technical Specication GSM 04.06. Fault handling related to the link release procedure is in accordance with /GSM 04.06:5.4.4/. 200 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 20.9 Link Establishment Request Purpose To establish a signal link between MS and network. Call Control Precondition and Initiation Channel combinations supported are dened in section Channel Activation above. This function is applicable for:
SAPI-3 links on SDCCH, SACCH/T and SACCH/M The function is initiated when the RBS receives an ESTablish REQuest from BSC. Description The following procedure is used by BSC to request the establishment of a link layer connection in multiframe mode on the air interface /
GSM 08.58:3.2/. The procedure starts when the RBS receives an ESTablish REQuest message from BSC. RBS then establishes the link by sending an SABM frame. Upon reception of the acknowledgment (UA-frame) from MS, RBS sends an ESTablish CONFirm message to BSC. It is the network
(BSC) that takes initiative for the establishment. Measurement reports are one type of message which can be sent on the signal link. MS RBS BSC SABM UA EST REQ EST CONF P003018A Link establishment request Figure 90 Messages queued for transmissions are lost if the link is re-established. When the link is established, an ESTablish CONFirm /GSM 08.58:3.5/
is to be sent to the BSC. The Link Establishment procedure is in accordance with /
GSM 08.58:3.2/ and /GSM 04.06:4.1/. Fault Handling related to the link establishment procedure is in accordance with /GSM 04.06:5.4.1/. 20.10 Link Release Request Purpose To release a signal link between MS and network. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 201 (421) Call Control Precondition and Initiation Channel combinations supported are dened in section Channel Activation above. This function is applicable for:
SAPI-3 links on SDCCH, SACCH/T and SACCH/M The function is initiated when a RELease REQuest is sent from BSC to RBS. Description The following procedure is used by BSC to request the release of a link layer connection on the air interface in multiframe mode /
GSM 04.06:5.4.4/. The procedure starts when the RBS receives a RELease REQuest message from BSC. RBS then sends a DISC (disconnect) frame to MS. When it has received the acknowledgment (UA- or DM-frame), RBS sends an RELease CONFirm message to BSC. It is the network (BSC) that takes initiative for the release. This is used when the signalling between MS and network is done and the link is no longer needed. MS RBS BSC DISC UA (or DM) REL REQ REL CONF P003019A Link release request Figure 91 Messages queued for transmissions are lost if the link is re-established. When the link is established, an ESTablish CONFirm /GSM 08.58:3.5/
is to be sent to the BSC. The Link Release procedure is in accordance with /
GSM 08.58:3.4/ and /GSM 04.06:5.4.4/. Fault Handling related to the link establishment procedure is in accordance with /GSM 04.06:5.4.4/. The RBS supports Normal Release as well as Local Release /
GSM 04.06:5.4.4.4/. 20.11 Transparent Message Transmission Purpose To send transparent layer 3 information between MS and the network. 202 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Call Control Precondition and Initiation Channel combinations supported are dened in section Channel Activation above. This function is applicable for:
SAPI-3 links on SDCCH, SACCH/T and SACCH/M SAPI-0 on SDCCH and FACCH The function is initiated when the RBS receives a DATA REQUEST from BSC. Description The following procedure is used by BSC to send a layer 3 message to MS in acknowledged mode /GSM 08.58:3.5/. The message is sent through the RBS on the layer 2 link (the RBS is not affected by the message). The function is initiated when a Data Request is received from BSC. The message contains the complete layer 3 message to be sent in acklowledged mode. The RBS sends the layer 3 message in accordance with /GSM 08.58:3.5/ to the MS inside an I (information eld)-frame. Transparent transmission in acknowledge mode requires that multiframe mode /GSM 08.58:3.1,3.2/ has been established. With multiframe mode means that an answer is needed. In this case an RR-frame (receiver ready) is sent back as a conrmation to the RBS. The message is in this case sent from network (BSC) to MS. One example when this is used is for sending of SMS-message to the mobile. MS RBS BSC I-frame RR-frames DATA REQ P003020A Transparent message transmission Figure 92 Transmission of SAPI-0 messages has higher priority than SAPI-3 messages. A separate queue for SAPI-3 messages (Short Message Service) exists. 20.12 Transparent Message Reception Purpose To send transparent layer 3 information between MS and the network. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 203 (421) Call Control Precondition and Initiation Channel combination supported is dened in section Channel Activation above. This function is applicable for:
SAPI-3 links on SDCCH, SACCH/T and SACCH/M SAPI-0 on SDCCH and FACCH The function is initiated when the RBS receives an I-frame from MS. Description The following procedure is used when the MS sends a transparent layer 3 message to RBS. The message is forwarded to the BSC. The message is sent through the RBS on the layer 2 link (the RBS is not affected by the message). The RBS receives an I-frame containing the layer 3 message. When the message is received, an acknowledge (RR-frame) is sent back to the MS. RBS sends a Data Indication message to BSC. The message contains the received transparent layer 3 message from MS. The message is in this case sent from mobile to network (BSC). One example when this is used is for sending an SMS-message to another subscriber. MS RBS BSC I-frames RR-frames DATA IND P003021A Transparent message reception Figure 93 Transparent transmission in acknowledge mode requires that multiframe mode /GSM 08.58:3.1,3.2/ has been established. With multiframe mode means that an answer is needed. In this case an RR-frame (receiver ready) is sent back as a conrmation to the MS. 20.13 SACCH Info Modify Purpose To modify the SACCH information on an individual channel. The information from RBS is ltered so the unwanted data is removed. Precondition and initiation Channel combinations supported are dened in section Channel Activation above. 204 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Call Control This function is initiated when the RBS receives a SACCH INFO MODIFY from BSC. Description This procedure is used by the BSC to modify the SACCH lling information (System Information) sent on an individual SACCH channel. For this purpose, the RBS receives a SACCH INFO MODIFY message from BSC. The SACCH lling information as given in the SACCH INFO MODIFY message shall be used on the indicated channel until the channel is released or the information is changed by another SACCH INFO MODIFY message. The SACCH is used both uplink and downlink. On the uplink, the MS sends measurements on its own RBS (signal strength and quality) and neighbouring RBS (signal strength). On the downlink, the MS receives information concerning what transmitting power to use. 20.14 LAPDm Purpose To provide a reliable signalling link. Precondition and initiation Channel combinations supported are dened in section Channel Activation above. LAPDm supports two modes of operation:
unacknowledged acknowledged Both SAPI-0 and SAPI-3 are supported; establishment of SAPI-3 requires that SAPI-0 is established. SAPI-0 SAPI-0 is used for Call Control, Mobility Management and Radio Resource Management Signalling. The following channels are supported:
BCCH + CCCH Downlink. Unacknowledged mode is supported. SDCCH FACCH SACCH/C SACCH/T SACCH/M Acknowledged and unacknowledged modes are supported. Acknowledged and unacknowledged modes are supported. Unacknowledged mode is supported Unacknowledged mode is supported. Unacknowledged mode is supported. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 205 (421) Call Control SAPI-3 SAPI-3 is used for SMS point-to-point. The following channels are supported:
SDCCH Acknowledged mode is supported. SACCH/T SACCH/M Acknowledged mode is supported. Unacknowledged mode is supported. Description LAPDm (Link Access Procedure on the Dm-channel) is a protocol that operates at the data link layer of the OSI structure. It receives service from the physical link (layer 1) and provides services to the net (layer 3). The LAPDm function denotes the overall functionality included in the LAPDm protocol and the radio link layer management procedures. LAPDm conrms to /GSM 04.06/. This function is used to send signalling information in between MS and RBS on the air interface. 20.15 Channel Reactivation Purpose To reactivate an already activated, dedicated channel resource with new parameters. Precondition and Initiation The function is initiated when a CHANNEL_ACTIVATION /
GSM 08.58:4.1/ message is received from BSC. Supported channel combinations /GSM 05.02:6.4/
(ii) TCH/H(0.1) + FACCH/H(0.1) + SACCH/TH(0.1)
(i) TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/TF
(v) FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH + SDCCH/4[0...3] +
SACCH/C4[0...3]
(vii) SDCCH/8[0...7] + SACCH/C8[0...7]
(viii) TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/M
(ix) TCH/F + SACCH/M
(x) TCH/FD + SACCH/MD Bm + ACCHs Supported channel numbers /GSM 08.58:9.3.1/
Lm + ACCHs SDCCH/4 + ACCH 206 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 SDCCH/8 + ACCH Call Control Immediate Assign Supported reactivation types /GSM 08.58:9.3.3/
Asynchronous Handover Normal Assign Supported channel modes /GSM 08.58:9.3.6/
TCH/F Signalling TCH/H TCH/FS TCH/FS TCH/HS SDCCH Signalling Full rate speech, GSM speech alg. Ver 1 Full rate speech, GSM speech alg. Ver 2 Half rate speech Signalling For the non-transparent service TCH/F14.4 Full rate data 14.4 kbit/s non-transparent TCH/F9.6 TCH/H4.8 Full rate data 9.6 kbit/s non-transparent Half rate data 4.8 kbit/s non-transparent For the transparent service TCH/F14.4 TCH/F9.6 TCH/F4.8 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F TCH/FS TCH/FS Full rate data 14.4 kbit/s transparent Full rate data 9.6 kbit/s transparent Full rate data 4.8 kbit/s transparent Full rate data 2.4 kbit/s transparent Full rate data 1.2 kbit/s transparent Full rate data 600 bit/s transparent Full rate data 1200/75 bit/s (1200 network
>MS, 75 MS >network) transparent Signalling, Bi-directional (not allowed on channel combination ix) Full rate speech, GSM speech alg. Ver 1, Bi-directional Full rate speech, GSM speech alg. Ver 2, Bi-directional EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 207 (421) Call Control TCH/F14.4 TCH/F9.6 TCH/H4.8 TCH/F14.4 TCH/F9.6 TCH/F4.8 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/FS TCH/FS TCH/F14.4 TCH/F9.6 TCH/H4.8 TCH/F14.4 TCH/F9.6 TCH/F4.8 TCH/F2.4 Full rate data 14.4 kbit/s non-transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 9.6 kbit/s non-transparent, Bi-directional Half rate data 4.8 kbit/s non-transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 14.4 kbit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 9.6 kbit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 4.8 kbit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 2.4 kbit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 1.2 kbit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 600 bit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 1200/75 bit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate speech, GSM speech alg. Ver 1, Uni-directional Full rate speech, GSM speech alg. Ver 2, Uni-directional Full rate data 14.4 kbit/s non-transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 9.6 kbit/s non-transparent, Uni-directional Half rate data 4.8 kbit/s non-transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 14.4 kbit/s transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 9.6 kbit/s transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 4.8 kbit/s transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 2.4 kbit/s transparent, Uni-directional 208 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/H4.8 TCH/H4.8 TCH/H2.4 TCH/H2.4 TCH/H2.4 TCH/H2.4 Call Control Full rate data 1.2 kbit/s transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 600 bit/s transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 1200/75 bit/s transparent, Uni-directional Half rate data 4.8 kbit/s non-transparent Half rate data 4.8 kbit/s transparent Half rate data 2.4 kbit/s transparent Half rate data 1.2 kbit/s transparent Half rate data 600 bit/s transparent Half rate data 1200/75 bit/s (1200 network
>MS, 75 MS >network) transparent Note:
TCH/F4.8 non-transparent is only hardware supported. Classication (see section Concepts) of elements, common for all activation types Channel Identication Ignored BS Power MS Power Optional Required BS Power Parameters Rejected MS Power Parameters Rejected Physical Context Rejected Normal Assignment /GSM 08.58:4.1/
The optional elements for Normal Assignment are:
Encryption Information Optional Handover Reference Timing Advance Rejected Required Optional SACCH Information If the parameter SACCH Information is present, the contents will be used for this channel group instead of the information received in the SACCH FILLING INFORMATION MODIFY procedure described in Broadcast. Multislot conguration (secondary channels) /GSM 08.58:4.1/
EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 209 (421) Call Control The reactivation for the multislot conguration procedure is in accordance with /GSM 08.58:4.1/. Encryption Information Optional Handover Reference Timing Advance Rejected Rejected Optional SACCH Information If the parameter SACCH Information is present, the contents will be used for this channel group instead of the information received in the SACCH FILLING INFORMATION MODIFY procedure described in Broadcast. Description The RBS receives a Channel_Activation message from BSC, in order to reactivate an already activated channel between MS and RBS. The RBS reactivates the channel with new parameters. /GSM 08.58:4.6/
During the reactivation, information ows are not interrupted. If the reactivating of the channel is successful, the RBS answers with Channel_Activation_Acknowledgement. Otherwise, if the channel for some reason cannot activate, the answer is a Channel_Activation_Negative_Acknowledgement. MS RBS BSC CHAN ACTIV CHAN ACTIV ACK OR CHAN ACTIV NCK P003011A Figure 94 Channel reactivation 20.16 Power Information Purpose To change output power on the air interface between RBS and MS. Precondition and Initiation Transparent transmission in acknowledged mode requires that multiframe mode has been established. The function is initiated when a DATA REQUEST message containing information element Power Information is received by the RBS. 210 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Call Control Description By means of the POWER INFORMATION element, the transmission power of the RBS and the MS is immediately changed. It is an optional part of the DATA REQUEST message on Abis. /GSM 08.58:8.3.1/ The power information element contains the new power levels to be used by the RBS (BS Power Level) and the MS (MS Power Level) on the air interface. The RBS will immediately, without waiting for the next measurement period, change output power to BS Power Level. The MS Power Level will be sent to the MS in the L1 header on SACCH as soon as possible. If the RBS receives a value that would result in a setting below the lowest allowed level, the power is set to the lowest allowed level. The function is terminated when Power Information has been acknowledged according to the LAPDm protocol. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 211 (421) Call Control This page is intentionally left blank 212 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 21 21.1 GPRS, Physical Link Layer GPRS, Physical Link Layer General Packet Radio Services (GPRS) is a packet switched service. The service provides:
Efcient use of scarce radio resources Efcient transport of packets in the GSM network Fast set-up/access time References
/GSM:04.04/
/GSM:04.60/
/GSM:05.02/
/GSM:05.03/
/GSM:05.10/
/GSM:05.08/
Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. 21.2 Concepts PCU Frame Radio Block RLC/MAC Block A PCU Frame is transported on Abis interface and contains an RLC/MAC Block and control information. A Radio Block is transported on air interface and contains an RLC/MAC Block and a BCS. An RLC/MAC Block contains a MAC Header and an RLC Data or an RLC/
MAC Control Block as dened in /
GSM:04.60:10/. 21.3 Functions 21.3.1 Radio Block Transmission Purpose Radio Block Transmission species the functionality for downlink transport of RLC/MAC Block. Preconditions and Initiation The function is initiated by a PCU frame of type PCU-DATA-IND, received on Abis GSL interface. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 213 (421) GPRS, Physical Link Layer Description The RBS receives a PCU Frame on Abis interface and checks for errors. The RLC/MAC Block and the control information channel mode, coding scheme and power level is extracted from the PCU frame. A radio block is created by encoding the RLC/MAC Block according to the given coding scheme /GSM:05.03:5/. The information of channel mode is stored to be applied on the next block uplink /
GSM:05.02:6.3.2.2.1/. The Radio Block is transmitted by four normal bursts on air interface using the received power level. 21.3.2 Radio Block Reception Purpose Radio Block Reception species the funtionality for uplink transport of RLC/MAC Block. Preconditions and Initiation The function is initiated by a PCU frame of type PCU-DATA-IND, received on Abis GSL interface. Description The RBS receives a Radio Block (four normal bursts) on air interface and performs demodulation according to the previously stored channel mode. Deinterleaving and channel decoding is performed according to received steal ags /GSM:05.03:5/. The RBS performs the following PDCH measurements on a block basis:
Block quality RX level CRC Access delay A PCU Frame is created, consisting of the RLC/MAC Block and the PDCH measurement. The PCU Frame is then transmitted on Abis Interface. 21.3.3 Access Burst Reception Purpose Access Burst Reception species the functionality for uplink transport of Random access. Preconditions and Initiation The function is initiated by a PCU frame of type PCU-DATA-IND, received on Abis GSL interface. 214 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 GPRS, Physical Link Layer Description The RBS receives four access bursts and performs demodulation according to the previously stored channel mode. Channel decoding is performed according to /GSM:05.03:5.3.1/. The RBS performs the following PDCH measurements produced per access burst by the decoder:
Frame quality Burst quality CRC Access delay A PCU Frame is created, consisting of the four decoded access bursts and the PDCH measurements. The PCU Frame is then transmitted on Abis Interface. 21.3.4 Continuous Timing Advance Update Purpose Continuous Timing Advance Update species the functionality for updating of the timing advance values, using the logical channel PTCCH/U and PTCCH/D scheduled on PDCH according to /
GSM:05.02/. Preconditions and Initiation The function is inititated when a CHANNEL_ACTIVATION message with element "Activation Type" = Packet Channel is received on Abis RSL interface. Description The RBS receives an access burst on PTCCH/U on air interface. The access burst is demodulated, decoded /GSM:05.03:5.2/ and the timing advance value is determined. The timing advance value is updated in the next PTCCH downlink block following the access burst. PTCCH downlink block is according to /GSM:04.04:7.4f/. The RBS performs coding /GSM:05.03:5.2/ and transmits the PTCCH downlink block on nominal power by four normal bursts on PTCCH/D. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 215 (421) GPRS, Physical Link Layer This page is intentionally left blank 216 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 22 22.1 22.2 22.3 22.3.1 Base Station Power Control Base Station Power Control This document covers power regulation by means of the CHANNEL_ACTIVATION and BS_POWER_CONTROL messages from the BSC. The "Base Station Power Control" function is implemented to minimise the transmit power required by the RBS TRXs (transceivers), while maintaining the quality of the radio link. References
/GSM:05.02/
/GSM:05.05/
/GSM:05.08/
GSM 05.02 (phase 2) version 4.3.0 GSM 05.05 (phase 2) version 4.6.0 GSM 05.08 (phase 2) version 4.6.0
/GSM:08.58/
Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. GSM 08.58 (phase 2) version 4.2.0 Concepts Nominal Power Functions The power level dened during conguration of the RBS TRXs. Base Station Power Control at Channel Activation By means of the TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL procedure /
GSM:08.58:4.9/, the BSC denes the TRX (transceiver) transmission power level. The RBS supports:
Interpretation of the BS Power information element in the CHANNEL ACTIVATION message from BSC Storage of BS Power Adjustment of BS Power level Bm + ACCHs Supported Channel Numbers /GSM:08.58:9.3.1/:
SDCCH/8 + ACCH Lm + ACCHs SDCCH/4 + ACCH Supported Channel combinations /GSM:05.02:6.4/:
(i) TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/TF
(ii) TCH/H(0.1) + FACCH/H(0.1) + SACCH/TH(0.1) EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 217 (421) Base Station Power Control
(v) FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH+SDCCH/4(0..3)+SACCH/
C4(0..3)
(vii) SDCCH/8(0..7) + SACCH/C8(0..7)
(viii) TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/M
(ix) TCH/F + SACCH/M
(x) TCH/FD + SACCH/MD The nominal power level is used if BS Power is not received at channel activation. The "BS Power" received is stored in the RBS to be used for the requested dedicated channel. The RBS is able to reduce its BS power level (starting from the nominal power level) in up to 15 steps of 2 dB (nominal value), as dened by the BSC. If the RBS receives a BS Power which would result in a setting below the lowest level allowed, the BS power level is tuned into the lowest level allowed. The maximum BS power level used for a specic channel never exceeds the nominal BS power level. The commanded BS Power level is applied on each transmitted burst, except for bursts on a BCCH carrier, where the nominal BS Power level is used on all timeslots. An attempt to change the BS Power level for a channel on a BCCH carrier, is accepted but has no effect. 22.3.2 Base Station Power Control for an Active Channel By means of the TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL procedure /
GSM:08.58:4.9/ the BSC denes the TRX transmission power level. The RBS support:
Interpretation of BS_POWER_CONTROL message from BSC Storage of BS Power Adjustment of BS power level Supported channel numbers, channel combinations and handling of the received BS power level are as described in chapter Base Station Power Control, see table of contents. The BS power change starts at the rst TDMA frame belonging to a SACCH reporting period. When the RBS has received a new BS power level, the BS power is changed within two SACCH reporting periods 22.3.3 22.4 Base Station Power Control at Channel Reactivation SeeSection 22.3.1 on page 217. Operational Conditions The power level setting follows /GSM:05.05:4.1.2/, according to power level step size, maximum output power and tolerances. 218 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 23 23.1 Channel Measurements Channel Measurements The RBS supports:
Active Channel Measurements, that is quality and signal strength measurements on active uplink dedicated channels. Idle Channel Measurements, that is signal strength measurements on idle uplink dedicated channels. References
/GSM:08.58/
/GSM:05.08/
/GSM:05.02/
Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. 23.2 Concepts RX Reference Point Dened as the point where the RX antenna signal crosses the RBS border, that is the connector for the antenna feeder. TDMA frames used for measurements, as dened in /GSM 05.08:8.4/. Measure of signal strength as dened in /
GSM 05.08:8.1.4/. RXLEV measured over a whole SACCH multiframe. RXLEV measured over a subset of a SACCH multiframe. Measure of signal quality as dened in /
GSM 05.08:8.2.4/. RXQUAL measured over a whole SACCH multiframe. RXQUAL measured over a subset of a SACCH multiframe. Reporting Period RXLEV RXLEV_FULL RXLEV_SUB RXQUAL RXQUAL_FULL RXQUAL_SUB Functions 23.3 23.3.1 Active Channel Measurements By means of the basic measurement reporting procedure /
GSM:08.58:4.5.1/, the RBS performs quality and signal strength measurements on all active uplink dedicated channels. The RBS also performs speech quality measurements on these channels. Measurements on channel combinations, (i), (ii), (iii) (only HW support), (v), (vii), (viii), (ix) and (x) are supported, /GSM:05.02:6.4/. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 219 (421) Channel Measurements The RBS measures BER (Bit Error Rate) and the signal strength over each active channel per reporting period. All SACCH frames are included in the measurements. The reporting periods are different for different TNs, and for different channels, and are the same as for the MS, dened in /GSM 05.08:8.4/. The measurements of signal strength are referred to the RX reference point. An R.M.S. (Root Mean Square) value is created for each burst. Then, the logarithm of this value, expressed in dBm, is averaged over the reporting period. The mapping of this average and RXLEV is as dened in /GSM 05.08:8.1.4/. The signal quality measurements are sampled per reporting period. The mapping between BER and RXQUAL is as dened in /GSM 05.08:8.2.4/. RBS calculates RXLEV_FULL, RXLEV_SUB, RXQUAL_FULL and RXQUAL_SUB as an average of the frames as dened in the following table:
Table 117 Frame calculation Channel Combination
(i), (viii), (ix)
(x)
(ii)
(iii) RXQUAL_FULL, RXLEV_FULL RXQUAL_SUB, RXLEV_SUB All TCH and SACCH frames
(96 TCH, 4 SACCH) 8 SID + 4 SACCH Channel measurements are unspecied. All TCH and SACCH frames
(48 TCH, 4 SACCH) All TCH and SACCH frames
(96 TCH, 4 SACCH) TCH/S: 8 SID + 4 SACCH TCH/Data: 10 SID + 4 SACCH TCH/S: 8 SID + 4 SACCH TCH/Data: 10 SID + 4 SACCH
(v), (vii) All SDCCH and SACCH frames (8 SDCCH, 4 SACCH) Same frames as for RXLEV_FULL and RXQUAL_FULL The SID frames for the TCH channels are dened in /GSM 05.08:8.3/. The Speech Quality Index, SQI, is an index which shall be a measurement of the subjective speech quality of the uplink speech. The algorithm to obtain the index uses BER and FER measurements over a dened period of frames, excluding DTX, as input. Results from channel measurements are reported by A-bis message MEASUREMENT_RESULT /GSM 08.58:8.4.8/. Idle Channel Measurements The RBS can perform signal strength measurements of disturbances on all idle uplink dedicated channels. The function is set to on or off on full rate or half rate basis when the TS is congured by the BSC. Measurements of signal strength are made over an averaging period. The averaging period species the number of measurement periods from which an average value is to be calculated. The averaging period is specied for each TS by the BSC. 23.3.2 220 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Channel Measurements The measurements of signal strength are referred to the RX reference point. An R.M.S. value is formed for each timeslot. The logarithm of this value, expressed in dBm, is coded as dened for RXLEV in /GSM 05.08:8.1.4/. The average value is calculated from the RXLEV value, After Initiation, a rst average value is calculated after two completed measurement periods. The second value is calculated when the rst averaging period is completed. After this, a new average value is calculated after each new measurement, that is a sliding window principle is used where the oldest value within the averaging period is replaced by the new one. The average value is classied into one of ve Interference Level Bands. Results from idle channel measurements are reported via the Abis message RF_RESOURCE_INDICATION /GSM 08.58:8.6.1/. This is done when the rst value has been calculated and thereafter when the calculated average value is classied into a new Interference Level Band. Operational Conditions The measurements of R.M.S. signal level full the requirements in /
GSM:05.08:8.1.2/. When applicable, exceptions are stated within the context of Radio Reception. The measurements of RXQUAL full the requirements in /GSM 05.08:8.2/, that is for BER from < 0.2 % to > 12.8 %. The MEASUREMENT_RESULT message and the RF_RESOURCE_INDICATION message are sent during the following reporting period. 23.4 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 221 (421) Channel Measurements This page is intentionally left blank 222 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 24 Discontinuous Transmission Discontinuous Transmission
"Discontinuous Transmission" is a mechanism which allows the radio transmitter to be switched off during speech or data (non-transparent) pauses. The following benets are achieved:
The overall interference level on the air is reduced Power is saved in the MS uplink Reduced RBS power consumption downlink The RBS supports downlink DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) as well as uplink DTX. 24.1 References
/GSM:04.06/
/GSM:04.21/
/GSM:05.02/
/GSM:05.08/
/GSM:06.12/
/GSM:06.22/
/GSM:06.31/
/GSM:06.32/
/GSM:06.41/
/GSM:06.42/
/GSM:06.81/
GSM 04.06 (phase 2) version 4.1.0 GSM 04.21 (phase 2) version 4.2.1 GSM 05.02 (phase 2) version 4.3.0 GSM 05.08 (phase 2) version 4.6.0 GSM 06.12 (phase 2) version 4.0.1 GSM 06.22 (phase 2) version 4.0.0 GSM 06.31 (phase 2) version 4.0.0 GSM 06.32 (phase 2) version 4.0.1 GSM 06.41 (phase 2) version 4.0.0 GSM 06.42 (phase 2) version 4.0.0 GSM 06.81 (phase 2) (t.b.d)
/GSM:08.20/
Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. GSM 08.20 (phase 2) version 4.1.0 24.2 24.2.1 Functions DTX Downlink The DTX function is described in:
/GSM:06.12/
Comfort Noise Aspects
/GSM:06.22/
/GSM:06.31/
/GSM:06.32/
/GSM:06.41/
Comfort Noise Aspects (half rate speech) Overall DTX Operation (full rate speech) Voice Activity Detection (full rate speech) Overall DTX Operation (half rate speech) EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 223 (421) Discontinuous Transmission
/GSM:06.42/
/GSM:06.81/
Voice Activity Detection (half rate speech) Overall DTX Operation (enhanced full rate speech) TCH speech, full rate (GSM speech alg. version 1), uni-directional TCH speech, full rate (Speech full rate version 2), bi-directional TCH speech, full rate (Speech full rate version 2), uni-directional TCH speech, full rate (GSM speech alg. version 1), bi-directional The downlink DTX function is supported for channel modes:
TCH data, 14.4 kbit/s, non-transparent, uni-directional TCH data, 14.4 kbit/s, non-transparent, bi-directional TCH data, 9.6 kbit/s, non-transparent, uni-directional TCH data, 9.6 kbit/s, non-transparent, bi-directional TCH speech, half rate TCH data, 4.8 kbit/s, non-transparent (Only half rate supported)
(i) TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/TF For all other Channel Modes, the DTXd indicator is ignored, since the DTX function is not applicable. Channel combinations supported /GSM:05.02:6.4/:
(ii) TCH/H(0,1) + FACCH/H(0,1) + SACCH/TH(0,1)
(viii) TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/M
(ix) TCH/F + SACCH/M
(x) TCH/FD + SACCH/MD The downlink DTX function is enabled when a CHANNEL_ACTIVATION message, or a MODE_MODIFY message with the DTX downlink indicator set, is received from the BSC. The downlink DTX function for speech is initiated when a speech frame containing comfort noise parameters, is received from the RTC
(Remote Transcoder). The downlink DTX function for non-transparent data is initiated when a complete RLP (Radio Link Protocol) frame, with all E1-bits /
GSM:04.21/ set to 1, is received from the RTC. DTX Handling Speech The usage of downlink DTX (ON/OFF) is indicated (as a ag) in the full rate RTH-SPEECH-IND/RTH-E-SPEECH-IND, half rate RTH-
SPEECH-IND and RTH- IDLE SPEECH-IND frames to the RTC. To detect if a full rate RTH-SPEECH-IND/RTH-E-SPEECH-IND or half rate RTH-SPEECH-IND frame (received from the RTC) contains speech or comfort noise parameters /GSM:06.32 / or /GSM:06.42/, RBS analyses the SID code word /GSM:06.12:5.2/, /GSM:06.62:5.3/ or /
GSM:06.22:5.3/. 224 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Discontinuous Transmission SID frames (including comfort noise parameters) are scheduled in TDMA frames according to /GSM:05:08:8.3/. When a SID frame is stolen for signalling (FACCH) purposes, the scheduling in TDMA frames will instead be according to /GSM:06.31:5.1.2/, /
GSM:06.41:5.1.2/ or /GSM:06.81:5.1.2/. The output power is turned off during periods of silence, except in the following cases:
Transmission of SID frames (comfort noise parameters) Transmission on a C0 carrier (dummy bursts) Transmission of signalling (FACCH) Transmission on a transmitter congured for lling (dummy bursts) 24.2.2 DTX Handling Non-transparent Data To detect idle data transmission in the downlink direction, the E1-bits of a complete RLP frame received from the RTC, are analysed /
GSM:08.20:4.2/. This frame is not transmitted on the air interface. When idle data transmission is detected, an L2 (Layer 2 protocol) ll frame /GSM:04.06:5.4.2.3/ is transmitted (on FACCH) in the SID positions of the TDMA frame according to /GSM:05:08:8:3/. The output power is turned off during periods of idle data transmission, as described in the section DTX handling speech above. DTX Uplink The DTXu indicator (of element Channel Mode) in the CHANNEL_ACTIVATION or MODE_MODIFY messages from the BCS is ignored, since the RBS is always prepared to handle uplink DTX. The uplink DTX function is supported for the following services:
TCH speech, half rate (GSM speech alg. version 1) TCH speech, full rate (GSM speech alg. version 1) TCH speech, full rate (Speech full rate version 2) TCH speech, full rate (Speech full rate version 2) bidirectional TCH speech, full rate (GSM speech alg. version 1) bidirectional Data frames (transparent and non-transparent) are passed transparently from the MS to the RTC without consideration to DTX. To detect if a speech frame (received from MS) contains speech or comfort noise parameters, RBS analyses the SID code word /
GSM:06.12:5.2/, /GSM:06.62:5.3/or /GSM:06.22:5.3/. An indication of comfort noise parameters (SID ag), is sent in the full rateRTH-
SPEECH-IND/RTH-E-SPEECH-IND or half rate RTH-SPEECH-IND frames to the RTC. Full Rate EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 225 (421) Discontinuous Transmission During periods of silence, RTH-SPEECH-IND with the silence indicator (SID) set to "3" are sent to the RTC in case when GSM speech alg. version 1 are used. If, during periods of silence, Speech full rate version 2 are used, RTH-SPEECH-IND frames are sent to the RTC with the BFI set. Half Rate During periods of silence, RTH-SPEECH-IND frames are sent to the RTC with the BFI set. 226 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 25 Frequency Hopping Frequency Hopping
"Frequency hopping" means that the radio frequency channel of a BPC may change on a per TDMA frame basis. Frequency hopping improves the quality of the transmission on the air interface. The Frequency hopping function is used to increase the efciency of the channel coding and interleaving in the following situations:
Multipath (or Rayleigh) fading Is often frequency-dependent. In case of a dip, changing of frequencies reduces this problem. Interference problems Without frequency hopping, a connection may experience high interference for a long time. With frequency hopping this time is shortened. However, frequency hopping does not reduce the overall system interference level, but averages it. There are two types of frequency hopping available:
Baseband hopping Synthesizer hopping 25.1 References
/GSM 08.58/
GSM 08.58 (phase 2) version: 4.2.0
/GSM 05.02/
Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. GSM 05.02 (phase 2) version: 4.3.0 25.2 Concepts Baseband Hopping Synthesizer Hopping Each transmitter will always transmit on the same frequency. The physical channel data will be sent from different transmitters with every burst. The physical channel data will be sent from the same transmitter all the time. But the transmitter will use a new frequency with every burst. 25.3 Function Frequency hopping is provided on a slot-by-slot basis according to /
GSM:05.02.6.2/. Supported channel combinations /GSM:05.02:6.4/:
(ii) TCH/H(0,1) + FACCH/H(0,1) + SACCH/TH(0,1)
(i) TCH/F+FACCH/F+SACCH/TF
(vii) SDCCH/8 [0..7]+SACCH/C8 [0..7]
EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 227 (421) Frequency Hopping Bm + ACCH Supported channel numbers are:
SDCCH/8 + ACCH Lm + ACCH This function is initiated when a CHANNEL_ACTIVATION message /
GSM:08.58:8.4.1/ is received from the BSC. The information element Channel Identication as dened in /
GSM:08.58:9.3.5/ is ignored. The BPC must have already been congured for frequency hopping by the BSC (OML link). All frequency hopping parameters are dened for each BPC at conguration, and cannot be changed at channel activation. Frequency hopping is performed according to /GSM: 05.02:6.2.3/. Frequency hopping is not supported for the BPC carrying BCCH. Other BPCs on the BCCH frequency can be frequency hopping when baseband hopping is used. The following conguration parameters are used for administration of frequency hopping, the parameters are used in the frequency hopping algorithms as described in /GSM: 05.02:6.2.3/. Table 118 Conguration parameters Parameter Supported values Description HSN
/GSM: 05.02 6.2.2/
Hopping Sequence Number 0 = cyclic hopping 1-63 = random hopping MAIO
/GSM: 05.02:6.2.2/
Mobile Allocation Index Offset Frequency list 1-64 elds Information element to provide a list of the ARFCNs used in a frequency hopping sequence 25.4 Operational Conditions Both baseband and synthesizer frequency hopping are supported. A maximum of 64 frequencies can be used in the hopping sequence. 228 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 26 Encryption Encryption Encryption is used for ciphering and deciphering of information to and from an MS over a dedicated resource. The RBS supports two encryption modes, either using no encryption or using a GSM encryption algorithm. The BSC controls which encryption mode is used. There are two product variants with different encryption algorithms implemented:
No encryption GSM encryption algorithm version 1 (A5/1). No encryption GSM encryption algorithm version 2 (A5/2). 26.1 References
/GSM 04.08/
/GSM 08.58/
GSM 04.08 (phase 2) version 4.7.0 GSM 08.58 (phase 2) version 4.7.0 Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. 26.2 Start Encryption at Channel Activation Purpose To initiate encryption mode on a dedicated logical channel. Precondition and initiation The function starts encryption if element "Encryption Information" is provided in the "CHANNEL_ACTIVATION" message. Element "Encryption Information" is optional when the Channel Activation types are:
Normal Assign Asynchronous Handover Synchronous Handover Multislot Conguration Supported channel numbers: /GSM 05.02:6.4/
Element "Encryption Information" is not supported for Channel Activation type "Immediate Assign". Access burst, which is received from MS at handover access, is not deciphered. SDCCH/8 + ACCH SDCCH/4 + ACCH (and TN=0) Bm + ACCH Lm + ACCH EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 229 (421) Encryption This function is initiated during the set up of an encrypted channel between MS and RBS. The BSC controls initiation of encryption mode. Description To set up a dedicated logical channel, encryption mode has to be set. The RBS supports two encryption modes, "No encryption shall be used"and "encryption" (encrypted by a specic GSM encryption algorithm), see /GSM 08.58/. The RBS receives information of which encryption mode to use, from BSC in a Channel_Activation message containing "Encryption Information" (via ABIS RSL interface). This command starts the function, and the trafc channel is encrypted according to chosen algorithm. The function is terminated when a "Channel_Activation_ Acknowledge"
is sent to BSC. 26.3 Encryption Mode Change Purpose This function is used to change the encryption mode (key and algorithm) on an established dedicated channel. Precondition and initiation Encryption Mode change is dened in the section above. This function is initiated when RBS receives an Encryption Command from BSC. Description The RBS starts deciphering when the encryption command is received. A Ciphering Mode Command is sent to start the encryption at the MS. The MS then sends a Ciphering Mode Complete /GSM 04.08:-9.1.10/
as an acknowledgement to the RBS. When the RBS receives a Ciphering Mode Complete, the encryption is initiated in the network, and a DI (Data Indication) is sent back to the BSC. 230 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Encryption MS BTS BSC Encryption CMD RR (SDCCH) RR (SDCCH) Ciph Mode CMD Ciph Mode Com DI (Ciph Mode Com) P003010A Figure 95 26.4 Encryption Mode Change at Mode Modify Purpose This function is used to change the encryption mode (key and algorithm) on an active dedicated channel group. Preconditions and initiation Encryption is either activated or deactivated. The function is initiated when the RBS receives a MODE_MODIFY_COMMAD message from BSC. Description The message (MODE_MODIFY_COMMAD) contains the new key and algorithm to use. The ciphering key and algorithm identier can be changed to any valid value. If "Algorithm Identier" is "No encryption shall be used", the RBS updates the key by clearing the stored key and ciphering is stopped /
GSM 04.08:3.4.7/. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 231 (421) Encryption This page is intentionally left blank 232 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 27 27.1 27.2 Mode Modify Mode Modify The "Mode Modify" procedure is used by BSC to request a change of the channel mode (speech to data, data to speech, and so forth) of an active channel. References
/GSM 05.02/
GSM 05.02 (phase2) version 4.3.0
/GSM 08.58/
Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. GSM 08.58 (phase2) version 4.2.0 Function By means of the MODE MODIFY procedure /GSM: 08.58:4.2./ BSC orders RBS to change channel mode of an active dedicated channel group. Supported channel combinations /GSM:05.02:6.4/:
(ii) TCH/H(0.1) + FACCH/H(0.1) + SACCH/TH(0.1)
(viii) TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/M
(i) TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/TF
(ix) TCH/F + SACCH/M
(x) TCH/FD + SACCH/MD RBS actions:
Channel Mode Modication Interpretation of MODE_MODIFY message from BSC The function is initiated when a MODE_MODIFY message /
GSM:08.58:8.4.9/, is received from BSC. Any transition between the following full rate channel modes /GSM:08.58:9.3.6/ is supported:
TCH/F Signalling TCH/FS TCH/FS Full rate speech, GSM speech alg. ver 1 Full rate speech, GSM speech alg. ver 2 TCH/F14.4 NT Full rate data 14.4 kbit/s non-transparent TCH/F9.6 NT Full rate data 9.6 kbit/s non-transparent TCH/F9.6 TCH/F4.8 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 Full rate data 9.6 kbit/s transparent Full rate data 4.8 kbit/s transparent Full rate data 2.4 kbit/s transparent Full rate data 1.2 kbit/s transparent Full rate data 1200/75 bit/s transparent EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 233 (421) Mode Modify Full rate data 600 bit/s transparent TCH/F2.4 Any transition between the following full rate, multislot, Channel Modes is supported:
TCH/F Signalling, Bi-directional (not allowed on channel combination ix) TCH/FS TCH/FS TCH/F14.4 NT TCH/F9.6 NT TCH/F14.4 TCH/F9.6 TCH/F4.8 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/FS TCH/FS TCH/F14.4 NT TCH/F9.6 NT TCH/F9.6 TCH/F4.8 Full rate speech, GSM speech alg. ver 1 Bi-directional Full rate speech, GSM speech alg. ver 2 Bi-directional Full rate data 14.4 kbit/s non-transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 9.6 kbit/s non-transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 14.4 kbit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 9.6 kbit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 4.8 kbit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 2.4kbit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 1.2 kbit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 1200/75 bit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate data 600 bit/s transparent, Bi-directional Full rate speech, GSM speech alg. ver 1 Uni-directional Full rate speech, GSM speech alg. ver 2 Uni-directional Full rate data 14.4 kbit/s non-transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 9.6 kbit/s non-transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 9.6 kbit/s transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 4.8 kbit/s transparent, Uni-directional 234 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 TCH/F2.4 Mode Modify Full rate data 2.4 kbit/s transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 1.2 kbit/s transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 1200/75 bit/s transparent, Uni-directional Full rate data 600 bit/s transparent, Uni-directional Any transition between the following half rate Channel Modes/
GSM:08.58:4.2/ is supported:
TCH/H Signalling TCH/HS TCH/H4.8 TCH/H4.8 TCH/H2.4 TCH/H2.4 TCH/H2.4 Half rate speech Half rate data 4.8 kbit/s non-transparent Half rate data 4.8 kbit/s transparent Half rate data 2.4 kbit/s transparent Half rate data 1.2 kbit/s transparent Half rate data 1200/75 kbit/s transparent TCH/H2.4 Half rate data 600 bit/s transparent Mode change between full rate channels, half rate channels and multislot channels is not accepted. Mode change between secondary channels are supported. The Mode Modify message has one optional element:
"Encryption information". RBS checks the availability of the requested resources and acknowledges the MODE_MODIFY message by sending a MODE_MODIFY_ACKNOWLEDGE message /GSM:08.58:8.4.10./ or a MODE_MODIFY_NEGATIVE_ACKNOWLEDGE message /
GSM:08.58:8.4.11./ to the BSC. The MODE_MODIFY_ACKNOWLEDGE message to BSC is not related to the Air Interface. That is, the acknowledgement will be sent before the actual transmission is started. If the Mode Modify procedure fails after the MODE_MODIFY_ACKNOWLEDGE message has been sent, a CONNECTION_FAILURE_INDICATION /GSM:08.58:8.4.4/ message is sent to BSC and the channel mode is changed to the mode requested in the MODE_MODIFY message. If the MODE_MODIFY_NEGATIVE_ACKNOWLEDGE message is sent to the BSC, the channel mode is left unchanged (same as before the MODE_MODIFY message was received). After the positive acknowledgement of the MODE_MODIFY message, the active service is deactivated and the requested service is activated. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 235 (421) Mode Modify 27.3 Operational Conditions The maximum delay from reception of a MODE_MODIFY command until the command is acknowledged
(MODE_MODIFY_ACKNOWLEDGEMENT or MODE_MODIFY_NEGATIVE_ACKNOWLEDGEMENT) is 25 ms. 236 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 28 Mobile Station Power Control Mobile Station Power Control By means of the "MS Power Control" procedure /GSM:08.58:- 4.8/, BSC gives RBS the power level to be used by MS, on a dedicated resource. MS power control is employed to minimise the transmit power required by the MS while maintaining the quality of the radio links. By minimising the transmit power levels, interference to co-channel users is reduced. Functionality supported:
MS power control, at channel activation MS power control, for an active channel Channel Activation function is not described here. 28.1 References
/GSM 04.04/
/GSM 05.02/
GSM 04.04 (phase2) version 4.0.0 GSM 05.02 (phase2) version 4.3.0 28.2 28.2.1
/GSM 08.58/
Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. GSM 08.58 (phase2) version 4.2.0 Functions Bm + ACCH MS Power Control at Channel Activation Supported channel numbers:
SDCCH/4 + ACCH and TN = 0 SDCCH/8 + ACCH Lm + ACCH
(i) TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/TF Supported channel combinations /GSM:05.02:6.4/:
(ii) TCH/H(0.1) + FACCH/H(0.1) + SACCH/TH(0.1)
(v) FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH+SDCCH/4(0..3)+SACCH/
C4(0..3)
(vii) SDCCH/8(0..7) + SACCH/C8(0..7)
(viii) TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/M
(ix) TCH/F + SACCH/M
(x) TCH/FD + SACCH/MD RBS actions:
Storage of MS power level EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 237 (421) Mobile Station Power Control Order MS to set the commanded power level Description The function is initiated when a CHANNEL_ACTIVATION message /
GSM:08.58:8.4.1/ containing MS Power is received from the BSC. The value of the ordered MS power /GSM:08.58:9.3.13/ is passed transparently to the MS. RBS stores the MS power level received from BSC and includes it in the L1 header of all downlink SACCH blocks /GSM:04.04:7.1/. 28.2.2 MS Power Control for an Active Channel Supported channel numbers and Supported channel combinations /
GSM:05.02:6.4/, see the section above. RBS actions:
Interpretation of the MS_POWER_CONTROL message Order MS to set the commanded power level Storage of MS power level Description The function is initiated when an MS_POWER_CONTROL message /
GSM:08.58:8.4.15/ containing MS Power is received from the BSC for an active dedicated channel. The value of the ordered MS Power /GSM:08.58:9.3.13/ is passed transparently to the MS. The MS Power parameters /GSM:08.58:9.3.31/ is not supported by the RBS. RBS stores the MS power level received from BSC and includes it in the L1 header of all downlink SACCH blocks /GSM:04.04:7.1/. It overwrites the MS power value set by any previous "Channel Activation" or "MS Power Control" functions. 28.2.3 MS Power Control at Channel Reactivation SeeSection 28.2.1 on page 237. 238 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 29 Short Message Service Short Message Service SMS P-P (Short Message Service Point-to-Point) provides a means of sending messages of limited size to and from a mobile. SMSCB (Short Message Service Cell Broadcast) is a service in which short messages may be broadcast to all mobiles in a cell. RBS Functionality supported:
SMS Point-to-point, Mobile Terminated SMS Point-to-point, Mobile Originated SMS Cell Broadcast The SMS P-P function is based on the following functions, not described in this specication:
Link Establishment Transparent Message Transfer Link Release 29.1 References
/GSM 04.12/
/GSM 05.02/
GSM 04.12 (phase2) version 3.2.1 GSM 05.02 (phase2) version 4.3.0 29.2 29.2.1
/GSM 08.58/
Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. GSM 08.58 (phase2) version 4.2.0 Functions SMS Point-to-Point, Mobile Terminated RBS supports:
Transparent transmission of SMS messages Release of a SAPI-3 link Establishment of a SAPI-3 (Service Access Point Identier 3) link Supported logical channels /GSM:05.02:3.3.4/:
SDCCH/4 Stand-Alone Dedicated Control Channel/4 SDCCH/8 SACCH/TF SACCH/TH Stand-Alone Dedicated Control Channel/8 Slow Associated Control Channel, full rate trafc Slow Associated Control Channel, half rate trafc Supported channel combinations /GSM:05.02:6.4/:
(i) TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/TF EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 239 (421) Short Message Service
(ii) TCH/H(0.1) + FACCH/H(0.1) + SACCH/TH(0.1)
(v) FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH+SDCCH/4(0..3)+SACCH/
C4(0..3)
(vii) SDCCH/8(0..7) + SACCH/C8(0..7)
(viii) TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/M The SMS P-P MT function is initiated when an ESTABLISH REQUEST message for a SAPI-3 link is received from the BSC. SMS P-P MT messages are transmitted as transparent L3 (Layer 3) messages (in acknowledged mode), on a SAPI-3 link between the network and the MSs. SAPI-3 link establishment and release is made on request from BSC. The function is terminated when a RELEASE_CONFIRM message is sent to the BSC, as a result of a SAPI-3 link release. 29.2.2 29.2.3 SMS Point-to-Point, Mobile Originated RBS RBS supports:
Transparent transmission of SMS messages Establishment of a SAPI-3 link Release of a SAPI-3 link See section above for:
Supported logical channels Supported channel combinations The SMS P-P MO function is initiated when a SABM frame (link layer connection) is received from an MS. SMS P-P MO messages are transmitted as transparent L3-messages (in acknowledged mode), on a SAPI-3 link between the network and the MSs. SAPI-3 link establishment and release is made on request from MS. The function is terminated when a RELEASE_INDICATION message is sent to the BSC, as a result of a SAPI-3 link release. SMS Cell Broadcast This procedure is used by the BSC to request the RBS for transmission of SMS cell broadcast messages on the logical channel CBCH/
GSM:08.58:5.6/. The BSC handles the queuing and repetition of the SMSCB messages, taking the capacity of CBCH into account. Supported Logical Channels /GSM:05.02:3.3.5/:
CBCH Cell Broadcast Channel, allocated on SDCCH sub-channel 2 Supported Channel Combinations /GSM:05.02:6.4/:
(v) FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH + SDCCH/4[0.1,3] +
SACCH/C4[0.1,3] + CBCH
(vii) SDCCH/8[0.1,3..7] + SACCH/C8[0.1,3..7] + CBCH 240 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Short Message Service Interpretation of SMS_BROADCAST_REQUEST messages RBS Actions:
Transmission of SMSCB messages Transmission of CBCH Fill-frame Description Conguration parameter CBCH Ind must be set to 1, to indicate the usage of SDCCH sub-channel 2, for SMSCB messages. Transmission of SMSCB messages on channel combination (vii) requires that conguration parameter BS_AG_BLKS_RES is set to a value greater than zero, /GSM:05.02:6.5.4/ /GSM:05.02:3.3.2.3/. The function is initiated when the rst (out of four) SMS_BROADCAST_REQUEST message is received from the BSC. Four SMS_BROADCAST_REQUEST messages together make a complete SMSCB message. All four blocks must be available before any transmission on the CBCH channel can take place. Each SMS_BROADCAST_REQUEST message contains a complete frame (including a Message type eld = Layer 2 header) /GSM:04.12:3/
, to be transmitted on the CBCH channel. The Message Type eld contains a sequence number, used to check the order of arrival. The correct order of arrival is dened as: 0.1,2,3. The SMSCB messages are transmitted in four consecutive multiframes /
GSM:05.02:6.5.4/ during periods when TB = 0, 1, 2 and 3. CBCH Fill-frames are transmitted on the CBCH channel when TB=0, 1, 2 and 3, and no SMSCB message is available for transmission. Nothing is transmitted for TB = 4, 5, 6 and 7. TB = (FN DIV 51) MOD 8
(where FN = Frame Number). A CBCH ll-frame consists of:
1 octet, Message Type /GSM:04.12:3.3.1/ with Sequence Number
= F (hex) 22 octets=2B (hex) Operational Conditions SMS MT/MO P-P The maximum length of a message can be 140 octets or 160 SMS characters. SMS Cell Broadcast The transmission time over the air interface for one SMSCB message (4 blocks, 23 octets each) is:
4 * 51 * 120/26 milliseconds = 0.941 seconds. The maximum sending intensity is one message per 1.88 seconds (4 blocks of data and 4 empty frames).RBS provides storage capacity for two complete SMSCB messages. 29.3 29.3.1 29.3.2 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 241 (421) Short Message Service This page is intentionally left blank 242 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Diversity Supervision 30 Diversity Supervision The "Diversity Supervision" function supervises the signal strength imbalance between the two diversity channels in an RBS with receiver diversity. The function is capable of detecting major faults in the radio receiver paths or the receiver antenna system. 30.1 References
/GSM:05.08/
GSM Requirements 05.08 Phase 2 version 4.6.0 Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. 30.2 Concepts Measurement Period Observation Period The Measurement Period corresponds to the "reporting period" of the radio link measurements as specied in /GSM 05.08/
. The Measurement Period is dened only for dedicated channels. Basic channel measurements on dedicated channels, as the signal strength measurements, are made for each Measurement Period The Observation Period denes a time window during which the signal strength relationship between the two diversity channels is observed before any decision regarding a possible disturbance is taken. Channel Utilisation Threshold The Channel Utilisation Threshold (CUT) is the criterion for an active dedicated channel to be regarded as utilised. It is that the receiver signal strength is above a certain level on at least one of the diversity channels. The Channel Utilisation Threshold is characterised by the required signal strength. Channel Utilisation Ratio Minimum CUR The Channel Utilisation Ratio (CUR) is dened here as the relative rate of utilisation of a dedicated channel or a set of dedicated channels during a certain period of time. The CUR is calculated per observation period. (It is the same for both of the receivers diversity channels.) The Minimum Channel Utilisation Ratio is the lowest CUR at which the receiver diversity is supervised. The minimum CUR is applied to the entire transceiver EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 243 (421) Diversity Supervision Signal Strength Imbalance Disturbance Threshold The SSI (Signal Strength Imbalance) is dened here as the mean difference (in decibels) between the receivers two diversity channels. The SSI is calculated per observation period The Disturbance Threshold denes the limit for the signal strength imbalance, at which it is classied as abnormal and is regarded as a disturbance 30.3 Function The signal strengths of the two diversity channels are measured and compared after the signals have passed through radio receiver equipment. The diversity supervision is applied to dedicated channels only. The following actions are carried out separately for each TS:
The signal strengths are measured separately for the two diversity channels during all measurement periods for all dedicated channel connections which qualify for the channel utilisation threshold criterion In order to avoid degradation from possible DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) employed by MS, the signal strength measurements on TCH are restricted to the subset of 4 SACCH frames and 8 SID
(Silence Descriptor) TDMA frames as dened in /GSM 05.08/. The CURiis calculated for the TS during each observation period The SSIivalue is calculated for the TS during each observation period The CURi and the SSIi values from all TSs are then evaluated together. The corresponding transceiver gross measures are calculated for each observation period:
SSI = i (SSIi * CURi) / i CURi ; i = 0..7 CUR = i CURi / i 1 ; i = 0..7 A disturbance is assumed to exist when both of the following criteria are fullled:
The gross CUR exceeds the minimum channel utilisation ratio The value of the gross SSI exceeds the disturbance threshold A fault is reported after ltering of the detected disturbances. The fault condition ceases only after a leaky bucket lter is emptied by a number of valid observation periods without disturbances. Only those observation periods where the gross CUR exceeds the minimum channel utilisation ratio are taken into account in the ltering process. This means that a fault condition is only raised or ceased during valid observation periods. 244 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Diversity Supervision 30.4 Operational Conditions The diversity supervision is characterised by a number of parameters which are implemented as software constants. The parameter values are selected so that the risk of false disturbances during normal operation is negligible:
Table 119 Preliminary diversity supervision parameters Observation period Channel utilisation threshold Minimum channel utilisation ratio Disturbance threshold 5 minutes
-96 dBm 5 %
12 dB The disturbance lter characteristics will give the time to alarm. If 100% of the observation periods causes a disturbance, the time to alarm will be 50 minutes. If the disturbance ratio is less than 50% no alarm will be raised. If 100% of the observation periods indicates no disturbance, the alarm will be terminated after 100 minutes. If the disturbance ratio is more than 15%, the alarm will not be terminated. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 245 (421) Diversity Supervision This page is intentionally left blank 246 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Synchronization 31 Synchronization The purpose of this function is to synchronize an RBS internally. The function is needed to achieve air timeslot synchronization, according to
/GSM:05.10/ and /JTC PCS:7/. The transition between different states and functions can be seen in the gure below. Startup Free running clock Establishing sync. state Selection of ref. source Locking to ref.source Hold over time expired Hold over state Sync. established Synchronized state Hold over operation Supervision of ref. source Selection of ref. source Sync. reestablished ESB Distribution
(Master mode) Ref. source is not usable Timing compensation
(Slave mode) Selection of ref. source ESB Distribution
(Master mode) Synchronizing to ref. source Supervision of ref. source Timing compensation
(Slave mode) P005514B Synchronization function states Figure 96 Short-term stability of the timing is achieved by the RBS itself. The long-term stability of the RBS will rely on an external or an optional synchronization reference. The external synchronization reference is taken from one of the two PCM interfaces in the transport network interface or from another RBS via the External Synchronization Bus, ESB. The optional synchronization reference is taken from an optional synchronization function in the RBS. The three possible sources for synchronization are handled in the same way by the synchronization function. The BSC is able to request that either the transport network, the optional synchronization function or another RBS to be used for synchronization. The synchronization function can have three different modes:
Stand-alone EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 247 (421) Synchronization In this mode the RBS uses an incoming PCM-reference or the optional reference as synchronization reference. The RBS is not synchronized with any other RBS. Master In this mode the RBS uses an incoming PCM-reference or the optional reference as synchronization reference. The generated timing is also distributed to other RBSes in the RBS cluster via the ESB. Slave In this mode the RBS uses another RBS as synchronization reference. The RBS is synchronized with another RBS, congured as Master, in the RBS cluster via the ESB. The mode is set by BSC. Default mode is internally set to Stand-alone. The Master and Slave modes are used to synchronize RBSes within an RBS cluster with each other. The different RBSes within the RBS cluster work together according to the master and slave logic, see the gure below. One of the RBSes is selected as master by the BSC, and the other RBSes in the RBS cluster are congured as slaves. The master RBS synchronizes towards the PCM-reference or the optional reference. The slave RBS(es) synchronizes towards the master RBS via the ESB. Master RBS RBS Slave RBS(s) ESB RBS RBS Figure 97 Master slave logic of RBSes P005515A 31.1 References
/GSM 05.10/
/JTC PCS/
GSM TS 05.10 revision 4.3.0 JTC(AIR) 940904231R4 Technical Specication of PCS 1900 by the PCS 1900 Joint Technical Committee
/G.823/
Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. CCITT G.823, White Book Concepts Locking 31.2 248 (421) The process of acquiring a phase lock to the reference Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Synchronization Synchronizing The process of maintaining a phase lock to the reference Internal Source An internal short-term stable oscillator Optional Reference An optional frequency reference source built into the RBS PCM-reference A frequency reference extracted from the PCM-network External Synchronization Bus (ESB) A bus for distribution of synchronization information between RBSes in an RBS cluster RBS cluster Two or more RBSes connected together via an External Synchronization Bus 31.3 Synchronizing to the Reference Source Purpose The short-term stable oscillator built into the RBS needs to have a long-
term stable synchronization reference. The function provides the RBS with the long-term synchronization source. Precondition and Initiation The function is initiated by two separate events:
Synchronization established When synchronization is re-established after hold-over operation Description The RBS has its own short-term stable oscillator; this internal source is locked to the reference source. The generated frequency is used for both RF frequency and for clocking of the timebase counters (see /
GSM:05.10:3/ and /JTC PCS:71/). The same source is used for all carriers. Termination The function is terminated by three separate events:
1. The executive reference source is considered faulty by the supervision function. 2. 3. Note:
The control values of the RBS short-term frequency source of the TU are persistently at limit values. Reconguration of TF mode to Slave. It is not possible to change TF mode to Slave in enabled state. Operational Conditions Synchronization is reached as noted below from function initiation. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 249 (421) Synchronization Cold start RBS is synchronized and Reset command received on ABIS RBS is synchronized and Start command after Function Change is received Warm start Transmission network or other RBS as source Optional frequency source For both network and optional Transmission network, Optional frequency source or other RBS as source Transmission network, Optional frequency source or other RBS as source 5 minutes 10 minutes 10 seconds 30 seconds Transmission network, Optional frequency source or other RBS as source 90 s when there is not jitter in the synch. source 31.4 Selection of the Reference Source Purpose The purpose is to increase the systems air time; that is to say, the possibility to use different synchronization sources decreases the possibility for system failure caused by lack of a synchronization source. Precondition and Initiation The PCM reference must be marked available in order to be considered for selection. The function is initiated by one of the following events:
"Hold-over expired time" is reached (see Hold-over Operation) Synchronization reference source is re-established in Hold-over state Start-up of RBS At TF (Timing Function) conguration When locking to the reference source is terminated without successful locking Description The function decides which reference source is to be used for synchronization; that is to say, PCM interface, optional reference or other RBS. The choice depends on the type of equipment installed and parameters received at TF conguration according to the table below. Units equipped with an optional reference source will always use this option as default. By a command over A-bis it is possible to change between the optional reference source (if installed) and the PCM interface. 250 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Synchronization Table 120 TF Cong. Parameters TF Mode TF Synch. Source Type Selected Synch. Source Type Optional Synch. HW No Optional Synch. HW Not dened Master/
Stand-alone Not dened Not dened PCM Internal Optional Optional PCM Optional Slave Does not care Other RBS PCM PCM PCM PCM 1) Other RBS 1) Rejected by the Capability Conformance Check function. If the transport network is used for synchronization, the executive reference is taken from PCM interface A at start-up of the RBS on condition that interface A is available for synchronization and is fault free. Otherwise PCM interface B is selected if it is available and fault free. The executive reference may change from one of the PCM interfaces to the other when signal on the executive reference is lost (AIS, LOF or LOS condition on the selected executive reference, see function Supervision of Reference Source), provided that a signal is detected at the other interface and that the other reference is marked "available". The function is terminated when a new executive reference source has been selected or if the executive PCM reference regains its synchronization signal before a reselection is attempted or if a reselection is made to another synchronization source. There is no momentary change in phase or frequency of the RBS caused by reselection of synchronization source. 31.5 Hold-Over Operation Purpose If the reference signal is considered not to be usable, the RBS cannot use its values for regulation of the internal oscillator. The Hold-over operation function keeps the RBS synchronized for a period of time even though the reference signal is not present. Precondition and Initiation The function is initiated when the reference signal is not usable. Description The function when initiated freezes the control panel parameters for the internal oscillator at the present value, meaning that the oscillator frequency is kept constant except for ageing and temperature drift. The RBS will still be considered as synchronized and the supervision of the reference source will continue. After 5 minutes lack of reference signal known as "Hold-over entered time" a fault is sent to the BSC reporting EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 251 (421) Synchronization the lack of reference source. This fault actually implies for an ITU-T G.703 2048 kbit/s system that the reference on both PCM-A and PCM-
B is not usable. If the RBS has not regained its synchronization either by re-establishment or reselection within 60 minutes (when TF mode is master and stand-alone) and within 15 minutes (when TF mode is slave), it is reported to the BSC which orders the RBS to disable all radio transmission. This maximum time for the internal oscillator to guarantee synchronization quality is known as "Hold-over expired time". The function is terminated when the reference source is considered as usable or after "Hold-over expired time". 31.6 Supervision of Reference Source Purpose The function should decide if the reference source is to be considered as usable or not. This is done by supervision of the synchronization source as well as the quality of the synchronization signal. Precondition and Initiation The function is initiated when synchronization to the reference source is established. Description Depending on if the PCM interface or the Optional reference source or another RBS is used as a reference, the following criteria are used for evaluation of the reference source. PCM interface as reference:
LOS (Loss Of Signal), LOF (Loss Of Frame alignment) or AIS
(Alarm Indication Signal) detected by physical interface. Illegal high jitter and wander characteristics. The limit is specied in /G.823/. Illegal high relative frequency deviation. The limit is 0.1 ppm. Optional reference source:
Failure of the optional reference source. Illegal high jitter and wander characteristics. The limit is specied in /G.823/. Illegal high relative frequency deviation. The limit is 0.1 ppm. Interruption. Other RBS as reference:
Correct and continuous frame number. Illegal high wander characteristics. The limit is specied in /
G.823/. Illegal high relative frequency deviation. The limit is 0.1 ppm. 252 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 The outcome of this continuous supervision of the reference is either that the reference is usable or not. The function terminates when
"Hold-over expired time" ends in "Hold-over state". Synchronization 31.7 Locking to the Reference Source Purpose The function supervises the locking process and limits the time for locking to the reference source. Precondition and Initiation The function is initiated when a locking attempt to a reference source is made. Description The function checks that the control values for the internal source have stabilised to within a range not including the highest and lowest values, with a margin. Depending if the PCM interface or the Optional reference source or another RBS is used as a reference, the following criteria are used for evaluation of the locking process. Locking to the PCM interface:
PCM-reference presence (detected by physical interface) Time, a time-out set at initiation The value of the oscillator control signal Non-failure status of the optional sync. function Locking to the optional reference:
Time, a time-out set at initiation The value of the oscillator control signal Locking to other RBS:
ESB synchronization presence Time; a time-out set at initiation The value of the oscillator control signal The time-out, which is 6 minutes, is in both cases used to disqualify a locking attempt that takes too long. A fault is sent to the BSC at time-
out, but the internal source will still try to lock an available reference. Limited functionality is reached within 4 minutes from function initiation. Calls can be established but performance criteria are not fullled, that is to say, the risk of dropped calls is higher. The function terminates when synchronization is established. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 253 (421) Synchronization 31.8 FN-Offset Purpose The purpose is to improve handover performance. If one RBS is congured for several cells and handover is done between two cells controlled by the same RBS, the handover execution time will be longer if the two cells are synchronized together. Precondition and Initiation The function is initiated by a request from the BSC. Description The FN (Frame Number) offset function makes it possible for a TRU at a site to use a dened offset from the TDMA number distributed from the central timing of the RBS. The offset value is added to the distributed TDMA frame number. The offset is congurable from the BSC per timeslot, the condition is that all timeslots must be disabled. Conguration of one timeslot will recongure all the others. The conguration is carried out by the Functionality Administration function. 31.9 ESB Distribution Purpose This function denes that the timing information is distributed on the ESB interface, when TF mode is dened or changed to master. Precondition and Initiation The function is initiated by two separate events:
At TF enable when TF mode is dened to master At TF conguration in enabled state when TF mode is changed to master Description The timing information is distributed on the ESB interface and the ESB measurement loop is closed. The function is terminated when TF state is changed from enabled, or TF mode is changed from master. 31.10 Timing Compensation Purpose This function displaces the internal timing bus towards the ESB with the TF compensation value received at TF conguration. Precondition and Initiation At TF conguration when TF mode is dened to Slave. 254 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Synchronization Description The timing difference between different carriers within a cell shall be less than 1/4 bit in the air (920 ns). To full this requirement the following delays must be compensated for:
the distribution delay on the external synchronization bus the transmitter chain delay (delays in transmitter, combiner, feeder and antenna) The BSC/OSS operator denes one RBS in the RBS cluster to master and the others to slave(s). For each slave the OMT operator also calculates and denes a TF compensation value. The TF compensation value is forwarded to the slave(s) at TF conguration. The operator uses the following formula to calculate the TF compensation value, TFcv, for each slave:
TFcv = master ttxd slave ttxd tesb tesb is the distribution delay on the external synchronization bus between the master and the slave. There can be different delays for each slave. Elements that affect this delay are cable length(s), cable type, cabinet type and the RBS-cluster topology. ttxd is the transmitter chain delay (delays in transmitter, combiner, feeder and antenna). There can be different delays for each RBS. A positive value on the TFcv indicates that the internal timing bus is delayed relative to the ESB. A negative value indicates that the internal timing bus is advanced relative to the ESB. The RBS also adopts the frame number from the ESB and distributes it on the internal timing bus. The function terminates when TF mode is changed from Slave. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 255 (421) Synchronization This page is intentionally left blank 256 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Radio Reception 32 Radio Reception Radio reception denes the function to receive an RF signal from the air interface and restore the bit stream. Diversity is used to improve the sensitivity on the receiver. It is achieved by having two antennas, and by that means take advantage of two or more receiver paths. 32.1 References GSM Requirements 05.04 Phase 2 GSM Requirements 05.05 Phase 2 For GSM 900 and GSM 1800:
/GSM 05.04/
/GSM 05.05/
For GSM 1900:
The references PCS: 4-6 are chapters in the document: Volume 1, PCS 1900 Physical Layer 1 Specication marked: JTC(AIR)94.08.01-231R3
/PCS 4/
/PCS 5/
/PCS 6/
Modulation Radio Transmission and Reception Radio Subsystem Link Control 32.2 Radio Reception Purpose To receive an RF signal and restore the bit stream that constitutes a burst. Precondition and initiation The ATSR must be in trafc. The reception initiates when the ATSR is taken into trafc. Description The RBS receives an RF signal from the MS on the air interface. First the signal is ltered in order to isolate the targeted MS signal from other transmission. Then the signal is amplied and nally demodulated. In the demodulation phase the bit stream that constitutes a burst is restored. The GSM 900 specication of Receiver characteristics is found in /
GSM 05.04/ and /GSM 05.05/. The GSM 1900 specication of Receiver characteristics is found in /
PCS 4/, /PCS 5/ and /PCS 6/. 32.3 Diversity Purpose To improve sensitivity on received signal. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 257 (421) Radio Reception Precondition and initiation The Air Time Slot Resources (ATSR) must be congured for diversity. The diversity initiates when the ATSR is taken into trafc. Description Antenna A Antenna B RXA RXB Receiver 03_0466A Figure 98 Diversity One way to improve your performance on received signal is by using diversity. This can be achieved by using two reception channels that are independently inuenced by fading. Both of the two insignals from the antennas are combined in the receiver. The receiver uses the weaker signal together with the stronger signal, with a factor proportional to SNR (Signal to Noise Ratio) on each antenna. 258 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 33 Radio Transmission Radio transmission denotes the function to "Generate a Radio Frequency (RF) signal". Radio Transmission 33.1 References GSM 900 and GSM 1800
/GSM:05.02/
/GSM:05.04/
/GSM:05.05/
/GSM:05.08/
/GSM:05.10/
GSM 1900
/GSM:05.02/
GSM Requirements 05.02 Phase 2 version 4.6.0 GSM Requirements 05.04 Phase 2 version 3.1.2 GSM Requirements 05.05 Phase 2 version 4.13.0 GSM Requirements 05.08 Phase 2 version 4.6.0 GSM Requirements 05.10 Phase 2 version 4.2.0 GSM Requirements 05.02 Phase 2 version 4.6.0 The references /JTC:1/ /JTC:8/ are chapters in the document:
Volume 1, PCS 1900 Physical Layer 1 The specication is labelled: JTC(AIR)94.08.01-231R3 Physical Layer Overview
/JTC:1/
/JTC:2/
/JTC:3/
/JTC:4/
/JTC:5/
/JTC:6/
/JTC:7/
Multiplexing and Multiple Access on the Radio Path Forward Error Protection Coding and Interleaving Modulation Radio Transmission and Reception Radio Subsystem Link Control Synchronization
/JTC:8/
When a reference is given in the text, it may have a section number added. For example, /JTC:5.3.5/ points at chapter 5, section 3.5. References EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 259 (421) Radio Transmission 33.2 Concepts Base Transceiver Station (BTS), dened in the chapter "Radio Conguration, RBS 2000 Macro". Radio Base Station (RBS), dened in the chapter the "Radio Conguration, RBS 2000 Macro". Combining system and ltering is the interface between transmitters and the antenna system. The functions of the system are:
Antenna system supervision support RF ltering Duplex ltering The TX reference point X is dened as the point where the TX antenna signal crosses the RBS border, that is, the connector for the antenna feeder. See Figure 99 on page 260. RBS TX TX
. TX Combining system
filtering X X = TX reference point 01_0467A TX reference point X Figure 99 When the RBS comprises an antenna mounted equipment, the TX reference point is the antenna mounted equipment part antenna connector. See Figure 100 on page 261. 260 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 RBS TX TX
. TX Combining system
filtering Radio Transmission Feeder Antenna mounted equipment X X = TX reference point 02_0467A Figure 100 TX reference point X with antenna mounted equipment 33.3 Functions Radio transmission Radio transmission denotes the function to "Generate an RF signal"
from the bit stream that constitutes a burst. The transmitter uses the modulation format specied in /GSM:05.04/ for GSM 900 and GSM 1800 and /JTC:4/ for GSM 1900. The RF transmission characteristics are in compliance with requirements in /GSM:05.05/ for GSM 900 and GSM 1800 and /JTC:5/
for GSM 1900. The synchronisation of the RF transmission is in compliance with requirements in /GSM:05.10/ for GSM 900 and GSM 1800 and /JTC:7/
for GSM 1900. BCCH carrier lling The output power for a transmitter sending the BCCH frequency is constant and equal to the nominal output power, except for the power ramping between bursts. See /GSM 05.08:7.1/ for GSM 900 and GSM 1800 and /JTC:6.5.1/ for GSM 1900. During idle timeslots, dummy bursts are transmitted. The dummy burst is dened in /GSM:05.02:5.2.6/. Transmitter lling The RBS can be congured for transmitter lling. All transmitters serving a cell are then congured with a lling level which transmits dummy bursts in the idle timeslots. Transmitter lling is not congurable for synthesized frequency hopping transmitters or for transmitters congured for DTX. Transmitters congured for BCCH carrier are not affected by the lling level. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 261 (421) Radio Transmission SW Power Boost In order to improve downlink performance, a BTS, without Filter Combiner,can be congured for TX diversity. Note:
Only the following macro congurations are supported:
RBS 2101, RBS 2102 and RBS 2202 with congurations 1x2, 2x2, 3x2, CDU-A for 900 MHz, CDU-A with TMA for 1800 MHz and 1900 MHz. Two transmitters connected to different antennas are then transmitting with maximum power on the same frequency. One of the transmitters has its bursts forwarded in time two bits compared to the other. The MS receiver signal processing will then contribute to a downlink performance gain of some 3 dB. SW Power Boost is initiated when the master transmitter is congured on A-bis to a nominal power value 2 dB or higher than the maximum nominal power dened for the TX, and no Operation and Maintenance Link is established to the slave transmitter. The slave is the next transmitter in the same antenna system. Faults from one of the two TX instances will result in that a class 2 fault, TX Diversity fault, is reported from the TX via fault reports over A-bis. 33.4 Operational Conditions Frequency band Transmitters for the GSM 900 band are capable of operating in the extended GSM 900 frequency band, 925 960 MHz. The combining system supports the primary GSM 900 band, 935 960 MHz or the extended GSM 900 frequency band, see /GSM:05.05:2/
depending on equipment. Transmitters for the GSM 1800 band operate in the GSM 1800 frequency band, 1805 1880 MHz. See /GSM:05.05:2/. Transmitters for the GSM 1900 band operate in the GSM 1900 frequency band, 1930 1990 MHz. See /JTC:5.1/. Nominal power The nominal power is the maximum output power the transmitter is allowed to use. Nominal power is dened as the power level at the output of the transmitter, and is set at conguration. It is possible to set 7 values in 2 dB steps with accuracy according to /GSM:05.05:4.1.2/ for GSM 900 and GSM 1800 and /JTC:5.3.3/ for GSM 1900. Output power The output power is measured at the TX reference point, see Section 33.2 Concepts on page 260. The output power is conguration dependent and is described in the chapter "Radio Conguration, RBS 2000 Macro". 262 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Radio Transmission Dynamic power reduction The transmitter can control the output power as dened by the base station power control function. Frequency hopping The transmitter is capable of frequency hopping as dened by the frequency hopping function. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 263 (421) Radio Transmission This page is intentionally left blank 264 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 34 34.1 34.2 34.3 34.3.1 Frequency Allocation Support Frequency Allocation Support The FAS function measures the interference level on a number of frequencies, specied by the operator. The measurements are performed on idle channels or idle burst positions. The TRXC:s execute the FAS function independently of each other
(however all TRXC:s dont have to be used). Thus it is here described only how the FAS function works on one TRXC. FAS measurements can start when the TRXC has been congured with a list of FAS frequencies. Measurements are performed during one or several FAS measurement periods. Each FAS measurement period is started and stopped by Abis O&M messages. During the FAS measurement period the TRXC shall handle the measurement of the signal levels, on all specied frequencies, once every 15:th second and accumulate the result in one histogram for each frequency. The result of the measurements is reported on Abis O&M interface on request as calculated median and percentile values for each frequency. The number of times each frequency has been measured on is also reported. References
/GSM:05.05/
Concepts Percentile value: The proportion of samples in a distribution. An example: The 90 percentile value for a distribution is the value for which 90 percent of the samples have a value equal to or less than the percentile value. Functions FAS conguration A Frequency List is received on Abis O&M interface containing maximum 150 frequencies to measure on. The frequencies are coded in a way that can be interpreted as ARFCN:s with a value ranging from 0 until 1023. This value range is accepted (The BTS can however only measure on frequencies for which it has capability). The relation between frequencies and ARFCN:s is specied in /GSM:05.5:1.1/. The FAS support capability and the number of frequencies transferred are checked. All eventually on-going measurements are stopped. Measurement result are cleared. 34.3.2 Start measurement FAS measurement will be started by O&M message. Old measurement results are Optionally cleared. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 265 (421) Frequency Allocation Support 34.3.3 34.3.4 34.3.5 Stop measurement FAS measurement will be stopped either by directed O&M message, or by receiving a new conguration. FAS measurement The FAS measurements are performed according to the following:
4. A FAS measurement is done every 15:th second. During that FAS measurement interval the signal strength of each frequency in the frequency list is measured once. 5. 6. 7. 8. During the rst 10 seconds of the FAS measurement interval, only idle channels will be measured on, then all available resources are used. If the conguration includes frequencies, for which the TRXC lacks capability to measure on, they are neglected. The measurements are done on idle trafc channels, TCH/F and TCH/H , and on the idle positions in active TCH/F. Frequency hopping is supported, but limited to a maximum of 63 frequencies. Measurements on frequencies belonging to the own TRXC only take place when reception is scheduled for these frequencies (On idle bursts). 9. Measurements are started on a, from one FAS measurement interval to another, sliding position in the FAS frequency list (To avoid that some frequencies may be underrepresented if there isnt always time to measure on them all). 10. The measurements are as equally distributed as possible over all available time slots 11. The measurements are as equally distributed as possible in the multiframe structure, except for active channels where the positions are xed. 12. The signal strength of each frequency is measured during one burst, in the same way and with the same resolution as in active channel measurement. Not more than four bursts are used for FAS measurements on one time slot during one SACCH measurement period. 13. The result of the measurements are stored in a histogram consisting of 64 counters for each frequency, one counter for each signal level. The number of times a specic signal level has been measured is accumulated in the corresponding counter. Measurement reporting Measurements are reported on request by O&M messages. The TRXC will, for each frequency measured upon, calculate the median value, the percentile value according to the percentile parameter and the number of measurements done on the frequency. The result of the calculations sent on Abis O&M link in FM Reports. If a frequency has not been measured upon, i.e. if a number of 266 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Frequency Allocation Support measurements equals zero, the median and percentile signal strength values are reported as zero. 34.4 Operational Conditions At least one timeslot on TCH must be enabled. Measurements can only be performed on enabled timeslots congured as TCH/F or TCH/H. The RX must also be enabled. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 267 (421) Frequency Allocation Support This page is intentionally left blank 268 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 35 35.1 35.2 Restart and Recovery Restart and Recovery The "Restart and Recovery" function allows the RBS or a specic Replaceable Unit, RU, (see Section Concepts below) to be started or restarted in a controlled manner. Restart occurs with installation, repair or reset. The restart and recovery function is used with:
spontaneous reset (watchdog, software fault, memory fault) reset button power on BSC ordered reset The restart and recovery function determines whether a unit is capable of being brought into operation and, if needed, prepares the unit for operation. If the unit cannot be brought into operation, then the restart and recovery function identies the reason for the operator using the base stations visual indicators. References If a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to locate the relevant information. Concepts RU Replaceable Unit An RU is the smallest unit that can be handled on site or in a repair centre and about which information can be retrieved via OMT or BSC. Main RU Main Replaceable Unit A main replacable unit contains one or more processors, to which software can be downloaded from the BSC. A Main RU is classed either as CMRU or DMRU, see below. Sub RU Sub Replaceable Unit A Sub RU is always connected to a superior Main RU. This connection is used for the retrieval of equipment information. A Sub RU does not normally have a processor. An RU with a processor that is not loadable is also classed as a Sub RU. Passive RU Passive Replaceable Unit A Passive RU has a very low level of intelligence and is independent of the processor system, for example, it has no connection for O&M communication. In the RBS 2000, for example, the cables are Passive. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 269 (421) Restart and Recovery CMRU DMRU Function Central Main Replaceable Unit An RBS has one CMRU. Distributed Main Replaceable Unit A Main RU is distributed if it is subordinated to the CMRU. Purpose The entire RBS is brought into operation in a controlled manner. The sequence of events is given below. Description The sequence of actions initiated is summarized below:
1 start CMRU-processor 35.3 35.3.1 35.3.2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 start DMRU-processor start Sub RU-processor (if any) start CMRU basic functions start DMRU basic functions start Sub RU basic functions conditional RBS DB(Data base)load read parameters for OM bus dene OM address link establish functions for Sub RUs connected to DMRU link establish functions for Sub RUs connected to CMRU update RBS database for Sub RUs connected to CMRU link establish functions for all expected DMRUs update RBS database for all expected DMRUs update RBS database for Sub RUs connected to DMRU 16 wait for expected Passive RUs 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 internal conguration check RBS operational ability set fault indicator on all DMRUs with faults set operation indicator on all DMRUs with no faults set fault indicator on all Sub RUs with faults set fault indicator on all DMRUs with faults bring CMRU into remote operation 270 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Restart and Recovery 24 bring DMRU into remote operation Start processor:
If the checksum for the updated application software is correct, the updated application is chosen as application software. If the RU is a DMRU without non-volatile memory, the DMRU must retrieve software from the CMRU. If database parameters are not useable, are inaccessible or out of range, default values are used instead. Termination of start processor:
Terminated when the updated application software has started correctly, or with a new reset. If there are problems in starting updated application software, then the base application is chosen as application software. Operational Conditions Operation and Maintenance Maintenance functions related to restart and recovery are described in chapter Operation and Maintenance Terminal. The visual indicators relevant to restart and recovery are described in chapter Operation and Maintenance Support Functions. All of the visual indicators associated with a RU are temporarily turned on for a minimum of 2 seconds during the initial restart of that RU. This allows visual identication of any faulty indicators. Capabilities The start time is dened as the time elapsed from when the power is turned on (after having been off), or from the reception of reset (reset button pushed or BSC reset order received) to when the RBS is ready to be taken into remote mode. Depending on the reason for restart, certain actions must be taken during start up, which results in various start-up times. Restart time after BSC ordered reset is less than 8 seconds if all RUs are preloaded with software with correct revision and a correct RBS DB is installed. For all other restart cases with a heated oscillator, restart time of the whole RBS is about half a minute. For the restart case with a cold oscillator (power on), restart time of the whole RBS is about 5 minutes. For information of the temperature inuence on start up time and the delay caused by the environment control unit, see chapter Unit Description, ECU. 35.4 35.4.1 35.4.2 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 271 (421) Restart and Recovery This page is intentionally left blank 272 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 36 Function Change Function Change The purpose of "Function Change" is to facilitate the reload, change or upgrade of the RBS software and the subsequent activation of that software. The software is downloaded from the BSC to the RBS via the A-bis interface. Function change incorporates the following features:
Rapid initial start Software preloaded in the non-volatile memory of the RBS during manufacture; permits rapid initial start. Rapid restart At restart of an RBS following a power failure, the software does not have to be downloaded via the A-bis interface to the RBS. This is because of the non-volatile memory of the RBS. Minimised software download time Software is distributed internally within the RBS. Only one copy of the software is downloaded to each RBS, minimising the time required for software download. Software download while in trafc The RBS can perform download of software without affecting normal operation. Trafc is affected only when switching over to the downloaded software. 36.1 Concepts File Package File Revision Software le CMRU A set of individual software les which together constitute a revision of the software required by an entire RBS or by parts of the RBS. The le revision identies a specic software le. This includes the type of Main RU the software is intended for execution on as well as the software revision. The software necessary for a class of Main RU and its loadable Sub-RUs. A software le contains application software. Central Main Replaceble Unit. An RBS has exactly one CMRU. In the RBS 2000 Macro hardware architecture, the DXU is the CMRU. In the RBS 2000 Micro hardware architecture, the DXB is the CMRU. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 273 (421) Function Change DMRU Main RU RU Sub-RU 36.2 Functions Distributed Main Replaceble Unit. A Main RU is said to be distributed if it is subordinated to the CMRU. Contains one or more processors, to which software can be downloaded from the BSC. A Main RU is either central or distributed, see above. A Main RU may or may not have a direct signalling link to the BSC. Replaceble Unit. An RU is the smallest unit that can be handled on site or in a repair center and of which information can be retrieved via OMT or BSC. A Sub-RU is always connected to a superior Main RU. This connection is used for retrieval of equipment information. A Sub-RU normally does not have a processor. Note that an RU with a processor that is not loadable, is classied as a Sub-RU. In the RBS 2000 hardware architecture, for example the CDUs are Sub-RUs. RBS SW file Central main RU Distributed main RU A-bis File package 01_0285A 36.2.1 Figure 101 Overview of function change Software Storage Every Main RU is equipped with both volatile and non-volatile memory. Application software, either downloaded via the A-bis interface, transferred internally, or installed during manufacture, is stored semi-permanently in the non-volatile memory. Before execution, the software is copied from the non-volatile memory into the volatile memory, where it is executed. This arrangement permits the RBS to operate normally, that is, executing one version of software while loading a new version of software as a background activity. One area of the non-volatile memory contains the base application software. The base application software can only be updated by 274 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Function Change function change if the normal application software is valid, thus there is always one application software available. If the normal application is corrupt (or unavailable), the base application software is automatically selected instead. Software File Relation Each Main RU visible via the A-bis interface is offered every software le within the appropriate le package. The le revision of the offered software le is compared with that of the software les already held in non-volatile memory in order to determine whether download is necessary or not. Download is carried out only when the le offered has a different revision than the one held in RBS memory. As an alternative to the above, unconditional download is also supported. In this case, there are no conditions on File Revision, and so forth, for the download. Software File Download The CMRU accepts the download of software les intended for all Main RUs in the RBS. A DMRU never accepts direct download of software les via A-bis, since this must be done via the CMRU. This arrangement means that only the les actually needed by each Main RU are downloaded. Each individual le is downloaded only once, thus minimising the software download time required. Note that this is an improvement compared to the general A-bis concept; downloading a software le several times, once for each Main RU needing it. Loading software to a Main RU is allowed in any state, even while operational. The transfer of a software le is initiated and performed via the A-bis interface. The CMRU stores the transferred software le in non-volatile memory. During software download to the central Main RU, appropriate software les are transferred internally to the distributed Main RUs. Only the software les, appropriate to a specic Distributed Main RU, which are not already loaded on that RU are transferred. The software les transferred are stored directly in the non volatile memory of a Distributed Main RU. Start Required On completion of the internal distribution of software les, the RBS informs the BSC that a restart of the RBS is necessary to activate the new software. Software Start The activation of new software is ordered via the A-bis interface. When the order is received, the software is copied from non-volatile memory into volatile memory, where it is executed. 36.2.2 36.2.3 36.2.4 36.2.5 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 275 (421) Function Change At switch-over to the new software, trafc is affected. This implies a restart as in chapter Restart and Recovery followed by conguration and enabling as specied in chapter Functionality Administration. At start-up (in START_CF_CMD), negotiation will take place between BTS and BSC. The BTS sends a NEGOTIATION REQUEST message to the BSC including a list of valid IWDs supported by the BTS. A set of IWDs is chosen by the BSC in NEGOTIATION REQUEST ACK message and is sent to the BTS which adapts to the selected IWDs. This backward compability function introduces the possibility to connect a BTS (R8) to a BSC (R7). It is also possible to run a BSC (R8) with a BTS (R7), and with BTS (R8) in either R7 mode or R8 mode. A BSC (R7) will answer with a reject message, NEGOTIATION_REQUEST_NAK, to the NEGOTIATION_REQUEST message as it is not supported by BSC (R7). The BTS will then adapt to IWDs according to BSC (R7) when a NEGOTIATION_REQUEST_NAK message is received. Operational Conditions Operation and Maintenance The visual indicators relevant to Function Change are described in chapter Operation and Maintenance Terminal. Capabilities The download of software via the A-bis to the RBS and internal transfer of software les does not affect the normal operation of the RBS. Switch-over, that is, software start of an RBS, takes less than 60 seconds. The switch-over time is dened as the time elapsed from the reception of a start command via A-bis to when the Main RU is ready for re-establishment of the link to the BSC. 36.3 36.3.1 36.3.2 276 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 37 37.1 37.2 Functionality Administration Functionality Administration
"Functionality Administration" provides the functionality necessary to allow the BSC to congure, enable and disable AOs within the RBS. This function also includes general layer 3 A-bis OML support for other functions within the RBS. References Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. Concepts Elementary Procedure RU AO MO SO The protocol over the A-bis OML at layer 3 consists of EPs (Elementary Procedures). An EP is a unit of interaction between the BSC and one of the MOs. An EP consists of an initiating message and a response. For example, an EP may consist of the BSC sending an initiating message CONFIGURE REQUEST and the MO in the RBS responding with a message CONFIGURE REQUEST ACK. Replaceble Unit. An RU is the smallest unit that can be handled on site or in a repair center and of which information can be retrieved via OMT or BSC. Application Object. An abstract subclass of MO, which provides part of the functionality of a BTS Managed Object. The BSC manages the O&M of the RBS via the A-bis O&M Interface. The RBS equipment is seen as MOs by the BSC. This is a means of describing the RBS in a functional-
oriented way, and a logical model of the RBS in terms of MOs is built in the BSC. All O&M actions are based on this logical model structure created in the BSC. An MO does not necessarily have a one-
to-one relation with a physical unit in the RBS, and the MO comprises either both hardware and software or software only. See also Figure 102 on page 278. Service Object. An abstract subclass of MO, which provides service functions for a set of MO instances including itself. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 277 (421) Functionality Administration DP Digital Path IS Interface Switch TF Timing Functions TS Time Slot handler TX Radio frequency Transmitter RX Radio frequency Receiver TRXC Transceiver Controller CF Central Functions 01_0286B MO Managed Object AO Application Object CON LAPD Sign. Conc. SO Service Object Figure 102 Managed Object classication Functions Application Object Connection Before the BSC can communicate with an AO instance, that instance must be connected to its associated SO instance. This is performed by a command over the A-bis OML and includes both of the following:
Connect an AO to an SO Disconnect an AO from an SO Application Object Conguration Each AO has a number of associated conguration parameters which control the way in which it functions. An AO has two states relevant to conguration:
Enabled Disabled 37.3 37.3.1 37.3.2 The conguration of an AO by the BSC involves three distinct operations performed over the A-bis OML:
278 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Functionality Administration Conguration Enable Disable Conguration The process of setting the desired conguration parameters for an AO. For most AOs and most conguration parameters this process must be performed while the AO is disabled. However there are a number of exceptions, certain parameters on certain AOs may be congured by the BSC while the AO is enabled. When a conguration request is received over the A-bis, this function checks that all preconditions for a change in conguration are satised:
All parameters are within the permitted range or have permitted values If the AO is enabled, parameters that cannot be changed in enabled state must not be changed For certain classes of AO, the conguration parameters must be consistent with each other The BSC is informed of the successful conguration of the AO or, if unsuccessful, an indication of why the conguration failed is returned. Enable Enable attempts to activate an AO with the current conguration parameters. When an enable request is received via A-bis, this function checks that all preconditions for a change to enabled state are satised:
All required conguration parameters must be previously set by one or more conguration procedures Conguration parameters must be consistent with each other If the checks are all successful, the function of the appropriate AO is enabled. The BSC is informed of the successful enable of the AO or, if unsuccessful, an indication of why the enable was unsuccessful is returned. Disable Disable deactivates an AO. When a disable request is received over the A-bis, this function only needs to check that all preconditions for a change to disabled state are satised. If the check is successful, the function of the appropriate AO is disabled. The AO IS and AO CON are exceptions to this, they retain their normal functions even when disabled. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 279 (421) Functionality Administration The BSC is informed of the successful disable of the AO or, if unsuccessful, an indication of why the disable was unsuccessful is returned. 37.3.3 A-bis OML Support Valid header and message code Layer 3 downlink Elementary Procedures Downlink EPs are those EPs initiated by the BSC. The initiating message is checked for the following criteria:
Only mandatory or optional parameters are present All mandatory parameters are present Parameter values are in range Correct length An initial message that fails to meet any of these criteria is rejected. If the message is so badly corrupted that it is not recognisable, the message is simply ignored. A message which meets all of these criteria is forwarded to the appropriate handling function. The handling function is then responsible for responding to the initial message. Layer 3 downlink Precondition Test This is a general function which is implicitly used by all functions initiated on the Abis O&M interface. It is performed after the general Format Check. The function must not be explicitly refered to. Layer 3 uplink Elementary Procedures Uplink EPs are those EPs initiated by the RBS. All functions within the RBS which initiate uplink EPs use this function to provide supervision as dened below. An initiated EP is time supervised. The initial message of an EP is repeated if timeout occurs before a response is received. The initial message is sent once, and then repeated a maximum of two times. The response from the BSC is checked for the following criteria:
Only mandatory or optional parameters are present All mandatory parameters are present Valid header and message code Parameter values are in range Correct length A response message that fails to meet any of these criteria is simply ignored. A response message that meets all of these criteria is forwarded to the function that initiated the EP. 280 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Functionality Administration 37.4 37.4.1 After a timeout the message is retransmitted. A maximum of 2 retransmissions are performed. After 3 timeouts (including 2 retransmissions) Layer 3 supervision is terminated. Operational Conditions Operation and Maintenance The visual indicators relevant to Functionality Administration are described within the context of Operation and Maintenance Support. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 281 (421) Functionality Administration This page is intentionally left blank 282 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 38 38.1 38.2 Operation and Maintenance Support Buttons Visual indicators Change from Local to Remote Mode and vice versa Operation and Maintenance Support Operation and Maintenance Support denes RBS functions related to:
RSSI Temperature Compensation RF Loop Test Supervision Calender Time Loop Control Max Cooling References Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. Concepts CMRU DMRU EDMRU Extension Cabinet ILO IRO IU Central Main RU. The CMRU belongs to the RU type Main RU. The RBS is physically connected to the BSC via a CMRU. There is only one CMRU in each RBS. In the RBS 2000 architecture, the DXU is the CMRU Distributed Main RU. A Main RU is said to be distributed if it is subordinate to the central main RU, CMRU. Energy DMRU. An EDMRU is a DMRU that handles the energy control functionality of an RBS cabinet. In a multiple cabinet conguration, the Extension Cabinet is the cabinet without the SO CF. The Extension Cabinet is connected to a master cabinet and cannot operate without the master cabinet. In Local Operation (Op. State). When the RBS, CMRU or DMRU is in the state
"local operation" the instance can be operated from the OMT. In Remote Operation (Op. State), the RBS, DXU, TRU or ECU has a link established to the BSC. In Use (Op. State). When RBS, DXU or TRU is in state "In Use" the instance is EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 283 (421) Operation and Maintenance Support Local Conguration Main RU Master Cabinet MO RFU RSSI RU SO Sub-RU congured and enabled to full its purpose. When a RU reads necessary information from its database and a signal is sent when it is ready. Contains one or more processors, to which SW can be downloaded from the BSC. A main RU is either central or distributed. A main RU may or may not have a direct signalling link to the BSC. In a multiple cabinet conguration, the Master Cabinet is the cabinet with the SO CF. In this document a Master Cabinet is considered to be equal to a stand-alone cabinet. Managed Object. The BSC manages the O & M of the RBS via the A-bis O & M interface. The RBS equipment is seen as MOs by the BSC. This is a means of describing the RBS in a functional-
oriented way, and a logical model of the RBS in terms of MOs, is built in the BSC. All O & M actions are based on this logical model structure created in the BSC. An MO does not necessarily have a one-to-one relationship with a physical unit in the RBS and the MO comprises either both HW and SW or SW only. Ready For Use (Op. State). When in operational state "Ready For Use" the instance is started by the BSC with the correct SW. Received Signal Strength Indicator Replaceable Unit. An RU is the smallest unit that can be handled on site or in a repair centre and of which information can be retrieved via OMT or BSC. Service Object. A Service Object is an abstract subclass of MO. An SO instance carries service functions for a set of MO instances, including itself. The Service functions include Layer 2 termination and Layer 3 distribution. They may also include HW supervision and SW handling. A sub-RU is always connected to a superior main RU. This connection is used for retrieval of equipment information. A 284 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Operation and Maintenance Support sub-RU does not normally have a processor. It should be observed that a RU with a processor that is not loadable is classied as a sub-RU. Transceiver DMRU. A TDMRU is a DMRU that handles transceiver functionality. TDMRU 38.3 Buttons Purpose To be able to reset, to start test operation function and to change between local and remote mode. Preconditions For the CPU Reset-button and the Test-button there are no precondition requirements. For the Local/Remote-button, see Section 38.4 Change RU to Local Mode on page 285 and Section 38.5 Change RU to Remote Mode on page 286. The functions are initiated when the buttons are pushed. Description CPU Reset:
A CPU Reset button can be found on the CMRU, TDMRU and EDMRU (DXU, TRU and ECU). When the CPU Reset button is pushed the unit itself and all its sub units will be reset. Local/Remote:
A Local/Remote button can be found on the CMRU and TDMRU
(DXU and TRU). The Local/Remote button is used to change RU mode to Local or Remote. For further description of the Local/Remote button, see Section 38.4 Change RU to Local Mode on page 285and Section 38.5 Change RU to Remote Mode on page 286. Test:
Test buttons can be found on the TDMRU (TRU). The Test function is not used. 38.4 Change RU to Local Mode Purpose To change from Remote Mode to Local Mode which means to release and stop the layer 2 communication links on Abis interface and to disable MO TX and MO TS if they were enabled. Preconditions and Initiation The RU operational state should be IRO, RFU and IU. The RU Mode should be Remote. The function is initiated when the Local/Remote button on RU is pushed. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 285 (421) Operation and Maintenance Support Description The Local Mode Indicator starts ashing to indicate that a change of RU mode is in progress. The Operational indicator is turned off if applicable, see Section 38.15 Operational Indicator on page 292 and the Local/Remote button is disabled. The subfunction Local Mode in Progress is performed, seeSection 38.24 Local Mode in Progress on page 299. After this the Local Mode indicator is turned on, the Operational Indicator is handled see Section 38.15 Operational Indicator on page 292 and the Local/Remote button is enabled. In the case of SW Power Boost with the RU congured to implement the master TX, the following also applies:
The TDMRU that implements the slave TX, enters state remote mode in progress without trying to establish OML. MO TX on the slave is disabled if it was enabled. The following will occur when the function terminates:
The Local Mode Indicator is turned on. The Operational Indicator indicates RU operational mode according to description. The TX Not Enabled indicator is turned on. An external condition class 1, called Toggle Information is raised. Limitations: The status of the external condition, Toggle Information, is stored in RAM that is not affected by SW reset. During start, the Toggle Information is set if the Local/Remote button is set to Local. 38.5 Change RU to Remote Mode Purpose To establish a link towards the BSC. Preconditions and Initiation The RU Operational State should be ILO and the RU Mode should be Local. The function is initiated when the Local/Remote button is pushed. Description An RU cannot be changed to Remote Mode until the local conguration on the RU has been performed. The Local Mode Indicator starts ashing to indicate that a change of RU mode to Remote is in progress and the Operational Indicator is handled, see Section 38.15 Operational Indicator on page 292. The layer 2 communication links (the links concerning the SO) on the Abis interface enters a state where they await a link establishment attempt by BSC. By acknowledgement of such attempt, the link will become established (refer to the Terrestrial Link Handling functionality). 286 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Operation and Maintenance Support The RU mode is changed to Remote immediately after the link towards the BSC is established. The external condition class 1, called switch information, is ceased. The ceased external condition is not reported to the BSC. When the RU has entered Remote Mode the function terminates and the Local Mode indicator is turned off. 38.6 Change RU to Remote Mode Cancel Purpose To cancel a change to Remote Mode when a change of RU mode from Local to Remote is in progress. Preconditions and Initiation The RU mode should be "Change to remote mode in progress". The function is initiated when Local/Remote button on RU is pushed. Description If the Local/Remote button is pushed during a change from Local to Remote Mode (the Local Mode Indicator will be ashing during the change of RU mode), the attempt of changing RU mode to Remote is interrupted. The Local/Remote button is then disabled. The layer 2 communication links (links concerning the SO) on Abis interface are released and stopped by RBS (refer to Terrestrial Link Handling Functionality) if they were started. The Local Mode Indicator is turned on, the Operational Indicator is handled, see Section 38.15 Operational Indicator on page 292 and the Local/remote button is enabled. At the termination of the function the Local Mode Indicator will be turned on, the Operational Indicator will indicate the RU operational mode according to description and an external condition class 1, called Toggle Information is raised. 38.7 Change SW Power Boost Slave RU to Local Mode Purpose To switch the slave RU from Remote Mode to Local Mode Preconditions and Initiation The RU operational state should be IRO, RFU and IU. The RU mode should be remote. The function is initiated when the Local/Remote button on TDMRU (TRU) is pushed. Description The Local Mode indicator starts ashing to indicate that a change of RU mode is in progress. The Operational indicator is turned off if applicable, see Section 38.15 Operational Indicator on page 292, and the EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 287 (421) Operation and Maintenance Support Local/Remote button is disabled. When RU mode is changed to local for the slave RU, a TX diversity fault is raised on the master AO TX. A FAULT_REPORT message is sent to BSC on Abis interface. RU mode is changed to local and Abis communication with BSC via the master RU is stopped. When Local Mode has been entered, the slave MO TX is disabled if it was enabled, and the TX NOT ENABLED indicator is turned on. After this, the Local Mode indicator is turned on, the Operational indicator is handled (see Section 38.15 Operational Indicator on page 292), and the Local/Remote button is enabled. The following will occur when the function terminates:
The Local Mode indicator is turned on. The Operational indicator indicates RU operational mode according to description. The TX NOT ENABLED indicator is turned on. RU operational state = ILO. 38.8 Loop Control Purpose To test the transmission network by looping all trafc back to the BSC. Preconditions and Initiation The MO state should be Disabled and the RU Mode Remote. The Loop Control is initiated by the Loop Control command on the Abis interface. Description The Loop Control procedure is a part of the automatic loop test of speech/data links. The Loop Test can be opened or closed on command from the BSC. When the test loop is closed all trafc is looped back to the BSC in order to test the transmission network. The test loop is controlled by MO TS. The Loop Control is terminated when Loop Control Complete is sent on the Abis interface. 38.9 RF Loop Test Supervision Purpose To test the radio equipment during trafc. Preconditions and Initiation The RU Mode should be Local or Remote. The RF Loop test Supervision is initiated when the application SW is started. Description The radio equipment is tested during trafc by a radio loop test function. The test procedure is described by the Supervision and Selftest functionality. 288 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Operation and Maintenance Support The supervision parameters are dened by the IDB or the OMT. The supervision parameters dene supervision status (active/inactive) and test interval. Each parameter has a default value. When the test loop is activated the test is continuously repeated with the dened test interval. The supervision is terminated at deactivation from the Operation and Maintenance Terminal. Detected faults at RF Loop Test are handled by the Diagnostics and Fault handling functionality. The default values are:
Supervision status:
active Test interval:
5 minutes 38.10 Calendar Time Request Purpose To update the system time. Preconditions and Initiation The RU Mode should be Remote. The Calendar Time Request function is initiated ve seconds after the OML for CF has been established, and when RU Mode is switched from Local to Remote. Description All main RUs handle a real time clock which is internally used within the RUs as the system time. The system time is updated by the Calendar Time elementary procedure on Abis interface. Calendar time is distributed to all main RUs. System time is then updated for those RUs. Calendar time is periodically requested and updated while layer 2 communication link is established. The request interval is 24 hours. The Calendar Time request function is terminated when OML for SO CF is released and stopped and when RU Mode is switched from Remote to Local. 38.11 RSSI Temperature Compensation Purpose To be able to update the RSSI temperature compensation value. Preconditions and Initiation Applicable for any RBS operational state. The TDMRU (TRU) Mode should be Local or Remote. The RSSI Temperature Compensation is initiated by the Internal Conguration function in the Restart and Recovery sequence. Description The loss in the receiver path varies with the temperature. In order to get a more accurate estimate of the loss, the temperature for the receiver EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 289 (421) Operation and Maintenance Support will be measured continuously. The temperature level is then used for update of the RSSI temperature compensation value. The RSSI compensation value will not be updated more frequently than every 10th second. 38.12 Max Cooling Purpose To control the fans to make them perform their maximum available cooling when certain supervised values have reached certain levels. Preconditions and Initiation Applicable for any operational state. The TMRU (TRU) mode could be either Local or Remote. The function is initiated by the Internal Conguration function in the Restart and Recovery sequence. Description After the initiation, the TDMRU (TRU) temperature as well as the current transmitter maximum output power are continuously supervised. This supervision is performed for each TDMRU (TRU). Depending on the supervised values, the general fan speed regulation (see Climate Protection Functionality) is superimposed by the Max Cooling function. The Max Cooling function is carried out per cabinet. The Max Cooling can have the following two states:
ON = Maximum Cooling OFF = General Fan Speed regulation Maximum Cooling means that the fans are controlled to perform their maximum available cooling. General Fan Speed regulation means that Maximum Cooling is switched off and the fans are controlled by a local algorithm. The Maximum Cooling states are calculated from the supervised entities in the following way:
Max Cooling will have the state ON if at least one of the following conditions is fullled:
At least one of the supervised TDMRUs (TRUs) has a temperature that exceeds the critical temperature (CT). The maximum output power of at least one transmitter is limited because of overtemperature handling. Max Cooling will have the state OFF if both of the following conditions are fullled:
All of the supervised TDMRUs (TRUs) have a temperature that is a constant value lower than the critical temperature (CT). None of the transmitters has its maximum output power limited because of overtemperature handling. Max Cooling will control the fans in the following cases:
At function initiation. 290 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Operation and Maintenance Support At a Max Cooling state change. After an EDMRU (ECU) reset. The Max Cooling state will not be updated more frequently than every 30th second. If Max Cooling fails the fault is logged but no further action taken within the scope of this function. 38.13 Fault Indicator Purpose To indicate if there are any faults in the RU the indicator is located on. Preconditions and Initiation Applicable for any operational condition. The function is initiated when the SW is started. Description The Fault Indicator is controlled from the Diagnostics and Fault Handling Functionality and from the Restart and Recovery Functionality. When the RU is reset in any way the handling of the indicator is terminated. Limitations:
When the CU of a CDU-D has detected lost communication to both its superior RUs, the CU restarts according to the Restart and Recovery functionality. Flashing of the fault indicator is then not used for the CU. Colour:
Red Position:
ON:
Main RUs (DXU, TRU, ECU) and sub RUs (CDU, PSU, BFU). One or more faults are detected in the RU. FLASHING (0.5 Hz):
- Running on Base Application OR Note:
OFF:
Priority
- For DMRUs and Sub RUs (TRU, ECU, CDU, BFU, PSU); The RU has detected lost communication to superior RU. The ashing state may not be used for Sub RUs without a processor. No fault is located to the RU. ON has a higher priority than FLASHING. If the conditions for two states are fullled, the one with the highest priority will control the indicator. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 291 (421) Operation and Maintenance Support 38.14 BS Fault Indicator Purpose To indicate if there are any faults in the RBS. Preconditions and Initiation Applicable for any operational condition. The function is initiated when the SW is started. Description The BS Fault indicator is controlled from the Diagnostics and Fault Handling functionality and from the Restart and Recovery functionality. When the RU is reset in any way the handling of the indicator is terminated. Colour:
Yellow Position:
States of the indicator:
ON:
CMRU (DXU) One or more faults are detected in the RBS. OFF:
No faults are detected in the RBS. 38.15 Operational Indicator This section also includes operational states, remote operational indication and operational information. Purpose To indicate if the RU is considered Operational/not Operational, if BSC initiated conguration is in progress, if SW is being received or if restart is pending after SW download. Preconditions and Initiation Set Operational Indicator:
Applicable for any operational condition. The function is initiated when the SW is started. Remote Operational Indication:
The RU operational state should be IRO, RFU and IU and the RU mode should be Remote. The function is initiated by OPERATIONAL_INFORMATION on the Abis interface. Operational Information:
The MO state should be "not reset" and the RU mode should be Remote. The function is initiated by OPERATIONAL_INFORMATION on the Abis interface. 292 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Operation and Maintenance Support Description The Operational indicator is controlled from the Diagnostics and Fault handling functionality, Restart and Recovery functionality and Function Change Functionality. The indicator is turned off 2-10 seconds after the SW has started. When the RU is reset in any way the handling of the indicator is terminated. For description of the Remote Operational Indication function and Operational Information function see the parts of this section called
"Operational States" (part "RU in Remote Mode"). Colour:
Green Position:
States of the indicator ON:
FLASHING (0.5 Hz):
Main RUs (DXU, TRU, ECU) and Sub RUs (PSU, BFU, CDU). The RU is considered Operational. OFF Priority Operational States Conguration activity initiated from the BSC,
(which may take more than 10 seconds to complete) in progress OR SW is being received OR Restart pending (after SW download). The RU is considered Not Operational. FLASHING has a higher priority than ON and OFF. ON has a higher priority than OFF. If the conditions for two states are fullled, the one with the highest priority will control the indicator. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 293 (421) Operation and Maintenance Support Table 121 Operational States RU in Remote Mode RU in Local Mode The state of the operational indicator on CMRU and TDMRU is determined upon the operational mode of the MOs associated to the RU. The operational indicator on the EDMRU is only controlled locally and is described by the Diagnostics and Fault Handling Functionality. The master cabinet is considered Operational if SO CF and at least one SO TRXC are considered free from class 1 HW faults and Local Conguration has been performed. The MO operational mode is reported by the BSC with the OPERATIONAL_INFORMATION message. An MO is internally taken out of operation at reset (refer to the Function Change Functionality) or when its associated RU is taken into Local Mode. A Sub-RU is considered Operational if there are no class 1 faults on the RU. The Extension Cabinet (if there is any) is considered operational if at least one SO TRXC is considered free from class 1 HW faults and Local Conguration has been performed. The Remote Operational Indication function is terminated when OPERATIONAL_INFORMATION_ACCEPT is sent on the Abis interface. The Master Cabinet is considered operational if SO CF, at least one SO TRXC, at least one AO RX and at least one AO TS are considered operational by the BSC, set by the message OPERATIONAL _INFORMATION to each MO. The TDMRU is considered Operational when SO TRXC, AO RX and at least one AO TS are considered Operational by the BSC, set by the message OPERATIONAL_INFORMATION to each MO. In the case of SW Power Boost conguration the OPERATIONAL indicator on the TDMRU implementing the slave TX is on when the indicator on the master TDMRU is on. Otherwise, the indicator is off. The Remote Operational Indication function and the Operational Information function are terminated when OPERATIONAL_INFORMATION_ACCEPT is sent on the Abis interface. Note:
The CMRU and the TDMRU is considered Not Operational during change of RU Mode. The EDMRUs and sub-RUs are always in Local Mode. Only the CMRU and the TDMRUs can be in Remote Mode. 38.16 Tx Not Enabled Indicator Purpose To indicate that TX is not enabled. 294 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Operation and Maintenance Support Preconditions and Initiation Applicable for any operational condition. The function is initiated when the SW is started. Description The TX Not Enabled indicator is controlled from Functionality Administration functionality and from Restart and Recovery functionality. The TX Not Enabled indicator is on until the BSC has changed MO State for TX to enabled. When the TX is disabled or reset by the BSC or auto-disabled by the RBS the indicator is turned on. When the RU is reset in any way the handling of the indicator is terminated. Colour:
Yellow Position:
States of the indicator ON:
OFF TDMRU (TRU) TX is not enabled TX is enabled 38.17 Local Mode Indicator Purpose To indicate the current RU Mode. Preconditions and Initiation Applicable for any operational condition. The function is initiated when the SW is started. Description After a restart, the indicator is on until the Local Remote handling starts
(refer to the Restart and Recovery functionality). When the RU is reset in any way the handling of the indicator is terminated. Colour:
Yellow Position:
States of the indicator ON:
CMRU (DXU) and TDMRU (TRU). RU Mode is Local. FLASHING (0.5 Hz):
Change of RU mode is in progress:
Waiting for layer 2 A-bis communication to be established OR. Waiting for conrmation that the layer 2 A-bis communication has been released. OFF RU Mode is Remote. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 295 (421) Operation and Maintenance Support For a TDMRU that is congured to implement a slave TX in a SW Power Boost conguration:
The RU is remote via the TDMRU that implements the master TX. For description of changing an RU to Local Mode, see Section 38.4 Change RU to Local Mode on page 285. Limitations:
The Local Mode indicator will not indicate when the layer 2 A-bis communication with the BSC is lost when the RU Mode is Remote. 38.18 External Alarms Indicator Purpose To indicate if any external alarm dened by the operator is active. Preconditions and Initiation Applicable for any operational condition. The function is initiated when the SW is started. The functionality is initiated when the RBS DB has been read during the start-up sequence (refer to Restart and Recovery functionality). Description The External Alarms indicator indicates if any external alarm dened by the operator is active. The External Alarm Indicator is controlled from External Alarms functionality and from Restart and Recovery functionality. When the RU is reset in any way the handling of the indicator is terminated. Colour:
Yellow Position:
States of the indicator ON:
FLASHING (0.5 Hz):
OFF CMRU (DXU) Any external alarm connected to an inlet in this cabinet is active. Any external alarm connected to an inlet in an extension cabinet is active. No external alarm connected to an inlet in any cabinet is active. 38.19 DC Disconnected Indicator Purpose To indicate if the DC is disconnected. 296 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Operation and Maintenance Support Preconditions and Initiation Applicable for any operational condition. The function is initiated by the HW when the RU is started. Description The DC Disconnect indicator indicates if the DC is working properly or not. If the environmental requirements are not fullled, the power to the rest of the RBS is switched off. The DC Disconnect indicator is controlled from the Climate protection functionality and from Restart and Recovery functionality. When the RU is reset in any way the handling of the indicator is terminated. Colour:
Yellow Position:
States of the indicator ON:
OFF EDMRU (ECU) The environmental requirements are not fullled and thus the power to the rest of the RBS is switched off. The environmental requirements are fullled. 38.20 Battery Mode Indicator Purpose To indicate if the RBS is running on battery backup. Preconditions and Initiation Applicable for any operational condition. The function is initiated by the HW when the RU is started. Description The Battery Mode indicator indicates if the RBS is running on mains power supply or battery backup. The Battery Mode indicator is controlled from Power Supply functionality and from Restart and Recovery functionality. When the RU is reset in any way the handling of the indicator is terminated. Colour:
Yellow Position:
States of the indicator ON:
OFF EDMRU (ECU) Battery power supply fully or partly used. Mains power supply. No battery power is used. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 297 (421) Operation and Maintenance Support 38.21 Bat Disconnected Indicator Purpose To indicate if the battery is disconnected. Preconditions and Initiation Applicable for any operational condition. The function is initiated by the HW when the RU is started. Description The Bat Disconnected indicator indicates if the battery is connected or not. The Bat Disconnect indicator is controlled from Power Supply functionality and from Restart and Recovery functionality. When the RU is reset in any way the handling of the indicator is terminated. Colour:
Yellow Position:
States of the indicator ON:
OFF Sub RU with battery fuse control (BFU). Battery disconnected. Battery connected. 38.22 AC Fault Indicator Purpose To indicate if the AC Supply is faulty. Preconditions and Initiation Applicable for any operational condition. The function is initiated by the HW when the RU is started. Description The AC Fault indicator indicates if the AC Supply is faulty or not. The AC Fault indicator is controlled from Power Supply functionality and from Restart and Recovery functionality. Colour:
Yellow Position:
States of the indicator ON:
EDMRU (ECU) One or more phases are faulty. OFF No AC fault. Test Result Indicators (not used) There is a yellow Test Result indicator on each TDMRU (TRU). The indicators are turned off 2-10 seconds after the SW has started. Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 38.23 298 (421) Operation and Maintenance Support 38.24 Local Mode in Progress Local Mode in Progress is a subfunction. Purpose To change RU mode from Remote to Local. Preconditions and Initiation The RU mode should be "Change to Local Mode in progress". The subfunction will be initiated when a change of RU mode to Local mode has been initiated. Description An external condition class 1, called switch information, is raised on the RU. A Fault Report message is sent to the BSC on the Abis interface to inform the BSC that the unit is taken into Local operation. The RU mode for the cabinet is changed to Local when the Abis fault report procedure is terminated. When Local Mode has been entered, the layer 2 communication links in Abis interface concerning the SO are released and stopped by RBS
(refer to the Terrestrial Link Handling functionality). On the TRU, the MO TX and MO TS are disabled if they were enabled. The TX Not Enabled indicator is turned on. The function is terminated when the layer 2 communication links on Abis interface concerning the SO has been released and stopped and Local mode has been entered. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 299 (421) Operation and Maintenance Support This page is intentionally left blank 300 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 39 39.1 39.2 39.3 Installation Data Handling Installation Data Handling Information about specic areas regarding either the RBS as a whole or each of the Replaceable Units, RUs, is stored in a database in the RBS. The purpose of the database is to handle information and provide efcient help within the following areas:
General operation and maintenance Fault localisation Fault diagnostics Traceability The database mainly contains conguration data valid for the RBS as a whole and for individual RUs. Of course, the database that handles this information is not public but it is at least partly accessible for:
The BSC which reaches the database via the Abis interface The operator who accesses the database via the OMT Other functions within the RBS References Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. OMT functions related to Installation Data Handling functions are described within the context of Operation and Maintenance Terminal. Concepts ARAE Antenna Related Auxiliary Equipment Auxiliary equipment affecting the antenna functionality, e.g. active antennas. General The RBS database is stored in the CMRU which is a part of the RBS. Some parts of the content of the RBS database are relevant for specic RUs and those parts are stored in the Main RUs and sub-RUs. The Installation Data Handling functions provide basic access to the content of the RBS database. As mentioned above, it is at least partly accessible for:
the BSC via the Abis interface the operator via the OMT other functions within the RBS 39.4 Database Information Handling Elements Several Database Information Handling elements are found in the RBS and RU databases. The most important ones are described below. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 301 (421) Installation Data Handling 39.4.1 Elements Found in the RBS Database RBS External Alarms Species the alarm identity, alarm data, alarm severity and alarm criterion for each external alarm. Access:
BSC via the Abis interface (in fault reports and hardware information) Operator via the OMT RBS ARAE Supervision Species the affected functionality, fault class and antenna instance number of each auxiliary fault. Access:
Operator via the OMT RBS Transmission Interface Conguration Stores conguration information for the transmission interface and the TEI for the CMRU. Access:
Operator via the OMT RBS Conguration Identier Identies the overall RBS conguration. Access:
Operator via the OMT 39.4.2 Elements Found in the RBS and RU Databases RU Type Describes the RU type and the RU instance in detail. Access:
Operator via the OMT RU Identity Includes product number, revision and serial number of the RU. Access:
BSC via Abis (in fault reports and hardware information) Operator via the OMT 302 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Installation Data Handling RU Physical Position Identies the location of the RU at a site, including information about cabinet, rack, shelf and slot. Access:
BSC via the Abis interface (in fault reports and hardware information) Operator via the OMT 39.4.3 Elements Found in the RU Database 39.5 39.5.1 39.5.2 39.5.3 39.5.4 39.6 RU Specic Includes the parameters specic to an RU. These parameters are dependent on the hardware design. Functions There are a number of functions and services connected to the Installation Database Handling. Some examples follow:
Read/Install the RBS Database The entire RBS database can be both read and written. These functions are used when the RBS database needs to be transferred between the OMT and the RBS. Read Hardware Information This function makes it possible for the BSC to read detailed information from the hardware installed in the RBS, for example:
Product number Serial number Revision Physical position Read Information Element This function allows the RBS to read information elements in the RU and RBS databases. Write Information Element This function makes it possible for the RBS to write information elements in the RU and RBS databases. Operational Conditions A reading of the entire RBS database from the RBS to the OMT takes less than four minutes. An installation of the entire RBS database, from the OMT to the RBS, takes less than four minutes. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 303 (421) Installation Data Handling This page is intentionally left blank 304 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 40 40.1 40.2 Self Test and Supervision Self Test and Supervision Self Test comprises an initial boot test and X-bus receiver test. The initial boot test is performed during the start-up of an RU, in order to test the functionality of the hardware required for the execution of the application software. The X-bus receiver test is performed at TX conguration if TX is congured for SW Power Boost, in order to test the X-bus receiver on the master TX and slave TX. Supervision is a subsequent activity, which continuously monitors the correct function of all supervised entities within the RBS. Faults detected by the supervision function are passed to the Diagnostics and Fault Handling function for further processing. References If a reference is made to a function described in another chapter please refer to the table of contents to locate the relevant information. Concepts CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC code). The CRC code is often called polynomial code. 40.3 Self Test 40.3.1 Boot Test Purpose The Boot test is an initial test function that determines the functionality of the RBS hardware. The test ensures that the application software can be started in the processor. Preconditions and Initiation The Boot test is carried out before any normal application processes are started. The function Restart and Recovery invokes the test. Description Invoked by the function Restart and Recovery the processors are tested implicity by the memory test. Read/write memories are tested before any other functions. These tests are fast and destructive to the contents of the memory and control the two alternate states of a memory bit are tested. Memory of non-volatile character such as ash and eprom is tested checksums. The checksum must include the whole content of the memory, but does not include unused memory with predened values to save time and start-up. Finally, HW functions controlled by the processor, which are necessary to start the application software and which do not disturb other processes or associated HW are nally tested. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 305 (421) Self Test and Supervision The Boot Test returns a state that indicates failure or success. However, the test will terminate permanently if a Read/Write-memory failure is detected. This causes a reset of the processor. The function can be upgraded remotely by replacing parts of the boot software. 40.3.2 X-Bus Receiver Test Purpose To detect any faults on the X-Bus before the SW Power Boost is started. Preconditions and Initiation Initiated by the functionality administration when an AO TX instance that is congured for SW Power Boost is enabled. Description The X-Bus receiver on the master TX and slave TX is tested by sending a test message on the X-Bus. It is terminated by reporting the outcome of the test. 40.4 Supervision of Memory Purpose Controlling the correctness of the memory contents. Preconditions and Initiation The Boot Test is carried out before any normal application processes are started. The function Restart and Recovery invokes the test. Description There are two kinds of memory, Read/Write memory and a Read only memory. The Read/Write memory is supervised by parity checking. A parity bit is added to the data and is chosen so that the number of 1 bits in the data is even (or odd). For example, when using even parity the data 1011001 becomes 101101011 and the data 10110001 becomes 101100010. Parity bits are added when writing data to the memory and these bits are checked when reading the same data from the memory. If the parity bits are not even (or odd) a fault has occurred in the data. The read only memory (and memory of non-volatile character such as Flash and EEPROM) is supervised by continuous control checksum
(CRC-32). When copying a data burst from a non-volatile memory to a volatile memory both the original data burst and the copy must be checked. If a fault is detected the fault is reported to the fault handling functions. 306 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 40.4.1 Supervision of Buses Self Test and Supervision Purpose The purpose of this function is to check the integrity of the data on the buses. Preconditions and Initiation The function is automatically initiated at the start of the functions driving and receiving information on the buses. Description Receive and transmit bus supervision encompasses buses between three or more RUs or major functional blocks. The address or data buses of the processors are not supervised by this specic function. The supervision of the buses is achieved by comparison of data sent to the bus driving function with the information on the bus, and by control information embedded in the data. The function looks for expected trafc on the bus. Trafc must be generated in absence of normal trafc. Disturbances are reported to fault handling for ltering and fault detection. 40.4.2 Supervision of Cables Purpose To detect removal of a cable. Preconditions and Initiation Initiates automatically at start of application software. Description All cables between the RUs are supervised. Removal of a cable during operation is always detected by one of the following conditions:
No current in the cable Missing logical signal Missing trafc message CDU TRU PFWD cables It is possible to disable and enable the fault reporting for the cables listed below using the OMT. CDU TRU PREF cables FU CU PFWD cables FU CU PREF cables When the OMT is disconnected, the fault reporting is always enabled. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 307 (421) Self Test and Supervision 40.4.3 Supervision of Application Program Purpose Supervises the application software. If the execution of the software fails (for example a cyclic loop) the function exception processing interrupts the execution. Preconditions and Initiation Initiates automatically at start of application software. Description The main processor supervises the operation of the sub-processors by the regular reception of signals from the sub-processors. When no normal operation signals are generated dummy signals will be generated instead. Dummy signals generated from a subprocessor, tell the main processor that the sub processor is still in an operational state. The main processor receives exceptions from a number of sources such as arithmetic overows, I/O interrupts, system calls and when no operational or dummy signals from the sub-processors are generated. When the processor detects one of these exceptions it disables interrupts and forces execution of a software exception processor (called the handler) located at a xed address. The handler saves the contents of the processor, including the context of the program counter, the current operating mode (user or supervisor) and the status of the interrupts
(enabled or disabled). These contents are saved so it can be restored when the execution has been serviced. When an exception occurs, the CPU loads the Exception Program Counter (EPC) register with a location where execution can restart after the exception has been serviced. 40.4.4 Supervision of DMRU Loadles Purpose The function investigates that loadles are correctly stored in CMRU memory. Preconditions and Initiation The CMRU application software is loaded and activated. The function is then activated when the CMRU detects loadles in the DMRU that are expected in the CMRUs non-volatile memory. These are then transferred from the DMRU to the CMRU. Description The loadles in the non-volatile memory of the CMRU are supervised by continuous comparison of checksum. Detected errors are reported to the function Diagnostics and Fault Handling. The checksum comparison on each supervised loadles is performed with 5minute intervals. This supervising function has low system priority and is performed as a background activity. 308 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 40.4.5 Radio Transmission and Reception Self Test and Supervision Purpose The transceiver is tested during trafc by a radio test loop function. The purpose is to detect a faulty transceiver by detecting an error in the signal strength or in the number of bit errors. Preconditions and Initiation The test requires two unused ATSR (AirTime Slot Resources) separated by three timeslots. The radio test loop function is initiated when the application software is started and is activated every fth minute and is performed only if resources are available. Description The transceiver is tested by sending a dummy burst to the transmitter unit and looped back internally to the radio receiver unit. The test is performed in two steps, a primary test and, if necessary, a retest if the primary test fails. All loops are performed on the diversity channels A and B and the results from these channels are combined. A fault report is issued if at least one channel indicates an error. All transceivers are tested. The output power to the antenna is turned off for the ATSR used in the loop. The primary test issues one dummy burst. The signal level of the looped burst for both the A- and B-channel returning to the receiver unit is compared with the sent burst and must exceed a lowest level. The number of detected bit errors must be less than a maximum permitted level. If the test is passed, the test is terminated and no fault is indicated. If the primary test fails, a retest is performed. This test issues a precongured number of dummy bursts, and for each of these bursts, the looped signal level must exceed the lowest level. If the lowest lewel is not exceeded, the test is terminated and a fault is indicated. The presence of an interferer is detected by measuring the mean signal level of all the looped bursts. This is done for both the A- and B-
channels. If the signal exceeds a maximum dened level, an interferer is considered present. If no interferer can be detected a nal test of the bit error rate is conducted. If the number of bit errors exceeds a maximum permitted number a fault is reported. If all congured retests have failed and not recovered, the transceiver is blocked by the BSC. 40.4.6 Transmitter Antenna Purpose Transmitting characteristics are monitored in order to detect if an antenna has been damaged. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 309 (421) Self Test and Supervision Preconditions and Initiation Initiates when the signalling multiplexing application is started in the CMRU and when the corresponding application handling the signalling endpoints on the DMRUs, are started. Description The relation between the reected power and the output power can be described by the voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR). The more reection the higher value of the VSWR. At no reection at all the value of VSWR will be equal to 1 and at total reection the value of VSWR will be very large. The higher value of the VSWR the higher value of the return loss. There are two kinds of return loss the Tx feeder return loss and the Tx feeder normal return loss. The Tx feeder Return loss, that is, the RF attenuation between the RBS cabinet and the antenna (the cable and cable connections) including an ALNA/TMA shall be in the interval 0-
4 dB. The Tx feeder normal Return loss, that is the total attenuation from the RBS cabinet and to the antenna and back to the cabinet (that is, the attenuation at the cable to the antenna and from the antenna, cable connections, ALNA/TMA, and the antenna). The attenuation should be
-14dB if the Tx feeder loss is 2dB and -18dB if the Tx feeder loss
> 2dB. If VSWR is too high a message is sent to the fault handling. It is possible to set two disturbance parameters from the OMT. The two disturbance VSWR levels are in the range of 1.5-2.8. Allowed alarm level VSWR values are: 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 2.0, 2.2, 2.5, 2.8. The transmitter at the TRU measures the VSWR signal and if the signal is to high it may be harmful to the power amplier. If the VSWR signal is too high the transmitter may reduce or turn off its output power. 40.4.7 Receiver Antenna This is described within the context of Diversity Supervision 40.4.8 Layer 2 Data Link Transmission Purpose To check the number of aborted and erroneous frames received by the CMRU from the DRMUs. Preconditions and Initiation Initiated when the signalling multiplexing application is started in the CMRU and when the corresponding application handling the signalling endpoints in the DMRUs is started. Description Signal messages between the CMRU and the endpoints of the DMRUs are supervised by the following events and conditions:
Number of aborted frames received Number of error frames received 310 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Self Test and Supervision A CRC-error (Cyclic Redundancy Code, CRC-16). Aborted frames are those frames ended by an abort ag sequence. Erroneous frames have the following conditions:
Frames longer than the maximum frame length (260 bytes). Not ended on byte boundary. Frames shorter than 4 bytes. Data loss caused by lack of buffers or memory access problems. Disturbances are generated such that all malfunctions related to these are detected and can be pinpointed by diagnostics, without generating false alarms. This supervision is performed with internal links using HDLC type transmission. 40.4.9 Supervision of LAPD Concentration Purpose The purpose is to supervise the length of concentrator uplink message queues. A fault report is sent when an overow occurs. Preconditions and Initiation The supervising function is initiated when the LAPD concentrator is started. Description The purpose of LAPD concentration is to reduce the number of required physical links between the BSC and the RBS on the Abis interface. This is achieved by letting a number of DMRUs use the same subrate for LAPD signalling on A-bis. To accomplish this, the CMRU shall concentrate LAPD uplink messages from a number of DMRUs onto one physical link to the BSC. The LAPD concentration function is modelled on A-bis with a managed object, AO CON, which is supported by the RBS. The supervising function checks the concentrator uplink queues in the CMRU. If the maximum queue time for a message is exceeded, the oldest message in the queue shall be removed when a new is inserted. The fault criteria is set to generate a fault when the message queue is more than 70% full, or when the message is discarded due to queue overow. Fault messages are not removed. The queue time is calculated using the total number of bytes in the queue and the transmission speed between the BTS and the BSC. The maximum queue time is set to 120 ms. That corresponds to 960 bytes at a transmission speed of 64 kbps. 40.4.10 Supervision of Environmental Conditions Purpose Controlling the climate in the BTS. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 311 (421) Self Test and Supervision Preconditions and Initiation Initiates automatically at application software start. Description All BTS have inbuilt fans, which may run at four different speeds full, middle, low and stop. The main task of the fans is to circulate the air in the BTS and replace old, warm air with new, cooler air. The RBS 2102 and 2101 has a climate system with a control unit that controls the temperature and the humidity of the RBS. The control unit is divided into three units:
ECU The ECU supervises the climate unit, handles the alarms and controls the FCU. CCU FCU The CCU controls the climate unit independently, but in case of abnormal function the ECU can disconnect the climate unit and override the CCU,
(emergency stop). The FCU is a speed control of the magazine fans and a distributor of their alarms. The climate unit consists of among other things a heater, temperature-
and humidity sensors, a compressor and a condenser. The compressor will start at an initial temperature of 32C and will stop when the temperature falls to 25C. If the enclosure temperature falls below 10C, the heating unit will be switched on and it will be switched off when the temperature rises above 15C. The cabinet heating up time to > 0C depends on the ambient temperature and the time the cabinet has been shut down. However, the heating up time shall not exceed 2 hours under any circumstances. 40.4.11 Power Conditions Purpose Supervises the units used for energy control and the power level of the AC and DC power. Preconditions and Initiation Initiates automatically at activation of the application software. Description Supervises the units used for energy control. Detects faults in those units for example power supplies, internal or external batteries, fans, cooler, heater or climate sensors. Supervises the power level for AC power and DC power. AC mains failure is detected. 312 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 40.4.12 Synchronization Sources Self Test and Supervision Purpose Supervise the ability of the transmitter and the receiver to lock to the reference frequency. Preconditions and Initiation Initiated when the application software is started. The faults associated are installed in the fault handling function at initiation. Description Frequency generators of the transmitter and receiver are supervised for adequate locking to the reference frequency. Failure to lock within time generates a disturbance. Ability to stay locked to reference is monitored until a new frequency is set. Disturbances are reported to fault handling for ltering and eventually fault detection. The supervision of the frequency source is restarted each time a new frequency is set. 40.4.13 Tower Mounted Amplier Purpose Supervises the functionality of the TMA. Preconditions and Initiation Initiates automatically at application software start. Description The faults associated are installed in the fault handling function at initiation. The functionality of the TMA is supervised by measuring the power consumption of the TMA. A disturbance is generated if the power consumption is outside a predened interval. Two different disturbance levels are used: Degraded or Faulty. 40.4.14 Supervision of Door Alarm Purpose Detection of opening the cabinet door or the mounting base door. Preconditions and Initiation Automatically at application software start. Description A disturbance is generated when the cabinet door or the mounting base door is opened. The disturbance is reported to the fault handling for ltering and eventual fault detection. When raising a fault, there is a short ltering time to avoid contact bouncing. It takes approximately 5 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 313 (421) Self Test and Supervision minutes after the fault has been deactivated (that is to say the door has been closed) for the fault message to cease. The fault is reported as External Condition Fault. This function is valid for the outdoor cabinets only. 314 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 41 41.1 Diagnostics and Fault Handling Diagnostics and Fault Handling
"Diagnostics and Fault Handling" supervises the handling of faults and disturbances detected by the "Selftest and Supervision" function. Fault handling performs the following:
Filters spurious disturbances. (Disturbances are events which may indicate a fault only under certain conditions) Evaluates the underlying fault cause Determines the impact of a fault Localizes faults to an offending RU Attempts to minimise the effect of a fault Reports any change in fault status of an MO to the BSC Maintains logs of faults References Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. Maintenance functions related to Diagnostics and Fault Handling are described within the context of Operation and Maintenance Terminal. The visual indicators relevant to Diagnostics and Fault Handling are described within the context of Operation and Maintenance Support. 41.2 Concepts AO Disturbance Fault map HWU ME MO Application Object. An AO is an abstract subclass of MO. AO provides a part of the functionality of a GSM BTS. The functionality is specied for each concrete descendant class. An AO instance has O&M communication with BSC on Layer 3 via a SO instance. An event which may indicate a fault only under certain conditions. Information about a ME fault status is stored in fault maps capable of indicating the presence or absence of all possible faults for a ME. An Hardware Unit (HWU) consists of one or more SEs. An HWU is a functional unit within the RBS. The HWU is either active (equipped with a processor) or passive (without a processor). Managed Entity. A HWU, RU, SO or AO. Managed Object. The BSC manages the O&M of the RBS via the A-bis O&M EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 315 (421) Diagnostics and Fault Handling RU SE SO Interface. The RBS equipment is seen as a set of MOs by the BSC. (This is a way of describing the RBS in a functional-
oriented way. A logical model of the RBS in terms of MOs is built in the BSC). All O&M actions are based on this logical model structure created in the BSC. An MO does not necessarily have a one-
to-one relation with a physical unit in the RBS and the MO comprises either both hardware and software or software only. Replaceable Unit. An RU is the smallest unit that can be handled on site or in a repair center and of which information can be retrieved via OMT or BSC. Supervised Entity. It is the lowest level in the RBS hardware model. A SE is a property, which is supervised. Examples on SEs are communication fault on a bus and interruption on a PCM reference. Service Object. A SO is an abstract subclass of MO. A SO instance carries service functions for a set of MO instances, including itself. The service functions include Layer 2 termination and Layer 3 distribution. They may also include HW supervision and SW handling. 41.3 Fault Detection Purpose This function detects hardware and functionality faults in the RBS system. The RBS always supervises itself, even without trafc. Preconditions and initiation The selftest and supervision function has detected a disturbance. Description The fault detection function is processed by the following subfunctions;
fault ltering, fault evaluation and fault classication. These subfunctions are described below in detail. The types of faults that are detected are specied within the context of Selftest and Supervision. 316 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Diagnostics and Fault Handling 41.3.1 Fault Filtering Purpose The purpose of the subfunction is to determine whether a fault is present or absent, see gure below, and the nature of the fault. Disturbance/
Measurement Fault filter Fault filter parameters Fault present/
Fault absent P002833A Figure 103 Fault Filter Preconditions and initiation The selftest and supervision function has detected a disturbance. Description All disturbances are ltered before a fault is considered to be present or absent. The ltering function is adapted to each fault situation for optimum performance. Each fault has its own specied fault lter parameters. For example, the following parameters (or combinations of parameters) may be used for the lter function:
Frequency of disturbances A frequency which is too high is considered to be a fault The measurement value of a parameter Time A parameter exceeding a threshold is considered to be a fault. A condition which is valid for too long is considered to be a fault EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 317 (421) Diagnostics and Fault Handling 41.3.2 Fault Evaluation Purpose Detected faults are evaluated to determine the underlying fault. Preconditions and initiation A change in fault status for HWU or a RU. Description This function evaluates the input fault maps and tries to nd out the actual fault cause. This is done by analyzing faults reported on a low level (specied hardware units) and mapping them to a high level (RUs and MOs), thus taking the complete fault situation into account. 41.3.3 Fault Classication Purpose The fault classication subfunction decides the severity of the fault, whether it affects functionality of the MO or not and also if the fault is internal or external. Preconditions and initiation The fault ltering function or the fault evaluation has detected or ceased a fault. Description Faults detected by an MO are classied according to:
Severity Either affects (may affect) functionality of the MO or does not affect functionality of the MO Fault origin Either internal or external to the MO Either internal or external to the RBS 41.4 Fault Localization Purpose This function is used to localize a detected fault to possible faulty RU. Preconditions and initiation The fault detection function has found a change in fault status for a RU. 318 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Diagnostics and Fault Handling Description When detecting a fault, the RBS automatically evaluates the fault situation and indicates the suspected faulty RU. The fault status of the RBS is updated with this information. When a fault is pin-pointed to a specic RU this is visually indicated as specied within the context of Operation and Maintenance Support. 41.5 Local Action Purpose When a fault is detected for a SE it may be necessary to minimize the effect of the fault. It is called a local action. Preconditions and initiation The fault detection function has detected a fault for a SE. Description The impact of certain faults can sometimes be minimized by local actions. This is done automatically by the RBS. Permitted actions are:
Re-initiation Certain faults can sometimes be cleared by re-initiating the offending hardware. For example, if a communication circuit behaves unexpectedly, it is reinitiated. Note that re-initiation of an entire RU or a processor is not allowed as a local action. Fault isolation If a detected fault could cause equipment damage, the equipment is isolated. For example, if a transmitter is overheated, it is switched off. Fault compensation Certain faults can sometimes be compensated for elsewhere in the RBS. For example, if a fan is faulty, the speed of the other fans is increased. Supervision continues after performing a local action. If the fault ceases, the local action is stopped. 41.6 Fault Reporting Purpose This function reports MO faults to the BSC. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 319 (421) Diagnostics and Fault Handling Preconditions and initiation The fault detection function and the fault localization function reports new fault status for a MO. Both functions must have been completed before start of this function. Description The RBSs automatically informs the BSC of each change in the fault status. The old fault status is compared with the new fault status. If the fault status has changed for MO, a fault report procedure is initiated on A-bis. A certain fault can be detected and reported by several MOs. The BSC may request the current fault status for a specied MO at any time. 41.7 Fault Logging Purpose All fault changes are logged in the SW log with timestamp. Preconditions and initiation A fault has been raised or ceased by the fault ltering function and fault classication function. Description All changes in the fault status of the RBS are logged in a software log. The software log is distributed on the RUs. A log entry is stored in the RU where the fault is detected. The software log is stored in volatile memory. 41.8 RBS Diagnostics Purpose The purpose of this function is to make conclusions about where the original fault source is located. Preconditions and initiation The fault detecting function has reported a change in fault status for a HWU. Description The diagnostics function has access to fault maps for the whole RBS, not only for a MO. The RU fault map has information about which information SE(s) that has reported a fault. If there is any fault at the RBS, this function will switch on "BS Fault Indicator". If this function can pinpoint the fault to a RU with 100% probability, it will switch on the Fault Indicator on that RU. If the fault affects functionality and the RU is not in remote mode then the Operational Indicator on the RU will be switched off. 320 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 42 42.1 Operation and Maintenance Terminal Operation and Maintenance Terminal The OMT is a tool that provides efcient aid for installation, site acceptance, diagnostics and maintenance of RBSs within the RBS 2000 series. References
/G.703/
/G.704/
/GSM:11.20/
/GSM:05.05/
Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. 42.2 Concepts Installation Database MO Spare Bits Timeslot 0 CMRU Each RBS has a built-in database where information about installed hardware is stored. The information reects the conguration as well as the history of the hardware. Within the RBS, each RU carries a database. The installation database is used by the operator (via the OMT), by RBS internal functions and partly by the BSC (via A-bis). Managed Object. The BSC manages the O&M of the RBS via the A-bis O&M Interface. The RBS equipment is seen as MOs by the BSC. This is a means of describing the RBS in a functional-
oriented way, and a logical model of the RBS in terms of MOs is built in the BSC. All O&M actions are based on this logical model structure created in the BSC. An MO does not necessarily have a one-
to-one relation with a physical unit in the RBS, and the MO comprises either both hardware and software or software only. A number of additional bits for spare use in a timeslot 0 multiframe structure. This is dened in /G. 704/. The use of these bits is dened by the customer. The timeslot 0 multiframe structure is dened in /G. 704/. Central Main Replaceble Unit. An RBS has exactly one CMRU. In the RBS 2000 hardware architecture, the DXU is the CMRU. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 321 (421) Operation and Maintenance Terminal DMRU Main RU Passive RU RU Sub-RU Distributed Main Replaceble Unit. A Main RU is said to be distributed if it is subordinated to the CMRU. Contains one or more processors, to which software can be downloaded from the BSC. A Main RU is either central or distributed, see above. A Main RU may or may not have a direct signalling link to the BSC. A passive RU is an RU with a very low level of intelligence. It is independent of the processor system, for example, it has no connection for O&M communication. In the RBS 2000, for example the cables are Passive RUs. Replaceble Unit. An RU is the smallest unit that can be handled on site or in a repair center and of which information can be retrieved via OMT or BSC. A Sub-RU is always connected to a superior Main RU. This connection is used for retrieval of equipment information. A Sub-RU normally does not have a processor. Note that an RU with a processor that is not loadable, is classied as a Sub-RU. In the RBS 2000 hardware architecture, for example the CDUs are Sub-RUs. 42.3 42.3.1 42.3.2 Functions User Interface The OMT provides an easy-to-use graphical user interface. Well-known hardware units and functions, for example, a transmitter, appear as graphical objects. There are a number of operations attached to each graphical object, for example for retrieving information about it. The user interface is based on a number of views. Each view contains a set of objects, chosen so that the natural work ow of the user is supported. For user convenience there is an on-line help facility in the OMT. Radio Base Station The following user functions, related to the RBS as a whole, are available in the OMT:
Display RBS conguration, see Chapter Installation Data Handling. 322 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Operation and Maintenance Terminal Congurations possible to display, comprise all RBS 2000 products and the congurations as specied for each product. The following RU and connections are graphically displayed:
DXU TRU ECU CDU Local bus CDU bus Number of antenna systems (1 or 3) Display RBS software revisions, display RU software revisions for all Main RUs, see Section 42.3.16 Replaceable Unit on page 329. Display TEI/RU list, display list of TEI and RU Instances for the CMRU and for the DMRUs with a direct signalling link to the BSC in the cabinet (see also Section 42.3.16 Replaceable Unit on page 329). General purpose (display RBS conguration) The functions above are normally used for:
Installation (display TEI/RU list) Maintenance (display RBS software revisions) 42.3.3 OMT Connection The following user functions, related to the OMT, are available in the OMT:
Connect, establish a connection between the OMT and the RBS. A functionality and compatibility check is performed on RBS and OMT software versions. If the OMT is connected remotely an RBS address can be given in order to select one of several RBSes connected in a multidrop chain. Also a timeslot, which the OMT uses when established, is given by the operator. The RBS is scanning for remote OMT link establishment on all 64 kbit/s timeslots on PCM-A. If the RBS software does not support scanning for remote OMT link establishment on all timeslots, the operator has to use TS23, which is the default value. In case of different versions the OMT operator is informed about this fact and that all functionality is not supported. Disconnect, release the connection between the OMT and the RBS. The functions above are for general purpose use. 42.3.4 Installation Database The following user functions, related to the IDB, are available in the OMT:
EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 323 (421) Operation and Maintenance Terminal Read Install Copy the IDB from the RBS to the OMT. Install the IDB from the RBS to the OMT. Cable mounting list Display a cable mounting list based upon information from the IDB. Site specic data Save Open Inventory list Congure Recongure Modify Site specic data , that is IDB information that is changeable from the OMT, is displayed, copied to any le medium to the IDB in the OMT. Copy the IDB from the OMT to any le medium, for example a oppy disk or a hard disk. Copy the IDB from any le medium to the OMT. An inventory list, containing RU data, based upon information from the IDB, is displayed, saved on le medium or printed. Generate a new conguration. Copy data from the old IDB to the new. Increase or decrease the number of activated RUs in the IDB. 42.3.5 The functions above are for general purpose use. External Alarms The following user functions, related to the external alarms, are available in the OMT:
Display external alarm setup, display the external alarm setup parameters (see chapter External Alarms) associated with each of the external alarm inputs Dene external alarm setup Monitor external alarms status, the status (on/off) of the external alarms is continuously monitored and displayed The output can be displayed or directed to le (output stored in a le on the OMT). The functions above are normally used at installation (display/dene external alarm setup) site acceptance (monitor external alarms status) The fault status for all inlets dened for auxiliary faults can be monitored. 324 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 42.3.6 42.3.7 42.3.8 42.3.9 42.3.10 42.3.11 Operation and Maintenance Terminal ARAE Supervision Parameters The following user functions, related to the ARAE, are available in the OMT:
Auxiliary Faults are possible to dene for each alarm inlet. The alarm inlets can be used for both External Alarms and for ARAE Supervision. The denition of the ARAE Supervision Parameters is displayed. Monitor ARAE fault status. The output can be displayed or directed to le (output stored in a le on the OMT). Modify TN O&M Values This function modies the Transport Network O&M parameters in the IDB. There are three TN O&M parameters in the TNOM_information element that are possible to modify:
TNOM_use. Indicates if TN O&M functionality is activated or not. TNOM_timeslot. Indicates which 64 kbit/s timeslot on the PCM link to use for TN O&M communication. TNOM_nodeid. Holds the identity of the BTS node in the TN O&M network. Display TN O&M Values This function displays the value of the TN O&M parameters, which are stored in the TNOM_information element in the IDB (see parameters above). Calibration of Optional Reference Oscillator This function is used to calibrate the optional reference oscillator. Cable Loss The following user function, related to Cable loss, is available in the OMT:
Dene cable loss, denes cable and feeder loss values. Display cable loss, displays cable and feeder loss values. ALNA/TMA Parameters The following functions, related to ALNA/TMA parameters are available in the OMT. Dene ALNA/TMA parameters. In OMT state LOCAL and in OMT state CONNECTED, it is possible to dene values for the following:
Current Supervision Limits EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 325 (421) Operation and Maintenance Terminal Current Supervision Limit Low Current Supervision Limit High It is possible to dene values for the following parameters only in OMT state LOCAL:
RX Group Delay Loss RX Frequency Range RX Frequency Low RX Frequency High Display ALNA/TMA parameters, displays any of the following parameters associated with ALNA/TMA:
Current Supervision Limits Current Supervision Limit Low Current Supervision Limit High RX Group Delay Loss RX Frequency Range RX Frequency Low RX Frequency High 42.3.12 PCM Network The following user functions, related to the PCM network, are available in the OMT:
Set transmission interface type, sets transmission interface type in the database to G.703 2048 kbit/s or DS1 1544 kbit/s. Modify available synchronization source sets whether PCM link A and B, or anyone of them is to be available as synchronization source. Possible settings are: Activated or Not activated. Display available synchronization source displays whether PCM link A and B, or anyone of them is available as synchronization source. Possible settings are: Activated or Not activated. Set Network_topology value. Sets Network_topology value for stand alone or cascade connection of RBSs. Display Network_topology value. Displays whether the network topology of the RBSs is stand alone or cascade connection. Dene TF Compensation Value 326 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Operation and Maintenance Terminal This function makes it possible for the operator to dene (or redene) the IDB parameter RBS TF Compensation Value. Display TF Compensation Value The IDB parameter RBS TF Compensation Value (in ns) is displayed. The following user functions, related to the /G. 703/ 2048 kbit/s PCM network, are available in the OMT:
Display spare bits, display spare bits in timeslot 0 on G.703, values (0 or 1) for bits Sa4-Sa8. Dene spare bits (bits can be dened independently of each other). Display CRC-4 (Cyclic Redundancy Check /G.704/), display whether handling of CRC-4 in timeslot 0 on G.703 is on or off. Switch on CRC-4. Switch off CRC-4. Monitor maintenance data, display PCM reference data and update changes continuously. Modify PCM Receiver Sensitivity Sets the individual PCM Receiver Sensitivity values for an E1 transmission interface. The values are dened and referred as parameters PCM-A-REC-SENS and PCM-B-REC-SENS in the IDB. Exception: A DXU which uses the PRACT transmission circuit does not support the PCM Receiver Sensitivity values. Display PCM Receiver Sensitivity Displays the individual PCM Receiver Sensitivity values for an E1 transmission interface. The values are dened and referred as parameters PCM-A-REC-SENS and PCM-B-REC-SENS in the IDB. Exception: A DXU which uses the PRACT transmission circuit does not support the PCM Receiver Sensitivity values. The following user functions, related to the /DS1/ 1544 kbit/s PCM network, are available in the OMT:
Modify LBO values for transmission interface. Sets the individual LBO values for a T1 transmission interface. The values are dened and referred as parameters LBO-A and LBO-B in the IDB. Exception: A DXU which uses the PRACT transmission circuit does not support the LBO values. Display LBO values for transmission interface. Displays the individual LBO values for a T1 transmission interface. The values are dened and stored as parameters LBO-A and LBO-B in the IDB. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 327 (421) Operation and Maintenance Terminal Exception: A DXU which uses the PRACT transmission circuit does not support the LBO values. Modify FDL use values for transmission interface. Sets the individual Facility Data Link (FDL) use values for a T1 transmission interface. The values are dened and referred as parameter "FDL_use" in the IDB. Exception: A DXU which uses the PRACT transmission circuit does not support the FDL_use. Display FDL use values for transmission interface. Displays the individual FDL use values for a T1 transmission interface. The values are dened and stored as parameter
"FDL_use" in the IDB. Exception: A DXU which uses the PRACT transmission circuit does not support the FDL_use. The functions above are normally used at:
Installation (set transmission interface type, set/display available synchronization source, display/dene spare bits, display/switch on/switch off CRC-4) Maintenance (monitor maintenance data) Antenna System The following user functions, related to the antenna system, are available in the OMT:
Monitor maintenance data, display any of the following data and update changes continuously Diversity The functions above are normally used for maintenance. Transceiver The following user functions, related to the transceivers, are available in the OMT:
Switch on QIU, switch on subjective speech quality improvements uplink for one or more trafc channels within one transceiver 1) Switch off QIU 1) 1) Facilitates BER measurements according to /GSM:11.20/ and /
GSM:05.05/. Monitor maintenance data, display any of the following data and update changes continuously Transmission and reception Timing advance 42.3.13 42.3.14 328 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Operation and Maintenance Terminal Switch on Measurement Reports, switch on Measurement Reports for one or several time slots. Switch off Measurement Reports, switch off Measurement Reports for one or several time slots. The functions above are normally used during installation (switch on/off Measurement Reports) maintenance (switch on/off QIU, Monitor maintenance data) 42.3.15 Managed Object The following user functions, related to the MOs, are available in the OMT:
Display state, display the current state of the selected MO Display relation, display which Main RU the selected MO is executing on Display channel combination, display the channel combination of MO Timeslot The functions above are normally used for maintenance. 42.3.16 Replaceable Unit The following user functions, related to the RUs in general, are available in the OMT:
Display RU info, display any of the following parameters associated with a specic RU RU instance TEI Product number Hardware revision Serial number Position (cabinet, rack, shelf, slot) Logical RU identier Free text comment Dene RU HW info, dene any of the following parameters associated with a passive RU Product number Hardware revision Serial number Free text comment Display RU software revision, for a specic Main RU, display the revision for the following software EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 329 (421) Operation and Maintenance Terminal Currently executing software Base application software stored in non-volatile memory Normal application software in non-volatile memory Dene RU, dene the following parameter associated with the CMRU TEI The functions above are normally used for Installation (dene RU) Maintenance (display RU software revision, display RU HW info) 42.3.17 42.3.18 42.4 330 (421) Faults The following user functions, related to fault information, are available in the OMT:
Monitor current fault status, read the fault status from the RBS and display changes continuously. Display fault info, display the current fault information for a specic object such as an RU or a PCM line. The functions above are normally used at Maintenance (display fault info) Site acceptance (monitor current fault status) Remote OMT A connection between the RBS and a remotely connected OMT can be established. The remote OMT is placed at a BSC site. The Remote OMT and the locally connected OMT are not interchangeable with each other. They are two separate products performing the same functions. All functions available in a locally connected OMT are also available in a remotely connected OMT. The function can fail due to software incompatibility, if no RBS conrms the connection attempt or if an OMT already is connected
(locally or remotely). In these cases the operator is informed about the failure. No further action is taken due to the failed connection. The connection between the RBS and a remotely connected OMT is established on one PCM timeslot and the maximum transmission rate is 64 kbps. Operational Conditions The transmission rate between the OMT and the RBS is 19200 bit/s. The IDB transfer time (between the OMT and the RBS) is specied within the context of Installation Data Handling. Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 43 43.1 43.2 External Alarms External Alarms References Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. Concepts External Alarm An alarm that originates from a source dened by the customer. The alarm is reported over A-bis transparently through the RBS. An example is a re alarm. Auxiliary Faults Detected by supervision of auxiliary equipment. Auxiliary Equipment Equipment connected to the RBS but normally situated outside the RBS cabinet. Alarm Inlet Alarm Setup Basic Character Set The binary inlet to which the supervised equipment is connected. Used for both Auxiliary Faults and External Alarms. The parameter denition for the alarm inlets, which is set by OMT. A subset of the CCITT International Alphabet No 5, International Reference Version. See table below:
Table 122 Basic Character set Character Space 1
B Q 2
C R 3
D S 4
E T 5
F U 6
G 7 H 8 I V W X 9 J Y K Z 0
A P _ 43.3 Function Code 20hex 30hex - 39hex 3Ahex - 40hex 41hex - 4Fhex 50hex - 5Ahex 5Fhex L M N O Purpose This function facilitates external alarms reported via the RBS. Example of this is "re alarm". Each active alarm will activate one common indicator light, which will be deactivated when there is no alarm active. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 331 (421) External Alarms Preconditions and initiation The external alarms function is started by the restart and recovery function. Description The following parameters are associated with each supervised external alarm:
Inlet Number 116. Denes which inlet the external alarm source equipment is connected to. Inlet Usage Alarm Identity Alarm Severity Alarm Data Fault Activation Criteria
"Auxiliary Fault", "External Alarm" or
"Not Dened". The default alarm setup is that alarm inlets are "Not Dened". The numeric identity of a specic external alarm within the RBS. There are two possible severity classications, "Level 1" or "Level 2". The classication of a specic external alarm is xed when dening the external alarm. How to handle a severity level is customer-dened. An alphanumeric string which is presented to the operator when the external alarm is raised. The basic character set , that is presented in Concepts, should be used. The alphanumeric string associated with each external alarm may contain a maximum of 62 characters. The way in which the external alarm is activated, either by breaking or closing the circuit on the external alarm inlet. The RBS supervises each congured external alarm. An external alarm is ltered, i.e. must remain in a state for a xed period of time
(approximately 3 seconds) before the BSC is notied of the external alarm raising or termination. The raising or termination of each external alarm is reported to the BSC with the associated Alarm identity, Alarm severity and Alarm data. To determine which external alarms are raised, the BSC can request this information from the RBS via A-bis. 43.4 Operation and Maintenance Purpose Maintenance functions related to external alarms are described within the context of Operation and Maintenance Terminal. The visual indicators relevant to external alarms are described within the context of Operation and Maintenance Support. 332 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 External Alarms Capabilities The Capabilities of the different Radio Base Stations are shown in the table below:
Table 123 Maximum Number of external alarms dened by the customer Radio Base Station RBS 2101 RBS 2102 RBS 2103 RBS 2202 RBS 2302 External Alarm, maximum 8 16 16 16
(1) 8 In case of three cascaded RBS 2302, thew maximum number of External
(1) Alarms is 16. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 333 (421) External Alarms This page is intentionally left blank 334 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 44 44.1 44.2 Handling of Auxiliary Equipment Handling of Auxiliary Equipment A number of customer dened, antenna related auxiliary equipment can be supervised by the RBS. The raising of an auxiliary fault is, after analysis in the RBS, reported to the BSC. Depending on what severity the operator has dened for the fault, the concerned MO could be taken out of operation. References Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. Concepts Auxiliary Equipment ARAE Auxiliary Faults External Alarms Alarm Inlet Alarm Setup Equipment connected to the RBS but normally situated outside the RBS cabinet. Antenna Related Auxiliary Equipment. Examples are boosters and active antennas. Detected by supervision of auxiliary equipment. Binary alarms that are reported over Abis transparently through the RBS. An example is re alarm. The binary inlet to which the supervised equipment is connected. Used for both Auxiliary Faults and External Alarms. The parameter denition for the alarm inlets, which is set by OMT. 44.3 Function The following ARAE supervision parameters are associated with each auxiliary fault:
Inlet number 116. Denes which inlet the Auxiliary Equipment is connected to. Inlet usage
"Auxiliary Fault", "External Alarm" or
"Not dened". The default alarm setup is that all alarm inlets are Not Dened, which means that they have no effect on fault reports for auxiliary equipment, external alarms or fault indicators. Fault activation criteria Either closing or breaking the sensor loop. If inlet usage is set as "Auxiliary Fault", the following fault information parameters are also set:
Affected functionality RX and/or TX EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 335 (421) Climate Protection Fault class There are two possible severity classications Denes the physical antenna Antenna instance number Each of these parameters is initially dened manually on RBS installation, using an OMT. Subsequently any of these parameters may be modied using an OMT. The RBS supervises each conguration auxiliary fault. An auxiliary fault is ltered, that is, must remain in a new state a xed period of time (approximately 3 seconds) before the BSC is notied. The detected fault is reported by sending of a fault report for the concerned MO(s) over the Abis interface according to the "Diagnostic and Fault Handling" function. Which MO class and instance to report the fault on, is derived from the ARAE supervision parameters, receiver diversity conguration and radio conguration. The BSC will then take the affected MO(s) out of operation, if appropriate. Operational Conditions Operation and Maintenance Maintenance functions related to auxiliary faults are described within the context of Operation and Maintenance Terminal. The visual indicators relevant to auxiliary faults are described are described within the context of Operation and Maintenance Support. Capabilities The alarm inlets are used both for external alarms and supervision of ARAE faults. The capabilities of the different Radio Base Stations are shown in the table below:
Table 124 Maximum number of auxiliary faults dened by the customer Radio Base Station RBS 2101 RBS 2102 RBS 2103 RBS 2202 Auxiliary Faults, Maximum 8 16 16 16 44.4 44.4.1 44.4.2 336 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 45 45.1 Climate Protection Climate Protection The "Climate Protection" function:
Supervises and maintains the internal temperature and humidity within allowed ranges for the units in the RBS Controls the connection and disconnection of power, at start (or restart) of the RBS and at extreme internal temperature. The external temperature range for each RBS type is product-specic. To get a complete picture of the climate protection systems capacity, this document should be read in conjunction with the relevant product specication. The Climate Protection of an RBS can be maintained with one or a combination of the functions described in this chapter. RBS congurations with one or more cabinets are handled. Concepts External Internal Temperature Normal range Normal operation Outside the RBS cabinet Inside the RBS cabinet In this chapter, shaded air temperature Is internal temperature within +5 C to
+45 C Is internal temperature range which is 5 C to 10 C within safe range in both high and low limits Specied external Normal Condition range Is stated in relevant product chapter Normal Condition, safe function and non-destruction Are dened within the context of Enviromental Capability User In this chapter, any unit that needs power from the cabinet power system in order to function. 45.2 Functions 45.2.1 Climate Control by Air Conditioning Operational Conditions This function requires AC power and an internal temperature above 0 C. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 337 (421) Climate Protection Description This function maintains the internal temperature by an internally circulated air system (separated from the external environment). The internally circulated air will pass through an active cooling unit which has the capacity to lower the internal air temperature below the external environmental temperature. 45.2.2 Climate Control by Heat Exchanging Operational Conditions This function is available when the system voltage is present and the internal temperature is above 0 C. Description This function maintains the internal temperature by an internally circulated air system (separated from the external environment). The internally circulated air will pass through a heat exchanger which cools down the internal air to a temperature just above the external environmental temperature. 45.2.3 Climate Control by Forced Air Operational Conditions This function is available when the system voltage is present and the internal temperature is above 0 C. Description This function maintains the internal temperature by ltering external air and forcing it through or passing the units. By continuously replacing the warmed air with air of a lower temperature and using controlled air speed, the internal temperature will be kept within working range. 45.2.4 Heating Operational Conditions This function is available with low internal temperature and AC power. The function is only used in products specied for external temperature ranges whose lower limit is below +5 C. Description The heating function uses a combination consisting of a heating element and fans to force the heated air through the RBS air channel system. The heating function controls the internal temperature to above normal operation low limit. 338 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 45.2.5 45.2.6 45.2.7 Climate Protection Climate Supervision The internal temperature and humidity of the air in the RBS are measured by sensors and kept within working ranges. The following parameters are measured:
The internal temperature outside the safe function range The internal temperature outside the normal range The internal relative humidity raised above the upper limit for safe function, see note below. Administration The internal temperature in the RBS cabinet is readable. The internal realative humidity in the RBS is readable. See note below Note:
The humidity function is not needed for RBSs designed for indoor use according to ETSI 3.1. Reliability The cooling Climate Protection is available when the temperature is within the specied external normal condition range. Alarm reporting and administration are available within the safe function range. The Heating function is available when the temperature is above the specied external normal condition low limit and up to an internal temperature of +5 C. Alarm reporting and administration are available within the safe function range. Power Connection At start and restart of the RBS, the connection of the RBS power system to the incoming AC mains and the connection of the users to the DC power in the RBS depends on the current internal temperature. When starting or restarting the RBS, actions are rst taken to free the internal surfaces from condensation. There are a number of startup scenarios, based on the internal temperature at the moment of startup:
The internal temperature within the safe function range The RBS power system and the user are connected The internal temperature is below the lower limit for safe function low limit The internal temperature is increased by heating to above the lower limit for safe function. Then the power system and the users are connected The internal temperature is above the upper limit for safe function. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 339 (421) Climate Protection The RBS power system is connected but the users are not. However, as soon as the internal temperature falls below the upper limit for safe function, the users are connected. 45.2.8 Power Disconnection The users are disconnected from the DC power when the internal temperature falls below the lower limit for safe function. The users are reconnected to the DC power when the internal temperature has raised 5C above the lower limit for safe function. 340 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 EMC Capabilities 46 EMC Capabilities This specication covers the capabilities of the RBS 2000 in respect of EMC (ElectroMagnetic Compatibility). The capabilities include conducted and radiated emission as well as conducted and radiated immunity thresholds. The internal EMC capabilities of RBS 2000 and interference appearing on antenna ports are not covered by this chapter. 46.1 References 1. 89/336/EEC EMC directive Council directive of 3 May 1989 on approximation of laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility 2. ETS 300 3422, Nov 1994 EMC for European digital cellular telecommunication (GSM) mobile radio and ancillary equipment. 3. EN 55 022, April 1987 Limits and methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment 4. EN 50 081-1, January 1992 Electromagnetic compatibility - Generic emission standard, Part 1:
Residential, commercial and light industry 5. EN 50 082-1, January 1992 Electromagnetic compatibility - Generic immunity standard, Part 1: Residential, commercial and light industry 6. 7. 8. IEC 801-3, 1984 Radiated electromagnetic eld requirement EN 6100032, EMC part 3, section 2 limits for harmonic current emissions, 1995 EN 6100033, EMC part 3, section 2 limitation of voltage uctuations and icker in low-voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current <16 A, 1994 9. EN 6100042, 1995 Electrostatic discharge requirements 10. EN 6100044, 1995 Electrical fast transient/burst requirement 11. EN 6100045 Surge Immunity Requirements 12. EN 6100048, 1993 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 341 (421) EMC Capabilities Power frequency magnetic els immunity tests 13. EN 61000411 Voltage Dips, short interruptions and voltage variations. Immunity tests 14. VDE 0878, 1986 Radio Interface Suppression of Telecommunication Systems and Apparatus 15. ITU-T Recommendation K.20, 1984 Resistibility of Telecommunication Switching Equipment to Overvoltages and Overcurrents. 46.2 Concepts External signal line - outdoor systems Cable or lead longer than 1 metre intended for connection to units located outside the cabinet Telecommunication line Cable intended for connection to a public network Enclosure Port Performance Criteria A Performance Criteria B Performance Criteria C Performance Criteria CT The physical boundary of the RBS through which electromagnetic elds may radiate or impinge The system shall continue to operate as intended. During the test, no degradation of performance or loss of function is allowed below the specied test level The system shall continue to operate as intended after the test. During the test, degradation of performance is however allowed below the specied test level. No change of actual operating state or stored data is allowed Temporary loss of function is allowed, provided the function is self-recoverable or can be restored by the operation of the controls Continous phenomena applied to Transmitters. A communication link shall be established at the start of the test and maintained during the test. For the system the RXQUAL (as dened in GSM 05.08) of the downlink shall not exceed three, measured during each individual exposure in the test sequence 342 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Performance Criteria TT Performance Criteria CR Performance Criteria TR EMC Capabilities Transient phenomena applied to Transmitters. A communication link shall be established at the start of the test and maintained during and after injection of the transients Continous phenomena applied to Receivers. A communication link shall be established at the start of the test and maintained during the test. For the system the RXQUAL (as dened in GSM 05.08) of the uplink shall not exceed three, measured during each individual exposure in the test sequence Transient phenomena applied to Receivers. A communication link shall be established at the start of the test and maintained during and after injection of the transients Performance Criteria A(K.20): The test object shall withstand the test without damage or other disturbances after the test Performance Criteria B(K.20): A re hazard should not arise in the test object. Any damage or permanent malfunction occuring should be conned to a small number of external line interface circuits. 46.3 Capabilities 46.3.1 RBS Description Hardware The capabilities are tested for an RBS equipped with a minimum representative conguration of units. This system is representative of installed systems in terms of function, which includes at least one of each function unit type, and electromagnetic radiation characteristics. The number and types of sub-units are given from results of investigations in accordance with ETS 300 342-2, Nov 1994. Software The capabilities are valid for a standard setup of system software with default parameters. Performance For the immunity capabilities the RBS is operating and will full the performance criteria stated for each test. For emission capabilities all equipment in the RBS was enabled during verication to create the worst emission case. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 343 (421) EMC Capabilities EMC directive The EMC capabilities of the RBS fullls the mandatory requirements specied in the EMC directive, 89/336/EEC, which gives compliance for trade in EU member countries. Generic Standards The following generic standards are fullled by the system:
EN 50 0811, Jan 1992 Emission EN 50 0821, Jan 1992 Immunity 46.3.2 Conducted Emission Table 125 Voltage uctuation on AC power supply leads Basic standard EN 61000-3-3 Limit Set by Table II in EN 61000-3-3 Table 126 Harmonics on AC power supply leads Basic standard EN 61000-3-2 Limit Set by Table 1 in EN 61000-3-2 Table 127 Interference on AC power supply leads Basic standard Limit EN 55 022 Class B Limit standard VDE 0878, Conducted emission, part 1 Limit Class B Table 128 Interference on DC power supply leads Basic standard EN 50 022 and proposed amendment to CISPR 22 Limit Class B Limit standard ETS 300 342-2, Nov 1994 Limit Class B Table 129 Interference on signal and telecommunication lines Basic standard CISPR/G(sec) December 1993 46.3.3 Radiated Emission from Enclosure Table 130 Electric eld emission Basic standard Limit EN 55 022 Class B 344 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 EMC Capabilities Table 131 Magnetic eld emission Limit standard VDE 0878, Magnetic emission, part 1 Limit Class B 46.3.4 Conducted Immunity on AC Input Power Ports Table 132 Fast transient test Basic standard EN 61000-4-4 Test level Performance 4 kV common mode between all lines and cabinet ground reference Criteria B Limit standard ETS 300 342-2 Test level Performance 4 kV common mode between all lines and cabinet ground reference Criteria A for a complete system Criteria TT for transmitter units Criteria TR for receiver units Table 133 Surge test Limit standard ETS 300 342-2 Test level 2 kV common mode between all lines and cabinet ground reference 1) 1 kV differential mode, between line and line Performance Criteria A for a complete system Criteria TT for transmitter units Criteria TR for receiver units 1) System primary protected RF common mode test Table 134 Limit standard ETS 300 342-2 Test level Performance 10 V(rms) Criteria A for a complete system Criteria CT for transmitter units Criteria CR for receiver units Table 135 Voltage dips and interruptions on AC ports Basic standard Performance EN 61000-4-11 Criteria A for a complete system EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 345 (421) EMC Capabilities 46.3.5 Immunity on DC Input/Output Power Ports Table 136 Fast transient test Basic standard EN 61000-4-4 Test level Performance 2 kV common mode between all lines and cabinet ground reference Criteria B for a complete system Limit standard ETS 300 342-2 Test level Performance 2 kV common mode between all lines and cabinet ground reference Criteria A for a complete system Criteria TT for transmitter units Criteria TR for receiver units Table 137 Surge test Limit standard ETS 300 342-2 Test level 1 kV common mode between line and cabinet ground reference 0.5 kV differential mode, between line and line Performance Criteria A for a complete system Criteria TT for transmitter units Criteria TR for receiver units Table 138 RF common mode test Limit standard ETS 300 342-2 Test level Performance 3 V(rms) Criteria A for a complete system Criteria CT for transmitter units Criteria CR for receiver units 46.3.6 Immunity on Telecommunication and External Signal Lines Table 139 Fast transient test Basic standard EN 61000-4-4 Test level Performance 2 kV common mode between line and cabinet ground reference Criteria B Limit standard ETS 300 342-2 Test level Performance 4 kV common mode between line and cabinet ground reference Criteria A for a complete system Criteria TT for transmitter units Criteria TR for receiver units 346 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 EMC Capabilities Table 140 Surge test 1.2/50 pulses Limit standard EN 61000-4-5 Test level 2 kV common mode between line and cabinet ground reference 1 kV differential mode between line and line Performance Criteria B for a complete system Criteria TT for transmitter units Criteria TR for receiver units Table 141 Surge test 10/700 pulses Limit standard EN 61000-4-5 Test level 1 kV common mode between line and cabinet ground reference 1 kV differential mode between line and line Performance Criteria B for a complete system Criteria TT for transmitter units Criteria TR for receiver units Table 142 Power induction test Basic standard ITU-T K.20 Test level Performance 600 V(rms) common mode Criteria A(K.20) Table 143 RF common mode test Limit standard ETS 300 342-2 Test level Performance 10 V(rms) Criteria A for a complete system Criteria CT for transmitter units Criteria CR for receiver units 46.3.7 Radiated Immunity of Enclosure Port Table 144 Immunity of continuous electric elds Basic standard Test level Performance IEC 801-3 10 V/m Criteria A Limit standard ETS 300 342-2 Test level 10 V/m, 80 MHz - 1 GHz Frequency range 30 V/m, 1 GHz-20 GHz Performance Criteria A for a complete system EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 347 (421) EMC Capabilities Criteria CT for transmitter units Criteria CR for receiver units Table 145 Immunity of 50/60 Hz magnetic elds Basic standard EN 61000-4-8 Test level Performance 10 A/m, 50/60 Hz Criteria A 46.3.8 Electro-static Discharges Table 146 Immunity of enclosure port Basic standard EN 61000-4-2 Test level Air discharges: 15 kV Contact discharges: 8 kV Performance Criteria B Limit standard ETS 300 342-2 Test level Air discharges: 8 kV Contact discharges: 4 kV. Performance Criteria A for a complete system Criteria TT for transmitter units Criteria TR for receiver units 348 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 47 47.1 Transmission Interface Handling G.703 2048 kbit/s Transmission Interface Handling G.703 2048 kbit/s This function specication covers RBS functions for layer 1 communications on A-bis. The function Layer 1 Termination terminates a 2048 kbit/s G.703 PCM line. The function Supervision of Transmission faults detects faults in the transmission interface. The function Supervision of Transmission Quality monitors the quality of the transmission. References Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter.
/GSM 08.54/
GSM Technical Specication 08.54 All ITU-T references refer to the White Book (ITU=International Telecommunications Union). 47.2 Concepts CMRU Main RU RU Timeslot 0 (TS0) Central Main Replaceble Unit. An RBS has exactly one CMRU. In the RBS 2000 hardware architecture, the DXU is the CMRU Contains one or more processors, to which software can be downloaded from the BSC. A Main RU is either central or distributed, see above. A Main RU may or may not have a direct signalling link to the BSC. Replaceble Unit. An RU is the smallest unit that can be handled on site or in a repair center and of which information can be retrieved via OMT or BSC. The content and structure of timeslot 0 is described in the table below. This gure is included to ease the understanding of the functions Layer 1 Termination and Supervision of Transmission Faults. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 349 (421) Transmission Interface Handling G.703 2048 kbit/s Table 147 Timeslot 0 and CRC-4 multiframe structure Sub multi frame Frame number 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 c1 0 c2 0 c3 1 c4 0 cl 1 c2 1 c3 E c4 E 2 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Bit 1 to 8 of timeslot 0 4 1 5 1 6 0 7 1 8 1 Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 1 1 0 1 1 Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 1 1 0 1 1 Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 1 1 0 1 1 Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 1 1 0 1 1 Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 1 1 0 1 1 Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 1 1 0 1 1 Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 1 1 0 1 1 Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 3 0 A 0 A 0 A 0 A 0 A 0 A 0 A 0 A CRC-4 c1, c2, c3, c4 A E Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7, Sa8 Downstream Upstream Cyclic Redundancy Check (ITU-T G.704) CRC-4 bits (see the section Layer 1 Termination 2048 kbit/s below) Alarm bit (see the section Layer 1 Termination 2048 kbit/s below) Error bit (see the section Layer 1 Termination 2048 kbit/s below) Spare bits (see the section Layer 1 Termination 2048 kbit/s below) The path for information from the BSC to the MS, see Figure 104 on page 351 The path for information from the MS to the BSC, see Figure 104 on page 351 Linear Cascade Chain A cascade of RBS:s according to Figure 104 on page 351 350 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Transmission Interface Handling G.703 2048 kbit/s Downstream Mobile Station Upstream Downstream BSC Upstream RBS 1 PCM-A PCM-B Upstream Downstream RBS 2 PCM-A PCM-B Upstream 01_0306A 47.3 47.3.1 Figure 104 Upstream and Downstream For further information, see ITU-T G.704 White Book. Functions Layer 1 Termination 2048 kbit/s The function is initiated during restart of DXU. Layer 1 termination of the transport network interface is handled according to /GSM:08.54:4.0.0/. This includes :
Physical and electrical characteristics according to ITU-T rec. G.703 (interface at 2048 kbit/s, 75 or 120 ohm selectable and over-voltage protection according to Annex B) Frame structure according to ITU-T rec. G.704 section 2.3
(includes handling of the E-bit in timeslot 0) Frame alignment and CRC-4 procedures according to ITU-T rec. G.706 section 4 Synchronization of layer 1 handling is described in subsection Section 47.3.2 on page 352. Detection of fault conditions, alarm states, and consequent actions. This includes detection of:
LOS (Loss Of Signal) LOF (Loss Of Frame alignment) ERATE (Error RATE) AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) RAI (Remote Alarm Indication) The consequent actions are transmission of:
EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 351 (421) Transmission Interface Handling G.703 2048 kbit/s Alarm indication to the remote end (A-bit in time slot 0 equal to
"1") CRC-4 error indicator (E-bit in time slot 0 equal to "0") Both actions are according to ITU-T recommendations G.704 and G.732. Transmission of spare bits (Sa4-Sa8). The spare bits form a xed bit pattern (see section Operation and Maintenance below) Two PCM paths are supported: PCM-A and PCM-B. Layer 1 Synchronization Synchronization of layer 1 is either derived from one of the incoming PCM paths or taken from a free running oscillator. A PCM path with LOF (Loss Of Frame alignment), LOS (Loss Of Signal), AIS
(Alarm Indication Signal) or that is not available for synchronization according to a parameter in RBS DB cannot be used as reference source. The synchronization of layer 1 is in one of three states:
1. PCM -A can be used as reference source PCM -A is selected as the reference source PCM-A incoming is used to synchronize PCM-A outgoing PCM-A incoming is used to synchronize PCM-B outgoing. 2. PCM -B can be used as reference source, PCM-A cannot PCM -B is selected as the reference source PCM-B incoming is used to synchronize PCM-A outgoing PCM-B incoming is used to synchronize PCM-B outgoing 3. Neither PCM-A nor B can be used as reference source The free running oscillator is selected as reference source The free running oscillator is used to synchronize both PCM-A and B outgoing. The default setting of PCM-A and PCM-B is:
PCM-A: Available for synchronization PCM-B: Not available for synchronization The parameters can be modied from OMT. The new setting is activated immediately. Thus, the updated parameters are used when the selection of synchronization source is performed. Supervision of Transmission Faults The function is initiated during restart of DXU. The conguration of fault supervision can only be performed when the AO DP (Digital Path) is in state "Disable". The reporting to the BSC is Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 47.3.2 47.3.3 352 (421) Transmission Interface Handling G.703 2048 kbit/s performed when the AO DP is in state "Enable". When the AO DP is enabled, all fault supervision states are set to zero. Reports are sent to the BSC is sent to the BSC when the alarm status is changed or when the BSC requires it. Fault supervision of the PCM line is performed according to /ITU-T rec. G.732 section 4/ and /GSM:08.54:4.0.0/. This includes detection of the following fault conditions:
CSES (Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds) or excessive bit ERATE (Error RATE) LOF (Loss of Frame Alignment) LOS (Loss Of incoming Signal) AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) RAI (Remote Alarm Indication) UAST (UnAvailable STate supervision) Fault handling is according to Diagnostic and Fault Handling functionality. LOF commences CRC-4 is OFF: Three consecutive frame alignment signals in TS0 received with an error. CRC-4 is ON: CRC multiframe alignment has not been achieved within a search time of 500 ms or three consecutive frame alignment signals in TS0 received with an error or CRC multiframe alignment is lost during monitoring for incorrect frame alignment (915 errored CRC blocks out of 1000). LOF ceases CRC-4 is OFF: Recovery of frame alignment signal. CRC-4 is ON: Recovery of CRC multiframe alignment signal. CSES commences More than N SES (Severely Errored Seconds) detected consecutively. The criteria for SES are described in the section Severely Errored Seconds Supervision. This condition is set instead of ERATE when quality supervision including CRC-4 is used. CSES ceases More than N non-SES detected consecutively. ERATE commences Detection of bit error ratio equal to or more than 103. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 353 (421) Transmission Interface Handling G.703 2048 kbit/s The frame alignment word in time slot 0 even frames is used to determine the error rate. ERATE ceases Detection of bit error ratio less than 103. LOS commences Three or less 1s are received in a time interval of 250 s. LOS ceases More than three 1s are received in a time interval of 250 s. AIS commences A continuous stream of 1s during two frames. A limited number of 0s corresponding to BER = 103 is allowed. AIS ceases Frame alignment signal is detected or recognised. RAI commences The A-bit (in timeslot 0) = 1. RAI ceases The A-bit (in timeslot 0) = 0. UAST commences UAST commences when unavailable state is declared. Each direction
(upstream and downstream) is supervised independently of the other. An unavailable state for one direction is declared at the onset of P consecutive SES for the direction of interest. These P seconds are considered to be part of the unavailable time. Together with the alarm status, time information for each direction of UAST is reported to the BSC. When UAST commences, zero is reported as time information. When UAST ceases, the time that the UAST alarm has been activated is reported. When the BSC requests the alarm status, two scenarios are possible:
UAST is activated and UAST is not activated. If it is activated, zero is reported as time information. Otherwise, the time that the UAST alarm was activated the latest time, is reported to the BSC. UAST ceases UAST ceases when available state is declared. Each direction (upstream and downstream) is supervised independently of the other. 354 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 47.3.4 Transmission Interface Handling G.703 2048 kbit/s A new period of available state begins at the onset of Q consecutive seconds with no SES detected. These Q seconds are considered to be part of the available time. Supervision of Transmission Quality The function is initiated when the AO DP is enabled from the BSC. The conguration of quality supervision can only be performed when the AO DP is in state Disable. The reporting to the BSC is performed when the AO DP is in state Enable. Quality supervision consists of six supervision functions:
SES (Severely Errored Seconds) DF (Disturbance Frequency) BFF (Bit Fault Frequency) ES (Errored Seconds) SF (Slip Frequency) UAS (Unavailable Seconds) Bit Fault Frequency supervision The frame alignment word in time slot 0 in even frames is used to determine an error rate. The actual error rate is established by taking the number of faulty frame alignment words and dividing them by the total number of checked bits during the BI (Base Interval). The bit fault frequency is supervised and reported as the mean bit error ratio in ppm (parts per million) during the BI. Disturbance Frequency supervision This supervision monitors the detected fault situations which are regarded as disturbances upon detection. Upon detection the following events are regarded as disturbances:
RAI (Remote Alarm Indication) received from remote end LOF (Loss Of Frame) alignment AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) LOS (Loss Of Signal) Two disturbance frequency counters exist. Both are derived from the downstream PCM port, but one is closely connected to downstream faults while the other one is related to upstream faults. The DF downstream counter is incremented by 1 for each occurrence of LOS or LOF or AIS The DF upstream counter is incremented by 1 for each occurrence of RAI. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 355 (421) Transmission Interface Handling G.703 2048 kbit/s Every detected fault situation is registered and regarded as a disturbance, even if it does not last long enough to be recognised as a fault. The DF is supervised and reported as the number of disturbances during the BI. Both counters are handled separately. Slip Frequency supervision This supervision monitors the number of slips per time interval. A slip is dened as where one frame (256 bits) is either lost or duplicated. The SF counter is incremented by one for each slip on the PCM port downstream. The SF is supervised and reported as the number of slips during the BI. LOF alignment CRC-4 is ON: At least one CRC-4 error CRC-4 is OFF: At least one frame bit error Errored Seconds supervision An ES is a second with at least one of the following events:
A-bit equal to 1 from the remote end LOS Slip AIS E-bit indication received from the remote end (only valid when CRC-4 is used) CRC-4 error (only valid when CRC-4 is used) or Two counters for errored seconds exist. Both are derived from the downstream PCM port, but one is closely connected to downstream faults while the other one is related to upstream faults. The downstream counter is incremented by 1 for each second with at least one of the events:
Frame bit error (only valid when CRC-4 is not used) or LOF or LOS or AIS or Slip The upstream counter is incremented by 1 for each second with at least one of the events:
A-bit=1 or E-bit=0 (only valid when CRC-4 is used) ES are not counted during unavailable state. Both ES counters are reported after each BI. 356 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Transmission Interface Handling G.703 2048 kbit/s CRC-4 is ON: At least N1 CRC-4 errors CRC-4 is OFF: At least N4 frame bit errors Severely Errored Seconds supervision An SES is a second with at least one of the events:
A-bit equal to 1 from the remote end LOF alignment LOS AIS N1 E-bit indication received from the remote end (only valid when CRC-4 is used) Two counters for severely errored seconds exist. Both are derived from the downstream PCM port, but one is closely connected to downstream faults while the other one is related to upstream faults. The downstream counter is incremented by 1 for each second with at least one of the following events:
N4 frame bit errors (only valid when CRC-4 is not used) or N1 CRC-4 errors (only valid when CRC-4 is used) or 1 LOF or 1 LOS or 1 AIS The upstream counter is incremented by 1 for each second with at least one of the following events:
N1 E-bit=0 (only valid when CRC-4 is used) 1 A-bit=1 or SES are not counted during unavailable state. Both SES counters are reported after each BI. UAS and Unavailable State supervision UAS is a count of one-second intervals during which service is unavailable. This period of time is referred to as the unavailable state. The two directions (upstream and downstream) are supervised separately. That is, one of the directions can be in the unavailable state but the other is in the available state. The counting of ES and SES is stopped for both directions as soon as at least one of the directions is in the unavailable state. An unavailable state for one direction is declared at the onset of P consecutive SES for the direction of interest. These P seconds are considered to be part of the unavailable time. A new period of available state begins at the onset of Q consecutive seconds with no SES detected. These Q seconds are considered to be part of the available time. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 357 (421) Transmission Interface Handling G.703 2048 kbit/s 47.3.5 The number of unavailable seconds for each direction is reported after each BI. Administration Supervision of transmission faults and transmission quality can be performed in different ways. With the help of parameters, the supervision can be congured to meet a wide range of requirements. The conguration parameters can only be changed when the AO DP is in state Disable. The parameters of interest are given below:
The conguration parameter N Denes the threshold number (SES) for commence, and cease, of CSES Value range is 5-60 Default value is 10 The parameters P and Q Used for dening unavailable state Value range is 5-15 s Default value is 10 s The parameters N1 and N4 Dene the threshold numbers for ES and SES. Value range and default values are listed below:
Table 148 Parameters N1-N4 Parameter Value 805
28 Range 1-1000 Description (number of...) CRC-4 errors for SES and E-bits equal to "0"
Not used Not used 1-100 Frame errors for SES N1 N2 N3 N4 The conguration parameter T The parameter T denes the time interval for ERATE supervision Value range is 1-5 s Default value is 2 s The conguration parameter AFT The conguration parameter AFT denes the Alarm Filtering Time for all the fault supervision functions Value range is 50-5000 ms Default value is 125 ms 358 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Transmission Interface Handling G.703 2048 kbit/s The resolution is 1 ms, but the accuracy is 25 ms Base interval for ES, SES, UAS, BFF and SF Valid values: 60 and 80 s Base interval for DF and SF Value range: 1-24 h 47.3.6 Multidrop Layer 1 For an RBS congured for multidrop, the function is initiated during restart of CMRU. For an RBS not congured for multidrop, the function is initiated when the parameter Network Topology is set by the OMT to indicate multidrop (cascade). 47.4 47.4.1 AIS Generation When entering one of the alarm states LOF, LOS or AIS at PCM-
A input, AIS is transmitted on PCM-B output. AIS is transmitted until the alarm state is left When entering and leaving alarm states, the alarm ltering time is used (AFT). Operational Conditions Operation and Maintenance Maintenance data such as CRC-4 status and the values of the spare bits in timeslot 0 can be set by the OMT. The OMT part is described within the context of Operation and Maintenance Terminal. The values of the spare bits in timeslot 0 can also be set by the BSC. The BSC can set the data when the AO DP is in state "Disable". The new settings will take effect next time the AO DP is enabled. The IDB is not updated if a new setting is ordered from the BSC. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 359 (421) Transmission Interface Handling G.703 2048 kbit/s This page is intentionally left blank 360 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 48 48.1 Transmission Interface Handling DS1 1544 kbit/s Transmission Interface Handling DS1 1544 kbit/s This function specication covers RBS functions for layer 1 communications on A-bis. The function Layer 1 Termination terminates a 1544 kbit/s DS1 PCM line. The function Supervision of Transmission faults detects faults in the transmission interface. The function Supervision of Transmission Quality monitors the quality of the transmission. References Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. Transmission references :
ANSI T1.403-1989 AT&T T1.5 Service (TR 62411) Dec. 1990 Bellcore TR-NWT-000499 Apr. 1992 48.2 Concepts CMRU Main RU RU Central Main Replaceble Unit. An RBS has exactly one CMRU. In the RBS 2000 hardware architecture, the DXU is the CMRU Contains one or more processors, to which software can be downloaded from the BSC. A Main RU is either central or distributed, see above. A Main RU may or may not have a direct signalling link to the BSC. Replaceble Unit. An RU is the smallest unit that can be handled on site or in a repair center and of which information can be retrieved via OMT or BSC. Extended superframe format The content and structure of the F-bit is described in the gure below. This gure is included to ease the understanding of the functions Layer 1 Termination and Supervision of Transmission Faults. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 361 (421) Transmission Interface Handling DS1 1544 kbit/s Table 149 Extended Superframe Format (ESF) F bits Bit number 0 193 386 579 772 965 1158 1351 1544 1737 1930 2123 2316 2509 2702 2895 3088 3281 3474 3667 3860 4053 4246 4439 Frame number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 FPS
0
0
1
0
1
1 DL m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
CRC
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
Bit use in each timeslot Signalling bit use options Trafc1) Sign.1) T1) 1 - 8 1 - 8 1 - 8 1 - 8 1 - 8 1 - 7 1 - 8 1 - 8 1 - 8 1 - 8 1 - 8 1 - 7 1 - 8 1 - 8 1 - 8 1 - 8 1 - 8 1 - 7 1 - 8 1 - 8 1 - 8 1 - 8 1 - 8 1 - 7
8
8
8
8
4 2
A A
A B
A A
A B 16
A
B
C
D 1)No channel associated signalling, only T-column applicable. 8 trafc bits in every frame. Frame 1 Transmitted rst Frames 6, 12, 18 and 24 Denoted signalling frames FPS DL CRC Option T Option 2 Option 4 Option 16 Framing Pattern Sequence (...001011... 4 kbit/s Data Link (Message bits m) CRC-6 Cyclic Redundancy Check (Bits C1-C6) Trafc (Bit 8 not used for Robbed-bit signalling) 2-State Signalling (Channel A) 4-State Signalling (Channel A and B) 16-State Signalling (Channel A, B, C and D) 362 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Downstream Upstream Transmission Interface Handling DS1 1544 kbit/s The path for information from the BSC to the MS, see Figure 105 on page 363. The path for information from the MS to the BSC, see Figure 105 on page 363. Linear Cascade Chain A cascade of RBS:s according to Figure 105 on page 363. Downstream Mobile Station Upstream Downstream BSC Upstream RBS 1 PCM-A PCM-B Upstream Downstream RBS 2 PCM-A PCM-B Upstream 48.3 48.3.1 01_0306A Figure 105 Upstream and Downstream Functions Layer 1 Termination DS1 1544 kbit/s The function is initiated during restart of DXU. Layer 1 termination on the transport network interface includes:
Physical and electrical characteristics according to ANSI T1.403
(interface at 1544 kbit/s, one pair for each direction of transmission, test load impedance 100 ohm, resistive). Frame structure according to ANSI T1.403, ESF. T option only, see Table 149 on page 362. 8 trafc bits in all frames in the ESF. Line coding B8ZS according to AT&T section 4.2.2. (ref. 4). B8ZS is the only technology to provide 64 kb/s Clear Channel Capability (64 CCC). When no message is sent on the Data Link (DL, message bit m) in the ESF, an idle pattern (01111110) (ref. ANSI 6.4(2)) is transmitted. The Data Link is used for RAI (Remote Alarm Indication, "Yellow Alarm") information in both directions. See Table 149 on page 362. Frame alignment and CRC-6 procedures according to ANSI T1.403, 24-frame ESF. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 363 (421) Transmission Interface Handling DS1 1544 kbit/s 48.3.2 Input jitter and wander tolerance according to AT&T Accunet T1.5 Service 1990 (TR 62411). This tolerance is valid for PCM-A and PCM-B respectively. The tolerance of relative phase differance (that is, phase differance between PCM-A and PCM-B) is 56 UIPTP Fault supervision of each PCM path is performed according to ANSI T1.403, section 9 (1995) AT&T T1.5, paragraph 7 This includes detection of the fault conditions LOF (Loss Of Frame), LOS (Loss Of Signal), ERATE (Excessive error RATE), AIS (Alarm Indication Signal, Blue Alarm), and RAI (Remote Alarm Indication). It also includes a consequent action. The consequent action for the faults LOF, LOS, ERATE, AIS and UAST (UnAvailable STate) downlink is to send RAI patterns (...1111111100000000...) continuously on the 4 kbit/s link to the remote end. This is performed for at least one second. Two PCM paths are supported: PCM-A and PCM-B. Layer 1 Synchronization Synchronization of the outgoing signals (on the transport network interface) is according to AT&T T1.5 Service (TR 62411) dec. 1990, chapter 6 Synchronization and Timing. Synchronization of layer 1 is either derived from one of the incoming PCM paths or taken from a free running oscillator. A PCM path with LOF (Loss Of Frame alignment), LOS (Loss Of Signal), AIS
(Alarm Indication Signal) or that is not available for synchronization according to a parameter in RBS DB cannot be used as reference source. The synchronization of layer 1 is one of four states:
1. Both PCM-A and B can be used as reference source PCM-A is selected as the reference source PCM-A incoming is used to synchronize PCM-A outgoing PCM-B incoming is used to synchronize PCM-B outgoing. 2. PCM-A can be used as reference source, PCM-B cannot PCM-A is selected as the reference source PCM-A incoming is used to synchronize PCM-A outgoing PCM-A incoming is used to synchronize PCM-B outgoing. 3. PCM-B can be used as reference source, PCM-A cannot PCM-B is selected as the reference source PCM-B incoming is used to synchronize PCM-A outgoing PCM-B incoming is used to synchronize PCM-B outgoing. 364 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Transmission Interface Handling DS1 1544 kbit/s 4. Neither PCM-A nor B can be used as reference source The free running oscillator is selected as reference source The free running oscillator is used to synchronize both PCM-A and B outgoing. The default setting of PCM-A and PCM-B is:
PCM-A: Available for synchronization PCM-B: Not available for synchronization. The parameters can be modied from OMT. The new setting is activated immediately. Thus, the updated parameters are used when the selection of synchronization source is performed. 48.3.3 Supervision of Transmission Faults The supervision is initiated during restart of DXU. Fault supervision of each PCM line is performed according to:
AT&T T1.5 SERVICE, paragraph 7 ANSI T1.403, section 8 The conguration of fault supervision can only be performed when the AO DP (Digital Path) is in state Disable. The reporting to the BSC is performed when the AO DP is in state Enable. When the AO DP is enabled, all fault supervision states are set to zero. Reports are sent to the BSC when the alarm status is changed or when required from the BSC. The fault supervision includes detection and reporting of the following fault conditions:
RAI (Remote Alarm Indication), Yellow Alarm AIS (Alarm Indication Signal),Blue Alarm LOF (Loss of Frame Alignment) LOS (Loss Of incoming Signal) ERATE (Exessive Error RATE) UAST (UnAvailable STate supervision). Consists of two directions; upstream and downstream. Fault handling is according to Diagnostic and Fault Handling functionality. LOS commences At least 31 successive pulse positions with no pulses of either positive or negative polarity have occurred. LOS ceases Recovery of frame alignment signal. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 365 (421) Transmission Interface Handling DS1 1544 kbit/s LOF commences A LOF condition is declared when any two of ve consecutive received framing bits contain bit errors in the framing pattern or when LOS condition is declared. LOF ceases Recovery of frame alignment signal. ERATE commences An ERATE condition is declared when the bit error rate is equal to or greater than 1*103 during time T. The number of CRC-6 errors is used in this evaluation. ERATE ceases The ERATE condition ceases when the bit error rate is less than 1*103 during time T. AIS commences LOF and a continuous received stream of 1s during 24 frames (all-
ones) is detected. The "all-ones" are detectable in the presence of a 1*103 BER (Bit Error Rate). AIS ceases When at least one of the conditions LOF and all-ones is cleared. RAI commences At least four consecutive 16-bit patterns consisting of eight 1s followed by eight 0s (that is 4 times 1111111100000000), is detected over the ESF data link. The signal is detected in less than one second and in the presence of a 1*103 BER. RAI ceases The RAI signal pattern does not occur in 8 to 13 contiguous 16-bit signal pattern intervals. UAST commences UAST commences when unavailable state is declared. Each direction
(upstream and downstream) is supervised independently of the other. Together with the alarm status, time information for each direction of UAST is reported to the BSC. When UAST commences, zero is reported as time information. When UAST ceases, the time that the UAST alarm has been activated is reported. When the BSC requests the alarm status, two scenarios are possible:
UAST is activated and UAST is not activated. If it is activated, zero is reported as time information. Otherwise, the time that the UAST alarm was activated the latest time, is reported to the BSC. 366 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 48.3.4 Transmission Interface Handling DS1 1544 kbit/s UAST ceases UAST ceases when available state is declared. Each direction (upstream and downstream) is supervised independently of the other. Supervision of Transmission Quality The function is initiated when the AO DP is enabled from the BSC. The conguration of quality supervision can only be performed when the AO DP is in state Disable. The reporting to the BSC is performed when the AO DP is in state Enable. Quality supervision consists of six supervision functions:
SES (Severely Errored Seconds) DF (Disturbance Frequency) BFF (Bit Fault Frequency) ES (Errored Seconds) SF (Slip Frequency) UAS (Unavailable Seconds) Bit Fault Frequency supervision The number of bit errors in the received 1544 kbit/s signal is used to establish an error rate. The CRC-6 sequence is used to obtain the number of bit errors. In this method, the distribution of errors in the time is considered. Bursts of faults decrease the number of CRC errors detected compared to what would have been detected with an equal distribution of faults in time. The probability of bit faults appearing in bursts is greater than the probability of detecting single isolated bit faults. This probability increases with the real bit error rate, and with the length of the time period over which the real bit fault frequency is calculated. In the used method, the number of CRC-6 errors is counted during the base interval. Then, a translation to bit fault frequency is performed. The bit fault frequency is supervised and reported as the mean bit error ratio in ppm (parts per million) during the BI (Base Interval). Disturbance Frequency supervision This supervision monitors detected fault situations which are regarded as disturbances upon detection. Upon detection the following events are regarded as disturbances:
RAI (Remote Alarm Indication) received from remote end LOF (Loss Of Frame) alignment AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) LOS (Loss Of Signal) EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 367 (421) Transmission Interface Handling DS1 1544 kbit/s Two disturbance frequency counters exist. Both are derived from the downstream PCM port, but one is closely connected to downstream faults while the other one is related to upstream faults. The DF downstream counter is incremented by 1 for each occurrence of LOF or LOS or AIS The DF upstream counter is incremented by 1 for each occurrence of RAI. Every detected fault situation is registered and regarded as a disturbance, even if it does not last long enough to be recognised as a fault. The DF is supervised and reported as the number of disturbances during the BI. Both counters are handled separately. Slip Frequency supervision This supervision monitors the number of slips per time interval. A slip is dened as where one frame (193 bits) is either lost or duplicated. The SF counter is incremented by one for each slip on the PCM port upstream or on the PCM port downstream. The SF is supervised and reported as the number of slips during the BI. CRC-6 error LOF alignment Errored Seconds supervision An ES is a second with at least one of the following events:
LOS Slip AIS RAI Two counters for errored seconds exist. Both are derived from the downstream PCM port, but one is closely connected to downstream faults while the other one is related to upstream faults. The downstream counter is incremented by 1 for each second with at least one of the events:
CRC-6 error or LOF or LOS or AIS or Slip The upstream counter is incremented by 1 for each second with at least one 368 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Transmission Interface Handling DS1 1544 kbit/s RAI ES are not counted during unavailable state. Both ES counters are reported after each BI. N1 CRC-6 errors Severely Errored Seconds supervision An SES is a is a second with at least one of the events:
LOF alignment LOS AIS RAI Two counters for severely errored seconds exist. Both are derived from the downstream PCM port, but one is closely connected to downstream faults while the other one is related to upstream faults. The downstream counter is incremented by 1 for each second with at least one of the events:
N1 CRC-6 errors or 1 LOF or 1 LOS or 1 AIS The upstream counter is incremented by 1 for each second with at least one RAI SES are not counted during unavailable state. Both SES contours are reported after each BI. UAS and Unavailable State supervision UAS is a count of one-second intervals during which service is unavailable. This period of time is referred to as the unavailable state. The two directions (upstream and downstream) are supervised separately. That is, one of the directions can be in the unavailable state but the other is in the available state. The counting of ES and SES is stopped for both directions as soon as at least one of the directions is in the unavailable state. An unavailable state for one direction is declared at the onset of P consecutive SES for the direction of interest. These P seconds are considered to be part of the unavailable time. A new period of available state begins at the onset of Q consecutive seconds with no SES detected. These Q seconds are considered to be part of the available time. The number of unavailable seconds for each direction is reported after each BI. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 369 (421) Transmission Interface Handling DS1 1544 kbit/s 48.3.5 Administration Supervision of transmission faults and transmission quality can be performed in different ways. With the help of parameters, the supervision can be congured to meet a wide range of requirements. The conguration parameters can only be changed when the AO DP is in state Disable. The parameters of interest are given below. The parameters P and Q The parameters P and Q are used for dening unavailable state Value range is 5-15 s Default value is 10 s The parameter N1 The parameter N1 denes the threshold numbers for SES. Value range is 1-1000 Default value is 320 The conguration parameter T The parameter T denes the time interval for ERATE supervision Value range is 1-5 s Default value is 2 s The conguration parameter AFT The conguration parameter AFT denes the Alarm Filtering Time for all the fault supervision functions except RAI supervision Value range is 50-5000 ms Default value is 125 ms The resolution is 1 ms, but the accuracy is 25 ms The conguration parameter AFT RAI The conguration parameter AFT RAI denes the Alarm Filtering Time for the fault supervision function RAI supervision Value range is 50-5000 ms Default value is 125 ms The resolution is 1 ms, but the accuracy is 25 ms Base interval for ES, SES, UAS, BFF and SF Valid values: 60 and 126 seconds. The value 126 seconds must be used when BFF supervision is activated in the BSC. 370 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Transmission Interface Handling DS1 1544 kbit/s Base interval for DF and SF Value range: 1-24 h 48.3.6 Multidrop Layer 1 For an RBS congured for multidrop, the function is initiated during restart of CMRU. For an RBS not congured for multidrop, the function is initiated when the parameter Network Topology is set by the OMT to indicate multidrop (cascade). AIS Generation When entering one of the alarm states LOF, LOS or AIS at PCM-
A input, AIS is transmitted on PCM-B output. AIS is transmitted until the alarm state is left When entering and leaving alarm states, the alarm ltering time is used (AFT). EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 371 (421) Transmission Interface Handling DS1 1544 kbit/s This page is intentionally left blank 372 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 49 49.1 49.2 49.3 49.3.1 49.4 49.4.1 49.4.2 Terrestrial Link Handling Terrestrial Link Handling This function specication covers RBS functions for layer 2 communication on A-bis. The function Layer 2 Link Handling is used for layer 2 signalling to/
from RBS. References Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. Concepts Operation and Maintenance Link Layer 2 communication link for operation and maintenance services on A-bis. Radio Signalling Link Layer 2 communication link for trafc services on A-bis. Function Layer 2 Link Handling of OML and RSL The link layer used for signalling on the A-bis interface between BSC and BTS is established and maintained according to Technical Specication /GSM 08.56/. LAPD (Link Access Protocol on the D-channel) is used for layer 2 signalling. Signalling conforms to /GSM 08.56/. Operational Conditions Operation and Maintenance Maintenance functions relating to denition of layer 2 address (TEI) are described within the context of Operation and Maintenance Terminal. Capabilities Not applicable. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 373 (421) Terrestrial Link Handling This page is intentionally left blank 374 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 50 50.1 50.2 Channel Distribution Function Channel Distribution Function This function specication covers RBS functions for Layer 2 communication on A-bis. The function Channel Distribution switches channels in the transport network interface to different RBS entities. The function Scanning of Terrestrial Channels makes it possible to communicate with RBS on a non-predened terrestrial channel. The function Sharing Terrestrial Channel makes it possible to communicate with both CMRU and a TRX on a common terrestrial signalling channel. The function Concentration of LAPD Signals makes it possible to reduce the number of required physical links between the BSC and the BTS. The functions Multidrop and Multidrop Bypass makes it possible for several RBSs to share one PCM line. References Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. Concepts Channel CF CMRU Local Mode OML Remote Mode A channel is a 16, 32 or 64 kbit/s connection between two entities connected to the switch (see Figure 106 on page 376). A 64 kbit/s connection between a timeslot in the transport network interface and a signalling port in a TRX is an example of a channel. Central Functions. Functional entity for handling of RBS common functions. Central Main Replaceable Unit. An RBS has exactly one Central Main RU. In the RBS 2000 hardware architecture, the Distribution Switch is the Central Main RU. A unit in Local mode has no communication with the BSC over the A-
bis interface and is therefore not in operation. Operation and Maintenance Link. Layer 2 communication link for operation and maintenance services on A-bis. A unit enters Remote mode when accepting a layer 2 link establishment on A-bis. It remains in Remote mode until it is manually switched to Local mode. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 375 (421) Channel Distribution Function RSL Terrestrial Channel Radio Signalling Link. Layer 2 communication link for trafcal services on A-bis. Terrestrial channels are physical channels for communication with, for example, the BSC over the Transport Network. There are different types of terrestrial channels, dependent on their use:
Terrestrial Signalling channels Terrestrial Trafc channels Terrestrial signalling channels are used for LAPD signalling only. Unoccupied Terrestrial Channel An unoccupied terrestrial channel is a physical channel which can be used as, but is currently not used as, a terrestrial signalling channel or as a terrestrial trafc channel. 50.3 Functions The CDF (Channel Distribution Function) switches channels between the entities connected to the switch. See gure below:
Transport network interface CF TRX Signalling
(OML/RSL) Air timeslot resource (traffic) Concentrator Channel distribution Channel distribution 01_0297B Channel distribution function (CDF) Figure 106 All connections through the switch are congured by A-bis commands as described within the context of Functionality Administration. The 376 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Channel Distribution Function conguration commands consist of a number of connections between timeslots in the Transport network, the Concentrator and the TRXs. Conguration includes set-up of new connections and release of connections no longer required. Connections which are the same in the old and the new conguration are left undisturbed. Idle pattern is transmitted on unoccupied timeslots in the transport network interface. An unoccupied timeslot is a timeslot which has no channel assigned to it. The idle pattern is 01010100 for a 2 Mbit/s system and 01111111 for a 1.5 Mbit/s system. If the timeslot is partly used, an idle pattern will be used for all unoccupied 16 kbit/s subtimeslots within that timeslot. The subslot idle pattern is 01 for 2 Mbit/s systems and 11 for 1.5 Mbit/s systems. Maximum capacity (Transport Network Interface) is 62 (2x31) timeslots for a 2 Mbit/s system and 48 (2x24) timeslots for a 1.5 Mbit/s system. This corresponds to two PCM lines. One signalling channel can be switched to each TRX, the capacity of this channel is 16, 32 or 64 kbit/s. Eight 16 kbit/s trafc channels can be switched to each TRX, i.e. one for each available ATSR. 24 signalling channels can be switched to the concentrator, the capacity of each channel is 64 kbit/s. The physical mapping, which is needed to congure the switch, is based on ICPs. Each ICP represent a 16 kbit/s subrate connection point. The ICPs in the range 4255 denes the incoming PCM timeslots according to the table below. The ICPs for timeslots 2531 are only valid for 2 Mbit/s systems. Table 150 ICP 4-7 8-11
... 122-127 132-135 136-139
... 250-255 Usage PCM-A PCM-A
... PCM-A PCM-B PCM-B
... PCM-B TS1 TS2
.... TS 31 TS 1 TS 2
... TS 31 The range 256351 denes the concentrator. The ranges 512575 and 640711 dene the TRXs. Table 151 TRX Signalling 0 1 2 512-515 524-527 536-539 Trafc 516-523 528-535 540-547 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 377 (421) Channel Distribution Function 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 548-551 560-563 572-575 640-643 652-655 664-667 676-679 688-691 700-703 552-559 564-571 576-583 644-651 656-663 668-675 680-687 692-699 704-711 50.3.1 Concentration of LAPD signals The purpose of LAPD concentration is to reduce the number of required physical links between the BSC and the BTS. This is done by allowing a number of TRXs to use the same physical transmission link for LAPD signalling between the BSC and the BTS. The function concentrates LAPD messages from a number of TRXs onto one physical link to the BSC (uplink). It also deconcentrates LAPD messages received on one physical link from the BSC
(downlink), sending them forward to their destinations. Concentrated signalling channel Non-concentrated signalling channels BSC
(TeI1, TEI2, ... TEIN) CON Channel 1 (TEI1) Channel 2 (TEI2) Channel N (TEIN) TRX TRX TRX 01_0301A Figure 107 One N:1 concentrator Connection Group (CG) Messages are sent forward to their destinations without adding, deleting or changing information. The concentrator is congured by A-bis commands as described within the context of Functionality Administration. For each concentrated signalling channel there is a transmit queue for uplink messages to the BSC. The queue length is supervised as described within the context of Selftest and Supervision. If a new message is received when the queue is full, all unnumbered information
(UI) frames are discarded from the queue. If the queue still is full, the new message is discarded. The bitrate for the concentrated channels is limited to 64 kbit/s, i.e. LAPD concentration and LAPD multiplexing can not be combined. 378 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Channel Distribution Function 50.3.2 Scanning of Terrestrial Channels The function is initiated:
When the CMRU is in Local mode and the Remote button is pressed When the CMRU is in Remote mode and (re-)started When CF has lost its layer 2 connection to BSC When the CF link is disconnected (reception of DISC command frame) RBS searches all terrestrial signalling channels, plus a number of unoccupied terrestrial channels, for data link establishment attempts directed towards CF. Searching for the establishment attempt is performed by the CF in intervals of one second. The searching can be performed in two ways. Initially, when no valid CDF conguration exists, one set of unoccupied terrestrial channels is searched in each interval. If no establishment attempt is found during an interval, the search is continued on the next set of unoccupied terrestrial channels. The search is repeated until an establishment attempt is found. If the scanning function is initiated when a valid CDF conguration exists, the search in each interval is performed on all the congured terrestrial signalling channels plus one set of unoccupied terrestrial channels. Thus all unoccupied terrestrial channels are searched in a cyclic way and all congured terrestrial signalling channels are searched continuously. After a search-time of 5 minutes, the entire conguration of the channel distribution function except TN O&M channel is erased (all set up connections are lost and have to be recongured). The search continues but now all terrestrial channels are dened as unoccupied. Timeslot for TN O&M is considered as occupied and is not scanned in CF scanning procedure. The function is terminated when the layer 2 link to CF is established or when CMRU enters Local mode. Sharing Terrestrial Signalling Channel The function is initiated when the channel distribution function becomes congured in such a way that the same terrestrial signalling channel is used for signalling to both MO CF and to one or more TRXs. This is the normal condition that occurs at conguration of the rst TRX. It is also initiated when RBS has, during scanning of terrestrial channels, found a link establishment to CF on a terrestrial signalling channel already used for signalling to one or more TRXs. The function shares signalling to/from MO CF and signalling to/from one or more TRXs on a shared terrestrial signalling channel. 50.3.3 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 379 (421) Channel Distribution Function Shared terrestrial signalling channel CF TRX 01_0299B Sharing terrestrial signalling channel Figure 108 Messages are sent forward to their destinations without adding, deleting or changing information. Messages addressed to MO CF are sent to MO CF. All other messages are sent to the TRXs. The function terminates when MO CF has lost its data link connection. At termination, MO CF is disconnected from the shared terrestrial signalling channel. The signalling link to/from the TRXs is undisturbed at the disconnection. It also terminates when the channel distribution function becomes re-
congured in such a way that signalling to any TRX is no longer performed on a shared terrestrial signalling channel. This is the normal way to terminate this function. Multidrop For an RBS congured for multidrop, the function is initiated during restart of the CMRU. For an RBS not congured for multidrop, the function is initiated when the parameter Network Topology is set by the OMT to indicate multidrop (cascade). The multidrop connected RBSs are connected so that each RBS uses its port A towards the BSC and port B towards the next RBS. The latter RBS is connected in the same way with port A towards the previous RBS (and indirectly the BSC) and port B towards the next RBS etc. Only RBSs supporting multidrop can be included in the multidrop connection chain. The gure illustrates the case with three RBSs. 50.3.4 380 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 BSC Channel Distribution Function A B A B A B RBS 1 RBS 2 RBS 3 02_0301A Linear Cascade Connection Figure 109 The multidrop function only handles 64 kbit/s timeslots. A 64 kbit/s timeslot is considered to be used by the RBS if any of its subtimeslots are congured in the IS or used for the CF or remote OMT link or used for DXX communication. If, for example, ICP 7 is used in the IS conguration, the whole timeslot 2 is considered to be used by the current RBS. The gure below shows a schematic example with two RBSs and seven timeslots. The rst RBS uses timeslots 2, 5 and 6 and the second uses 1, 3 and 4. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 381 (421) Channel Distribution Function PCM A PCM B PCM A PCM B RBS 1 RBS 2 TS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 03_0301A Figure 110 Multidrop example All timeslots not used by the own RBS are transparently connected between PCM A and PCM B. The timeslots used by the RBS will be connected from PCM A to the respective destination in the RBS. These timeslots will have valid idle pattern transmitted on PCM B and incoming data on PCM B is ignored. The RBS located at the end of the linear cascade chain transmits idle pattern on all time slots not dedicated for the RBS itself on PCM-A output. When entering at least one of the alarm states LOF, LOS or AIS at PCM-B input, the RBS is considered to be the RBS located at the end of the linear cascade chain, presuming that PCM-A is not in loop mode. It is considered to be so until the alarm state is left. When entering loop mode (DXX line loop back) at PCM-B, the RBS transmits idle pattern on all timeslots not dedicated for the RBS itself on PCM-A output presuming that PCM-A is not in loop mode. Idle pattern is transmitted until the loop mode on PCM-B is left. When entering loop mode (DXX line loop back) at PCM-A, idle pattern is transmitted on PCM-B output presuming that PCM-B is not in loop mode. Idle pattern is transmitted until the loop mode on PCM-A is left. Idle pattern is not transmitted on timeslot for the TN O&M channel. The function is terminated when the parameter Network Topology is set to not indicate multidrop. Remote OMT Link The function is initiated during restart of CMRU. Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 50.3.5 382 (421) Channel Distribution Function The RBS searches for Remote OMT link establishment on PCM A timeslot 23 whenever this timeslot is not used by other functions. The timeslot is in use when it:
is congured in the IS (subchannels with bitrate other than 64 kbit/s, TN O&M timeslots, trafc functions) carries the CF link is scanned for the CF link The remote OMT link will be disconnected if a new IS conguration congures PCM A timeslot 23 for either:
subchannels with bitrate other than 64 kbit/s trafc functions 50.4 50.4.1 50.4.2 The remote OMT link uses a protocol based on LAPD. The TEI value used is 0 and the SAPI value used in the range 20 - 30. Operational conditions Operation and maintenance Not applicable. Capabilities The maximum number of concentration groups is 12 and the concentration ratios 1:1 to 12:1 (this is only valid for RBS). The maximum scanning capacity is 24 channels per 1second interval. Each TRX handles two links, one OML- and one RSL-link on a common terrestrial signalling channel. The CMRU handles one OML link, normally on a signalling channel shared with a TRX. When multidrop is used only one PCM (PCM-A) path can be used for communication towards the BSC. A maximum of ve RBSs can be connected in a linear cascade chain. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 383 (421) Channel Distribution Function This page is intentionally left blank 384 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 51 51.1 Transport network O&M functions-DXX Support Transport network O&M functions-DXX Support Introduction This Function Specication covers RBS functions for Transport Network Operation and Maintenance. The functions are divided into two groups with Transport Network Operation and Maintenance generic functions including:
Enabling and detection of TNOM protocol Allocation of TNOM time slot Node identity Node access control Current alarm report Node real time control and DXX specic functions including:
G.821 Performance reports Alarm history report DXX protocol handling Node inventory Fault masks Loop-back With Transport Network O&M and DXX support in RBS 2000, it is possible to connect an RBS to DXX without using a DXX transport module. In the Figure 111 on page 386, an example of how the functionality DXX support can be used in a network is shown. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 385 (421) Transport network O&M functions-DXX Support BSC DXX DXX DXX Transport Module RBS RBS 2000 2000 NMS DXX Support RBS 2000 DXX Support RBS 2000 P002615B 51.2 Example of DXX support in an RBS 2000 network. Figure 111 The RBS 2000 nodes including the DXX support functions will be visible as nodes in DXX/NMS, and the layer 1 transmission in the RBS nodes will be supervised from NMS. The DXX support provides early warnings in case of faults and degradation of the trunks, enabling the operator to take actions at an early stage. The functions are described in Section 51.4 on page 388 DXX uses specied layer 3, and layer 7 protocols for the transport network O&M. The layer 2 protocol used is LAPB. The protocols used are described in Section 51.4 on page 388. References Whenever a reference is made to a function described in another chapter, please refer to the table of contents to nd the appropriate chapter. All ITU-T references refer to the White Book (ITU = International telecommunications Union).
[TIH_E1]
Function group Transmission Interface Handling G.703 2048 kbit/s.
[TIH_T1]
[X.25]
Function group Transmission Interface Handling DS1 1544 kbit/s. ITU-T Recommendation X.25, interface between DTE and DCE. 386 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Transport network O&M functions-DXX Support 51.3 Concepts In Figure 112 on page 387, the nomenclature for DXX is stated. DXX
(Transmission system for cellular applications)
(Transmission system for cellular applications)
(Transmission system for cellular applications) NMS NMS
(TNO&M)
(TNO&M) DXX node DXX DXX node node DXX node DXX node BSC RBS RBS PCM-B PCM-B PCM-A PCM-A DXX support DXX support DXX transmission network P002616 Figure 112 DXX terminology. DXX DXX node DXX support DXX is a transmission system for cellular applications. It includes O&M and switching functionality (among others). The O&M centre is named NMS. A node in the DXX system. DXX support is O&M functions in RBS 2000 intended for DXX. DXX support is a portion of the functionality in a DXX transport module. DXX transport module A DXX node suitable to t in the RBS 2000 cabinet. NMS TN O&M RBS2000DXX O&M The Network management system in DXX. Hence, NMS is TN O&M for DXX. Centrally located management system for transport networks and transmission equipments in general, such as digital cross connectors, line terminals, multiplexors and microwave links. The protocols used between an RBS with DXX support and a DXX node with RBS support. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 387 (421) Transport network O&M functions-DXX Support 51.4 51.4.1 51.4.2 51.4.3 Functions Enabling and detection of TNOM protocol This function is initiated when the parameter TNOM_use in the RBS database is set to on. This function is used to control the enabling and disabling of the Transport Network O&M functions in RBS 2000. The parameter TNOM_use stored in RBS DB is used for this. When the function is disabled no management timeslot is dedicated for the Transport Network O&M functions. Instead the timeslot will be used by BSS for internal use i.e. for trafc and signalling. When is enabled the Transport Network O&M functionality is active, and will work as described in this function specication. The rst received message after the function has been enabled is detected and enables the protocol stack for the received protocol if recognized. If the protocol is not recognized no protocol stack is enabled. This functionality can be regarded as an auto detection of TNOM protocol type. Allocation of TNOM timeslot This function is initiated during restart of the DXU if the parameter TNOM_use in RBS DB is already set to ON, otherwise the function is initiated when the parameter is set to ON. The communication between RBSes or RBS and DXX is performed on a 64 kbit/s timeslot in the PCM link. The PCM link is either 2048 or 1544 kbit/s. This function allocates a 64 kbit/s timeslot for the TN O&M management channel. When RBS is congured as stand alone, one timeslot with the same timeslot number is allocated for both PCM-A and PCM-B. When RBS is congured in cascaded chain , the same timeslot number is used for PCM-A and PCM-B. A full 64 kbit/s timeslot is used, thus not supporting FDL or spare bits in TS 0 to be used. The TNOM timeslot number is stored in RBS DB. The TNOM timeslot has priority to the access of timeslots within RBS. Timeslot used for TNOM will be removed from available timeslots shown in capabilities. DXX Node identity This function is initiated during restart of the DXU if the parameter TNOM_use in RBS DB is already set to ON, otherwise the function is initiated when the parameter is set to ON. This function sets and changes the Node id for the RBS. The RBS node has a unique node identity (a node number) for communication with the DXX network and for appearance in the NMS. The node identity is stored in RBS DB and has not to be the same as RBS TEI value. The node identity can be set and changed from the OMT, as well as from the DXX. No one has priority on the parameter , i.e. the last value set is the valid node id. 388 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 51.4.4 51.4.5 51.4.6 Transport network O&M functions-DXX Support DXX Node access control This function is initiated during restart of the DXU if the parameter TNOM_use in RBS DB is already set to ON, otherwise the function is initiated when the parameter is set to ON. The RBS support a node access control that is used to limit access rights to the node from DXX. This function maintains the node access registers. The value for node access possible to set from DXX are 1 to 65535 for limited access rights. If the node access list is empty (i.e. it does not contain any non-zero access control id) then all management operations are allowed. If the node access control list contains one or more non-
zero access id:s then only the Invokes (requests) having the access id which can be found in the node access list are processed. The RBS node will always respond on an invoke containing the node access id equal to zero. DXX Real time control This function is initiated during restart of the DXU if the parameter TNOM_use in RBS DB is already set to ON, otherwise the function is initiated when the parameter is set to ON. This function controls the administration of Real time of node and Relative time of unit clocks. It is possible from DXX to set a real time clock (Real time of node). This clock is used for time stamps in alarm and performance reports. The real time clock is used with a relative clock counter (Relative time of unit), that is used to make time-stamps on individual fault events. The real time of node counter has the possible values between 0 and 4 294 967 295. The relative time of unit counter has the same value range. Both counters are incremented by one every 10 ms, where the real time counter can be reset by NMS command while the relative counter is free running. DXX Current alarm report This function is initiated during restart of the DXU if the parameter TNOM_use in RBS DB is already set to ON, otherwise the function is initiated when the parameter is set to ON. This function sends Alarm reports from RBS to DXX upon requests. The DXX polls the RBS asking for changes in fault events , and request reports if the fault event condition has changed since the last poll. Alarm reports can be sent for monitored faults such as Loss Of Signal
(LOS), Loss Of Frame (LOF), Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) etc. the fault conditions supervised are related to PCM-A, PCM-B and common parts respectively. The reports uses the Real time of node for time stamps and the individual faults uses the Relative time of unit for their time stamps. See Section 51.4.5 on page 389. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 389 (421) Transport network O&M functions-DXX Support The fault conditions monitored within the common parts of the RBS are:
Flash check sum error A problem has been found when saving parameters to the non-volatile memory. Reset There has been a unit reset (detected always after the power-up of the unit), and the TN O&M functions has restarted. The reset is reported as a delta alarm event. With delta alarm event means an event has occurred but is still not active. The fault conditions monitored within the interfaces PCM-A and PCM-B of the RBS are:
Rx signal missing (LOS) According to [TIH_E1] and [TIF_T1]. Frame alignment lost (LOF) According to [TIH_E1] and [TIF_T1]. Rx signal AIS According to [TIH_E1] and [TIF_T1]. BER 10 (ERATE) According to [TIH_E1] and [TIF_T1]. When CRC-4 is enabled the CSES is used in accordance with [TIH_E1]. Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) According to [TIH_E1] and [TIF_T1]
Loop - Mux/Demux back to line This status is activated when the DXX loop is activated. Rx data is looped back to the interface transmitter. G.821 limit event This fault will be activated as a delta event when at least one G.821 performance limit has been exceeded in a 15minute period. See also Section 51.4.8 on page 391. With delta alarm event means an event has occurred but is still not active. G.821 Unavailable state (UAST) This signal will be activated when the state of the signal becomes unavailable. The fault will be deactivated when the state becomes available again. Unavailable state is declared at the onset of 10 consecutive SES. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of the unavailable time. Fault masked/test This fault will be activated when the interface fault mask setting is ON (all interface faults will be cleared). 390 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 51.4.7 51.4.8 Transport network O&M functions-DXX Support Rx Buffer slip/BUFIN (Slip) This fault is only used for E1. The fault is activated if one or more buffer slips have been detected during the last hour. A slip is dened as where one frame (0.125 ms) is either lost or duplicated. Status for CSU line loop back, LLB (T1) This message is only used for T1. It indicates that the CSU line loop back is activated. Status for CSU payload loop back, PLB (T1) This message is only used for T1. It indicates that the CSU payload loop back is activated. DXX Alarm history report This function is initiated during restart of the DXU if the parameter TNOM_use in RBS DB is already set to ON, otherwise the function is initiated when the parameter is set to ON. This function sends Alarm history reports to DXX. The reports are sent from RBS to DXX upon request. The fault conditions are described in Section 51.4.5 on page 389. The RBS maintains an alarm history in its alarm event log which is a ring buffer for 100 latest alarm events. The alarm events are:
alarm on, alarm off and delta (combined alarm on and off). The delta alarm event type is used when an alarm is turned on and off within a short period, i.e. an alarm has occurred but is not still active. Total Time (TT) Available Time (AT) Errored Seconds (ES) Degraded Minutes (DM) Severely Errored Seconds (SES) DXX G.821 Performance reports The following statistics are provided in G.821 performance reports:
Number of seconds when RAI has been received (RAI) Number of faulty Frame Synchronization Word (FSW) Number of CRC errors from far end (CRCE) Number of lost Frame Synchronization (FS) Number of CRC block errors (CRC) Number of Code Violation (CV) Number of Rx Buffer slip (BUFIN) EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 391 (421) Transport network O&M functions-DXX Support Each of the statistics are supported by two groups of registers and two groups of counters providing the performance data. The registers and counters can be read and reset. They are:
Registers for previous 15 minutes report Counters for current 15 minutes report Counters for current 24 hours report Registers for previous 24 hours report The information of the 15 minutes counters and registers are sent together in one report. The information of the 24 hours counters and registers are sent together in another report. G.821 limits alarm An alarm is activated when at least one G.821 performance limit has been executed in a 15minute period. The performance limits can be changed from DXX. The G.821 Performance limits supervised are:
Limit for Severely Errored Seconds (SES), with the values between 0 and 900. Limit for Errored Seconds (ES), with the values between 0 and 900. Limit for CRC-E, with the values between 0 and 65000. Limit for Remote Alarm Indication (RAI), with the value between 0 and 900. G.821 Performance basic statistics counters For limited statistics a number of counters are reported with a performance counter value. The counters can be read and reset on request. The following counters are supported:
Severely Errored Seconds (SES) Errored Seconds (ES) Available Time (AT) Total Time (TT) Degraded Minutes (DM) Description of performance data AT Available time is the total time (TT) minus unavailable time (UAT). A period of unavailable time (UAT) begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SES. These 10 seconds are considered to be 392 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 SES ES Transport network O&M functions-DXX Support part of the unavailable time. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive seconds with no SES detected. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of the available time. A severely errored second (SES) is a second with at least one of the following events. For E1 system:
- At least N1 CRC errors (when CRC is used)
- At least N4 Faulty FSW (when CRC is not used)
- Loss of frame alignment (LOF)
- Loss of signal (LOS)
- Alarm indication signal (AIS) and for T1 system:
- At least N1 CRC errors
- Loss of frame alignment (LOF)
- Loss of signal (LOS)
- Alarm indication signal (AIS) The default values N1 and N4 are stated in, and the SES is performed in accordance with [TIH_E1] and [TIH_T1]. An error second (ES) is a second with at least one of the following events:
For E1 system:
- At least 1 CRC errors (when CRC is used)
- At least 1 Faulty FSW (when CRC is not used)
- Loss of frame alignment (LOF)
- Loss of signal (LOS)
- At least one slip
- Alarm indication signal (AIS)
- At least N1 CRC errors
- Loss of frame alignment (LOF)
- Loss of signal (LOS)
- At least one slip EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 393 (421) Transport network O&M functions-DXX Support DM CRCE RAI CV CRC FSW FS BUFIN
- Alarm indication signal (AIS) The SES is performed in accordance with
[TIH_E1] and [TIH_T1]. One minute interval with one of the following but not SES or UAT:
For E1 system:
- 123 CRC errors (when CRC is used)
- 2 faulty FSW (when CRC is not used) and for T1 system:
- 52 CRC errors Numbers of CRC errors from far end is indicated by the E-bit in time slot 0. Only used when the node is congured for CRC-4. Number of seconds when Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) has been received. Number of line code errors (when the line code has been violated). This is not reported when the CRC-4 is used
(enabled). Number of Cyclic Redundancy Check
(CRC) block errors detected. Numbers of faulty frame synchronization words. One count every time one or more faulty bits in frame alignment word has been detected. Numbers of lost frame alignment. One count every time the frame synchronization is lost. Number of detected buffer slips on the receiver interface (Rx). 51.4.9 DXX Fault masks This function is initiated during restart of the DXU if the parameter TNOM_use in RBS DB is already set to ON, otherwise the function is initiated when the parameter is set to ON. This function maintains fault mask lters, making it possible to inhibit fault reporting. Two type of fault masks do exist;
Fault freezing, and Fault masks 394 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Transport network O&M functions-DXX Support Fault freezing It is in RBS possible to set a fault mask to freeze fault monitoring of a specied block at a specied period of time. The blocks are PCM-A, PCM-B and Common parts (SW faults). The time out value is 0 to 10 000 000 seconds. With the fault freezing activated the fault status of the RBS is frozen, i.e. the faults are neither updated nor reset. Fault monitoring is enabled automatically after the time-out time has expired or immediately by the management operation where the time-out time is set to zero. Fault masks It is possible from DXX to mask all faults from an RBS or from a specic interface (i.e. prevent the interface from generating alarms). It is also possible from DXX to specify certain individual fault masks. When the fault mask is active the potential faults are neither supervised, nor reported, except for an alarm indicating that the fault mask is enabled. The following attribute (status) have individual fault masks possible to enable/disable on interface basis (PCM-A and PCM-B). AIS inhibit (also called AIS Failure fault mask):
When ON, a received AIS failure does not generate an alarm. This parameter is OFF as a default. RAI inhibit (also called RAI fault mask):
When ON a received RAI does not generate an alarm. This parameter is OFF as default. The AIS inhibit or RAI inhibit does not generate the fault mask alarm. DXX Loop back This function is initiated during restart of the DXU if the parameter TNOM_use in RBS DB is already set to ON, otherwise the function is initiated when the parameter is set to ON. This function controls line loop in the RBS interface PCM-A and PCM-
B, to be used for test purposes. The line loop, loops back all timeslots except the TNOM timeslot. The timeslot 0 (for E1) and F bit (for T1) are not looped back either. This loop is referred to as DXX line loop or DXX loop back to interface. The DXX line loop does not necessarily maintain the timeslot integrity. During DXX line loop, the timeslots do keep their position in the primary rate (1.5 or 2 Mbit/s) frame. Hence, incoming timeslot 17 has to be outgoing timeslot 17. The delay in the RBS can be different for different timeslots. Hence, timeslots that come in to the RBS in the same frame do not have to be in the same frame when they leave the RBS. The DXX line loop is controlled from DXX individually for PCM-A and PCM-B. The loop is possible to set with a timeout value to release the specic loop. The timeout value is between 1 and 65 000 minutes, in steps of 1 minute. 51.4.10 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 395 (421) Transport network O&M functions-DXX Support 51.4.11 Both CSU line loop back and CSU payload loop back have higher priority than the DXX line loop. This means that the DXX loop will be suspended when CSU loops (PLB or LLB) is activated. When CSU loop is deactivated, the DXX loop is resumed again. DXX Node inventory This function is initiated during restart of the DXU if the parameter TNOM_use in RBS DB is already set to ON, otherwise the function is initiated when the parameter is set to ON. This function maintain the RBS node inventory and settings of the transmission interface parameters. The parameters controlled from BSS cannot be modied from DXX. It is from DXX possible to make a node inventory in order to view the HW and SW status of the DXU, as well as the interface parameter settings. Node inventory Hardware types and software types and versions (revisions) can be retrieved by request from DXX. The SW type and version is the type and version for the specic DXX support software (not for the RBS software). The HW type inventory include RBS-E1 and RBS-T1. Transmission interface parameter settings It is also possible from DXX to get the parameter settings for the transmission interface in the RBS. The parameter settings that can be fetched are:
Status of TS0 Sa bits 1 or 0. TN O&M timeslot allocation. CRC4 ON or OFF. Type of interface selected. The interface options are: E1 long-
haul, E1 short-haul, T1 long-haul, T1 short-haul, and E1 external HDSL modem. Alarm fault lter parameters (see Section 51.4.9 on page 394). Performance limit parameters (see Section 51.4.8 on page 391). 51.4.12 Administration of TNOM generic functions The TNOM generic functions are administrated from the OMT by use of the parameters TNOM_use, TNOM_timeslot and TNOM_nodeid. Application Parameters TNOM allocationThe parameter used for the Transport Network O&M Timeslot allocation is: TNOM_use The valid range of the parameter is:ON (Auto)OFF 396 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Transport network O&M functions-DXX Support TNOM timeslotThe parameter used for the Transport Network O&M Timeslot allocation is:TNOM_timeslot The valid range of the parameter is:131 for E1124 for T1 TNOM node IdThe parameter used for the Transport Network O&M Node Id allocation is:TNOM_nodeid The valid range of the parameter is:165534 The parameters can be modied from the OMT. The parameter TNOM_nodeid can be modied from DXX as well. The new settings are activated immediately. 51.4.13 Administration of DXX specic functions The DXX specic functions are maintained via the interface RBS2000DXX O&M. Application Parameters The parameters used for the Node identity function are handled by:Object 50 (SUBRACK_INVENTORY) The parameters used for the Node access control are handled by:Object 44 (NAC_OBJECT) The parameters used for the Real time control function are handled by:Object 44 (RTC_OBJECT) The parameters used for the Current alarm report are handled by:Object 6 (CURRENT _ALARMS)Object 40 (SUBRACK_STATE)Object 41
(NODE_STATE) The parameters used for the Alarm history report are handled by:Object 7 (ALARM_HISTORY) The parameters used for the G.821 performance report are handled by:Object 23 (G.821_OBJECT) The parameters used for the Fault mask function are handled by:Object 27 (FLM_OBJECT)Object 228 (IFM_OBJECT) The parameters used for the Loop back function are handled by:Object 227 (LL_OBJECT)Object 226 (CONTROLS_TIMEOUT) The parameters used for the Node inventory function are handled by:Object 2 (UNIT_IDENT)Object 17
(INTERFACE_LOCKING)Object 18 (INTERFACE_MODULE)Object 50 (SUBRACK_INVENTORY)Object 230 (HDLC_MODE)Object 240
(TS0B4..B8_OBJECT)Object 243 (TS0B1_OBJECT) DXX Protocol Handling This function is initiated during restart of the DXU if the parameter TNOM_use in RBS DB is already set to ON, otherwise the function is initiated when the parameter is set to ON. The DXX protocol is implemented as four layers in the ISO OSI layer model, layer 1,2,3 and 7. These layers correspond to physical link layer, data link layer, network layer, and application layer respectively. 51.4.14 EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 397 (421) Transport network O&M functions-DXX Support A message that is received at PCM-A in RBS is processed according to layer 1, 2 and 3. In layer 3, the destination node id is housed. If the current RBS is the destination node, the message is sent to layer 7. If the RBS is in topology Cascaded chain and not the destination node, the message is sent to the next RBS via PCM-B. The same is valid in the other direction receiving data on PCM-B. Fault handling Layer 2 (Data link layer)Faults in data within the data link layer are handled in accordance with the ITU-T specication X.25.
[X.25]. Layer 3 (Network layer)Faults in data within the network layer are checked regarding to xed header values, data length and data check sum. Faulty messages are discarded. New messages will be sent from NMS based on time-outs in its application layer. Layer 7 (Application layer)Faults in data within the application layer are handled according to the following:
An RO-Reject is sent from RBS to DXX (an agent to a manager) if the command is not reasonable enough to give either an RO-Result or an RO-Error. The fault status can be one or more of the following: Parameter error, Context error, Functional error or Unknown object. An RO-Reject is sent from RBS to DXX (an agent to a manager) if the command is reasonable enough to give an answer but when at least one of the operation is not OK. Operational conditions Operation and Maintenance Maintenance data such as enabling of the TNOM function, selection of timeslot for the TNOM management channel and selection of node identity can be set by the OMT. This is described within the context of Operation and Maintenance Terminal. The values of the node identity can also be set by the NMS in DXX. All other functions are operated from DXX using the RBS2000DXX O&M interface (protocol). 51.5 51.5.1 398 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 52 52.1 BTS Parameter Limitations BTS Parameter Limitations This document species congurable BTS parameters with limitations compared with the parameter ranges in the Abis O&M IWD. BTS parameters with no limitations compared to the Abis O&M IWD are not stated in this document. Purpose and Readers The purpose is to show BTS parameters with parameter range limitations compared to the Abis O&M IWD. People involved in the preparation of data transcripts for the BSC are the target group of this specication. 52.2 References 6/155 19HSC 103 12 Uen Abis O&M Interface, Part II, Procedures 5/155 19HSC 103 12 Uen Abis O&M Interface, Part I, Model 3/1551APT 210 09 Uen 52.3 52.3.1 52.3.2 Translation of Abis O&M IWD Parameters - BSC Command Parameters Parameters The parameters listed in this document are extracted from the Data Elements listed in the Abis O&M IWD document (see reference 1). This document states the BTS parameters with parameter range limitations compared with the Abis O&M IWD. For each parameter in the list, the range supported by the BTS and the Abis O&M IWD is stated. All coding in the document is in hexadecimal (hex) representation if nothing else is stated. Note:
See reference 3 for BSC Commands. Accordance Indication BTS-supported value range:
AIP:
0 1, 3 IWD-dened value range:
0 3 Alarm Status Type BTS-supported value range:
Alarm status type:
1 IWD EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 399 (421) BTS Parameter Limitations 52.3.3 IWD-dened value range:
0 1 BS_AG_BLKS_RES BTS-supported value range:
BS_AG_BLKS_RES:
0 1 IWD-dened value range:
0 7 52.3.4 CON Connection List BTS supported value range:
y mi CCP Tag CCP number Reserved CP gives deconcentrated inlet/outlet CP gives concentrated inlet/outlet and Tag = sequential number of CG within Input Concentration Map IWD dened value range:
0 12 2 13 256, 260, ... 348 0 255, 257 259, 261 -
263, ... 349 1023 0 1 12 0 16 2 17 y mi CCP Tag CCP number Reserved CP gives deconcentrated inlet/outlet CP gives concentrated inlet/outlet and Tag = sequential number of CG within Input Concentration Map 0, 4, ... 1020 1 3, 5 7, ... 1021 1023 0 1 16 52.3.5 52.3.6 400 (421) Extended Range Indicator BTS-supported parameter range:
ERI:
0 (extended range off ) IWD-dened value range:
0 1 External Condition Map Class 1 BTS-supported value ranges:
LAPD Q CG:
0 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 BTS Parameter Limitations L/R TI:
L/R SWI:
TRA:
PCM SYNC:
EXT SYNC:
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 IWD-dened value range:
0 1 LMT:
0 52.3.7 External Condition Map Class 2 BTS-supported value ranges:
RBS DOOR:
0 1 52.3.8 52.3.9 LAPD Q CG:
EXT SYNC:
PCM SYNC:
0 0 0 1 IWD-dened value range:
0 1 File Relation Indication BTS-supported value ranges:
Other state:
0, 3 IWD-dened value range:
0 3 Note:
There are limitations for specic combinations of current state and other state. FN Offset FN (Frame Number) Offset must be equal for all TSs within a TRX. Conguration of FN Offset on one TS will also recongure all previously congured TSs on that TRX, provided that no TS within the TRX is enabled. BTS-supported value range:
FN offset:
0 1023 (03FF(hex)) IWD-dened value range:
0 1325 (052D(hex)) 52.3.10 Frequency List BTS-supported value range:
ARFCN, 900 MHz:
1 124(dec) (option 1) 0 124, 975 1023(dec) (option 2) 0 54, 955 1023(dec) (option 3) EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 401 (421) BTS Parameter Limitations ARFCN, 1800 MHz:
ARFCN, 1900 MHz:
512 885(dec) 512 810(dec) Note:
Valid 900 MHz "option" is dependent on hardware conguration. IWD-dened value range:
ARFCN, 900 MHz:
0 124, 975 1023, 955 974(dec) ARFCN, 1800 MHz:
ARFCN, 1900 MHz:
512 885(dec) 512 810(dec) 52.3.11 Frequency Specier RX BTS-supported value range:
ARFCN, 900 MHz:
1 124(dec) (option 1) 0 124, 975 1023(dec) (option 2) 0 54, 955 1023(dec) (option 3) ARFCN, 1800 MHz:
ARFCN, 1900 MHz:
512 885(dec) 512 810(dec) Note:
Valid 900 MHz "option" is dependent on hardware conguration. IWD-dened value range:
ARFCN, 900 MHz:
0 124, 975 1023, 955 974(dec) ARFCN, 1800 MHz:
ARFCN, 1900 MHz:
512 885(dec) 512 810(dec) 52.3.12 Frequency Specier TX BTS-supported value range:
ARFCN, 900 MHz:
1 124(dec) (option 1) 0 124, 975 1023(dec) (option 2) 0 54, 955 1023(dec) (option 3) ARFCN, 1800 MHz:
ARFCN, 1900 MHz:
512 885(dec) 512 810(dec) Note:
Valid 900 MHz "option" is dependent on hardware conguration. IWD-dened value range:
ARFCN, 900 MHz:
0 124, 975 1023, 955 974(dec) ARFCN, 1800 MHz:
ARFCN, 1900 MHz:
512 885(dec) 512 810(dec) 402 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 BTS Parameter Limitations 52.3.13 IS Connection List BTS-supported value range:
ICP:
4 127(dec) 132 351(dec) 512 583(dec) 640 711(dec) CI:
The IWD-dened value ranges:
ICP:
1 72(dec) 0 1023(dec) CI:
Note:
1 255(dec) There are limitations for specic combinations. For more information see the gure in Appendix. 52.3.14 Local Access State BTS-supported value range:
Local Access State parameter: 0 IWD-dened value range:
0 1 52.3.15 MO Identier Table 152 BTS-supported/IWD-dened value range MO class BTS-supported value (hex) IWD-dened value (hex) Instance number Instance number TRXC TX RX 01 0B 0C 00 0B 00 0B 00 0B 01 0B 0C 00 0F 00 0F 00 0F 52.3.16 MO State Table 153 BTS-supported codes Code MO State Parameter Used by MO 00 01 02 03 Reset Started Enabled Disabled CF, IS, TRXC, RX, TF, TS, TX, DP, CON CF, TRXC IS, RX, TF, TS, TX, DP, CON IS, RX, TF, TS, TX, DP, CON IWD-dened value range:
00 03 52.3.17 Power Note:
Only the following macro congurations are supported:
RBS 2101, RBS 2102 and RBS 2202 with congurations 1x2, 2x2, 3x2, CDU-A for 900 MHz, CDU-A with TMA for 1800 MHz and 1900 MHz. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 403 (421) BTS Parameter Limitations BTS-supported value range. Nominal power parameters:
900 MHz:
1800 MHz:
1900 MHz:
35 47, 491
(dec) 33 45, 471 33 45, 471
(dec)
(dec) IWD-dened value range:
0 63(dec) Only steps by 2 is congurable (from the highest value). Note:
1) BSC uses this value to activate SW Power Boost (the value does not describe the actual output power). The RBS then uses TX diversity, and congures each transmitter that supports the master-slave conguration to max. power (for example 47 dec for Macro 900 MHz). An RBS with Filter Combiner does not support SW Power Boost. 52.3.18 Result Code BTS-supported codes:
Wrong state or out of sequence: 02 File error:
Fault unspecied:
Protocol error:
MO not connected:
03 04 06 07 IWD-dened value range:
01 0A TCH Capabilities BTS-supported value:
Cross Combination Indicator: 127 IWD-dened value range:
0, 127 52.3.19 52.3.20 TF Mode BTS-supported code:
TF mode parameter:
1 (= stand-alone) IWD-dened value range:
00 02, FF 404 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 52.4 Appendix BTS Parameter Limitations TS1 TS2 PCM-A
. TS31 TS1 TS2
. TS31 PCM-B o o o o o o o o
. o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o IS ICP 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 122 123 124 125 126 127 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 250 251 252 253 254 255 o o o o o o o o o o o
. o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
. o o o o o o SCH1 SCH2
. SCH24 SCH TCHs ICP 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 348 349 350 351 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 CCP 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 348 349 350 351 CON o o o o o o o o
. o o o o
. TRX0 signalling
(RSL/OML) ATSR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TRX 0: 512-523 TRX 1: 524-535 TRX 2: 536-547 TRX 3: 548-559 TRX 4: 560-571 TRX 5: 572-583 TRX 6: 640-651 TRX 7: 652-663 TRX 8: 664-675 TRX 9: 676-687 TRX10: 688-699 TRX 11: 700-711 TS 64 kbit/ PSM timeslot ATSR Air time slot resource SCH Signalling channel TCH Traffic channel 01_0300B Figure 113 Physical mapping of entities and ICP/CCP TS25 TS31 are only applicable for 2048 kbit/s systems. Note:
Each ICP (IS Connection Point) or CCP (CON Connection Point) represents a 16 kbit/s connection point. They are numbered from 4 to 711. A 16 kbit/s channel is established by connecting two ICPs to each other. A 32 or 64 kbit/s signalling channel is established by connecting two or four pairs of consecutive ICPs to each other. The consecutive ICPs must belong to the same TS or SCH. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 405 (421) BTS Parameter Limitations This page is intentionally left blank 406 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Glossary 53 Glossary This glossary lists abbreviations and acronyms used in texts dealing with RBS 2000. Some basic terms and acronyms needed for cross-references are included in the list. In the RBS manuals, terminology dened by GSM is used together with terms related to Ericsson GSM system products. Terms and Abbreviations An arrow -> is used to indicate a reference to another entry in this list. Abis GSM interface standard dening attributes of the communication between BSC and BTS AC ACB ACCU A/D converter Air conditioner AIS ALNA AO ARAE ARFCN ARU ASIC Astra AT ATRU ATSR BALUN Batt BB BBS Alternating Current Alarm Collection Board Alternating Current Connection Unit Analog to Digital converter One version of the climate unit (Active cooler) Alarm Indication Signal Antenna Low Noise Amplier Application Object Antenna Related Auxiliary Equipment Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number Active Replaceable Unit Application Specic Integrated Circuit ASIC in the TRU Alphanumeric Terminal Adaptive Transceiver Unit Air Time Slot Resource BALance and UNbalance transformer Battery Battery Box Battery Backup Stand EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 407 (421) Glossary BCCH Broadcast Control CHannel Downlink only broadcast channel for broadcast of general information at a base station, on a base station basis. BDM Battery Distribution Module The BDM is an IDM with a battery and a local processor. BER BFU BIAS-IC Bm BPC BS BSC BSCSim BSS BTS Burst Cabinet CBCH Bit Error Rate Battery Fuse Unit BIAS Injector Denotes a full rate trafc channel Basic Physical Channel Denotes the air interface transport vehicle formed by repetition of one time slot on one or more radio frequency channels. Base Station Base Station Controller GSM network node for control of one or more BTSs. Base Station Controller Simulator Base Station System GSM network logical unit comprising one BSC and one or more BTSs. Base Transceiver Station GSM network unit operating on a set of radio frequency channels in one cell. A portion of digital information, the physical content, that is transferred within the time interval of one time slot. The physical housing of a base station Cell Broadcast CHannel This is a downlink only channel used by the GSM dened SMSCB function. CCCH Common Control CHannel Channel combining the following common control channels:
408 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 CCU CDU CE Cell CF Channel Channel Combination Channel group CM CMD CMRU Compr CON Cong Co-siting Glossary PCH Paging CHannel RACH Random Access CHannel AGCH Access Grant CHannel Climate Control Unit Combining and Distribution Unit Conformite Europeenne An area of radio coverage identied by the GSM network by means of the cell identity Central Functions The common term channel denotes the virtual connection, consisting of physical and logical channels between BSS and MS, during a call in progress.
-> Logical Channel -> Physical Channel A physical channel on an air interface carries a dened set of logical channels. A channel group is a group of dedicated logical channels to a specic MS. Control Module (for TMA) Digital Radio Communication Tester Central Main Replaceable Unit. Main RU. The RBS is physically connected to the Base Station Controller (BSC) via the CMRU. There is only one CMRU in each RBS. Compressor LAPD concentrator LAPD concentration is used to reduce the number of required physical links between the BSC and BTS. Conguration Co-siting is to operate the radio base station in GSM together with the radio base station in Total Access Communication System (TACS) or Nordic Mobile Telephone system (NMT) on the same site by sharing common equipment. EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 409 (421) Glossary CPU CSA CSES CSU CU CXU Dannie DB DC DCCH DCCU ddTMA DF DFU DIP Dixie DM DM DMRU Downlink DP DPX DS1 Central Processing Unit Canadian Standards Association Consecutive Severely Errored Second Channel Service Unit Combining Unit (RU in CDU_D) Conguration Switch Unit ASIC in the TRU DataBase Direct Current Dedicated Control CHannel Dedicated control channels carry signalling data. DC Connection Unit Dual Duplex Tower Mounted Amplier This type needs only one combined TX/
RX feeder from the BTS to the TMA.
>dTMA >rTMA >TMA >BTS Distribution Frame Distribution and Fuse Unit DIgital Path The name of the function used for supervision of the connected PCM lines. ASIC in the TRU Degraded Minute Distribution Module Distributed Main Replaceable Unit If a Main RU is subordinated to the CMRU, it is said to be distributed. Signalling direction from the system to the MS Digital Path Duplexer Digital Signal level 1 (1544 kbit/s) 410 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 DSP DT dTMA dTRU DU DX DXC DXU DXX E1 E-GSM EACU ECU EC1 EC2 EDGE EDT EEPROM EMC EMF EMI ENV ES ESB ESD ESO EXT Glossary Digital Signal Processor Data Transcript Duplex TMA dTMA is similar to the old ALNA except for different characteristics. >ddTMA
>rTMA >TMA double Transceiver Unit Distribution Unit (RU in CDU-D) Direct Exchange Digital Cross Connector Distribution Switch Unit Ericsson Cellular Transmission System including NMS Short for G.703 2048 kbit/s PCM link Extended GSM External Alarm Connection Unit Energy Control Unit External Condition Map Class 1 External Condition Map Class 2 Enhanced Data rate for Global Evolution Electrical Down Tilt Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory Electro Magnetic Compatibility ElectroMotive Force Electromagnetic Interference Environmental Errored Second External Synchronization Bus ElectroStatic Discharge Ericsson Support Ofce External EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 411 (421) Glossary FACCH Fast Associated Control CHannel FCC FCCH FCOMB FCU FDL FER FIU FS FSC FU FUd FXU G01 G12 G.703 GPRS GSM HCOMB HDLC HDSL Main signalling channel in association with a TCH. Federal Communications Commission Frequency Correction CHannel Filter COMBiner Fan Control Unit Facility Data Link Frame Erasure Ratio Fan Interface Unit Function Specication Field Support Centre Filter Unit (RU in CDU-D) Filter Unit with duplexer (RU in CDU-D) Future Expansion Unit MO model for RBS 200 MO model for RBS 2000 CCITT Standard for transmission General Packet Radio Services Global System for Mobile communications International standard for a TDMA digital mobile communication system. Originally, GSM was an abbreviation for Group Special Mobile, which is a European mobile telecommunication interest group, established in 1982. Hybrid COMBiner High level Data Link Control High bit rate Digital Subscriber Line Heat Exchanger One version of the climate unit HEU HLIN HLOUT Heat Exchanger Unit High Level IN High Level OUT 412 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 HMS Hum HW HWU IC ID IDB IDM IEC IMSI INIT INT IOG IOM IR IS IWD I1A I1B I2A JTC Glossary Heat Management System Humidity HardWare Hardware Unit An HWU consists of one or more SEs. An HWU is a functional unit within the RBS. The HWU is either active (equipped with a processor) or passive (without processor). Integrated Circuit IDentication Installation Data Base Internal Distribution Module International Electric Commission International Mobile Subscriber Identity Initial Internal Input/Output Group Internal Operation and Maintenance bus InfraRed Interface Switch InterWork Description Internal Fault Map Class 1A Internal Fault Map Class 1B Internal Fault Map Class 2A Joint Technical Committee LAPD Link Access Procedures on D-channel LAPD is the data link layer (layer 2) protocol used for communication between the BSC and the BTS on the Abis interface. Abis layer 2 is sometimes used synonymously with LAPD. LBO Line Build Out EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 413 (421) Glossary LED LLB LNA Local bus Local mode Local/Remote switch Light Emitting Diode Line Loop Back Low Noise Amplier The local bus offers communication between a central main RU (DXU) and distributed main RUs (TRU and ECU). When the RU is in RU mode Local it is not prepared for BSC communication. Using the Local/Remote switch, an operator orders the RU to enter Local or Remote mode. LOF Loss Of Frame Logical Channel Logical RU LOS MAC Magazine Main RU MHS A logical channel represents a specied portion of the information carrying capacity of a physical channel. GSM denes two major categories of logical channels:
TCHs Trafc CHannels, for speech or user data CCHs Control CHannels, for control signalling.
-> Physical Channel -> Channel Combination A unit which can be referred to, but is not a single physical unit. There are three different kinds of logical RUs:
1. Buses 2. Antennas 3. Environment Loss Of Signal Medium Access Controller A magazine is a reserved space in the cabinet, which may hold one or more RUs. A main replaceable unit is a replaceable unit that contains one or more processors, to which software can be downloaded from the BSC. Modication Handling System Ericsson trouble report database 414 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 MMI MO MR MS MSC MSTP Multidrop NEBS NMS Nominal Power N terminal O&M OMC OML OMT Operation OPI Glossary Man-Machine Interface Managed Object Measurement Receiver Mobile Station Mobile services Switching Centre GSM network unit for switching, routing and controlling calls to and from the Public Switched Telephone Network
(PSTN) and other networks. Mobile Station Test Point Two or more RBSs are connected in a chain to the same transmission system. All the relevant timeslots are dropped out by each RBS. (This function is sometime called cascading.) Network Equipment Building System Ericsson Network Management System in DXX The nominal power is the power level dened when conguring the transceiver. Neutral terminal in a AC mains connection Operation and Maintenance General term for activities such as conguration, utilization of channels
(frequency bands), cell planning, system supervision, hardware and software maintenance, subscriber administration, and so forth. Operation and Maintenance Centre Operation and Maintenance Link Layer 2 communication link for operation and maintenance services on Abis. Operation and Maintenance Terminal The OMT is a terminal that supports functions for handling the RBS on site. The terminal can be a portable PC. Operation is the normal, everyday running of the RBS with full functionality. OPerational Instructions EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 415 (421) Glossary OVP OXU P-GSM Passive RU PCAT PCH PCM PCU PE terminal OverVoltage Protection Space for Optional Expansion Primary GSM A passive replaceable unit has a very low level of intelligence and is independent of the processor system. Product CATalogue A web-based ordering system in Ericssons intranet. Paging CHannel Downlink only subchannel of CCCH for system paging of MSs.
-> CCCH Pulse Code Modulation Packet Control Unit Protective Earth terminal in a AC mains connection PFWD Power Forward Physical Channel PIN PLB PLMN An air interface physical channel carries one or more logical channels. A physical channel uses a combination of frequency and time division multiplexing and is dened as a sequence of radio frequency channels and time slots.
-> TDMA frame -> Logical channel Personal Identication Number Payload Loop Back Public Land Mobile Network A network, established and operated by an administration or its licensed operator(s), for the specic purpose of providing land mobile communication services to the public. It provides communication possibilities for mobile users. For communication between mobile and xed users, interworking with a xed network is necessary. PPE PREFL Personal Protective Equipment Power Reected 416 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 PSU PWU RACH RAI RAM RBER RBS RCB RD Glossary Power Supply Unit Power Unit Random Access CHannel Uplink only subchannel of CCCH for MS request for allocation of a dedicated channel.
-> CCCH Remote Alarm Indication Random Access Memory Radio Bit Error Ratio Radio Base Station All equipment forming one or more Ericsson base stations.
->BTS Radio Connection Box Receive Data Remote mode When the RU is in RU mode Remote, a link is established between the BCS and the central main RU. RF RFCH RFTL RLC R-state RS232 rTMA Radio Frequency Radio Frequency CHannel A radio frequency carrier with its associated bandwidth. Radio Frequency Test Loop Repair Logistic Centre Release state American standard for term/MODEM interconnection Receiver TMA rTMA has no duplexers. It is used for amplication of the RX signal. >ddTMA
>dTMA >TMA RU Replacement Unit An RU consists of one or more HWUs. An RU may be replaced by another RU of EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 417 (421) Glossary RX RXA RXB RXD RXDA RXLEV RXQUAL SACCH SCH SDCCH SCU SE SES SIG SIM SMS SO SS Sub-RU the same type. The RU is the smallest unit that can be handled on site. Receiver Receiver antenna branch A Receiver antenna branch B Receiver Divider Receiver Divider Amplier Measure of signal strength as dened in GSM 05.08:8.1.4 Measure of signal quality as dened in GSM 05.08:8.2.4 Slow Associated Control CHannel Synchronization CHannel Stand alone Dedicated Control CHannel Main dedicated signalling channel on the air interface, mainly used for call locating and establishment. Switching and Combining Unit Supervised Entity Severely Errored Second Signalling Subscriber Identity Module Short Message Service (point to point) A short message, up to 160 alphanumeric characters long, can be sent to or from an MS (point to point). Service Object Swedish Standard A sub-replaceable unit is always connected to a superior Main RU. This connection is used for example for retrieval of the RU identity. A sub-RU normally does not have a processor. Note that an RU with a processor, which cannot be loaded, is classied as a sub-RU. SVS System Voltage Sensor 418 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 SW SWR SYNC T1 TA TC TCH TCH SIG TD TDMA TDMA frame TDR TEI TEMS TF TG Timing bus Glossary SoftWare Standing Wave Ratio Synchronous Transmission facility for DS1 (1544 kbit/s) Timing Advance A signal sent by the BTS to the MS which the MS uses to advance its timing of transmissions to the BTS to compensate for propagation delay. Transaction Capabilities Trafc CHannel The trafc channels carry either encoded speech or user data. Trafc CHannel Signalling Transmit Data Time Division Multiple Access Multiplexing of several channels in a common frequency band. Each channel is assigned a certain time division, a time slot. GSM air interface time frame comprising eight time slots Time Domain Reectometer Terminal Endpoint Identier TEI is an identication code carried by a LAPD frame as a terminal connection endpoint within a Service Access Point
(SAP). TEst Mobile Station Timing Function Transceiver Group The timing bus carries air timing information from the timing unit in the DXU to the TRUs. TM Transport Module EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 419 (421) Glossary The Transport module is non-RBS equipment belonging to the transport network. TMA Tower Mounted Amplier There are three types of TMAs: dTMA, rTMA and ddTMA. >dTMA >rTMA
>ddTMA Timeslot Number Transport Network operation and Maintenance (in general) ASIC in the TRU Transcoder Rate Adapter The TRA Unit performs transcoding of speech information and rate adaption of data information. ASIC in the TRU Transceiver System Transceiver Unit Transceiver Transceiver Controller Time Slot A 0.577 ms period (TDMA frame subunit) corresponding to 156.25 raw bits of information. The eight time slots of each TDMA frame are numbered 0...7.
-> Burst Total Time Timing Unit Transmitter Transmitter Antenna A Transmitter Antenna B Transmitter BandPass lter Unavailable Seconds Underwriter Laboratories TN TN O&M Tora TRA Tracy TRS TRU TRX TRXC TS TT TU TX TXA TXB TXBP UAS UL 420 (421) Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Uplink UPS VCO VSWR X-bus Y-link Glossary Signalling direction from the MS to the system Uninterrupted Power Supply Voltage Controlled Oscillator Voltage Standing Wave Ratio RF signal measure. The quotient between transmitted and reected voltage. The X-bus carries transmit air data frames between transceivers. The interface between the DXU and each DSP System in Core based TRUs EN/LZT 720 0008 R1A 2001-06-26 Ericsson Radio Systems AB All Rights Reserved 421 (421)
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2001-10-10 | 1930.2 ~ 1989.8 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | Original Equipment |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Effective |
2001-10-10
|
||||
| 1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Ericsson Radio Systems AB
|
||||
| 1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0005940275
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
Torshamnsgatan 21-23
|
||||
| 1 |
S-164 80 Stockholm, N/A
|
|||||
| 1 |
Sweden
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| 1 | TCB Application Email Address |
t******@sp.se
|
||||
| 1 | TCB Scope |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 | Grantee Code |
B5K
|
||||
| 1 | Equipment Product Code |
PKRC1311004-1
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 | Name |
B******** B********
|
||||
| 1 | Title |
Manager
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
+468 ********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
+468 ********
|
||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Ericsson Radio Systems AB
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
L**** B****** L****
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
Torshamnsgatan 21-23
|
||||
| 1 |
S-164 80 Stockholm, 99999999
|
|||||
| 1 |
Sweden
|
|||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
+46 8******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
+46 8********
|
||||
| 1 |
l******@era.ericsson.se
|
|||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
| 1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Equipment Class | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | ||||
| 1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | PCS Broadband GSM Base station | ||||
| 1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
| 1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
| 1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Grant Comments | Power output listed is per carrier and conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be fixed-mounted on outdoor permanent structures. RF exposure compliance is addressed at the time of licensing, as required by the responsible FCC Bureau(s), including antenna co- location requirements of 1.1307(b)(3). This unit must use reduced transmit power as documented in the filing for the channels adjacent to each frequency block edge. | ||||
| 1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
SP Technical Research Institute of Sweden
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
M**** W********
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
46-10********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
46-33********
|
||||
| 1 |
m******@sp.se
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 24E | BB | 1930.20000000 | 1989.80000000 | 28.0000000 | 0.0500000000 ppm | 210KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC